Epson Printer 7600 Users Manual StylusPro7600_9600_A

9600 to the manual 0c571298-6899-4cf2-95ab-2b8a3cf7f957

2015-01-23

: Epson Epson-Epson-Printer-7600-Users-Manual-251537 epson-epson-printer-7600-users-manual-251537 epson pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 322

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Large Format Inkjet Printer

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

SEIJ01017

Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

General Notice:

Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.

DANGER

Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.

WARNING

Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE
OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR
ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON
POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT
TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTISTATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF
SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON
WARRANTY.

About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.

Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of
the product.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and
assembling the product.
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of
Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing
the product.
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:
• Connector pin assignments
• Electric circuit boards components layout
• Electrical circuit boards schematics
• Exploded diagram & Parts List

Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and
always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to,
or destruction of, equipment.

May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may
also provide additional information that is related to a specific
subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous
action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss
of life.

Revision Status
Revision

Date of Issue

May 10, 2002

Description

First release

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description

1.2.11.2 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 9600 .................................. 29

1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 12
1.1.1 Features ...................................................................................................... 12
1.1.2 Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro 9600 ...................... 13
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................
1.2.1 Print Specifications ....................................................................................
1.2.2 Character Specification ..............................................................................
1.2.3 Control Code ..............................................................................................
1.2.4 Paper Feed .................................................................................................
1.2.5 Paper Specifications ...................................................................................
1.2.5.1 Roll Paper ...........................................................................................
1.2.5.2 Sheet ...................................................................................................
1.2.5.3 Special Paper ......................................................................................
1.2.6 Mechanism Specifications .........................................................................
1.2.6.1 Printable Area .....................................................................................
1.2.6.2 Paper Set Lever ..................................................................................
1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification ..........................................................................
1.2.6.4 Acoustic Noise ...................................................................................
1.2.7 Electrical Specifications (TBD) .................................................................
1.2.8 Reliability ..................................................................................................
1.2.8.1 Total Print Volume .............................................................................
1.2.8.2 Print Head Life ...................................................................................
1.2.8.3 Maintenance Tank Life ......................................................................
1.2.8.4 Cutter Life average .............................................................................
1.2.8.5 Maintenance Parts (TBD) ...................................................................
1.2.9 Ambient Conditions ...................................................................................
1.2.9.1 Temperature/Humidity .......................................................................
1.2.9.2 Vibration .............................................................................................
1.2.9.3 Shock ..................................................................................................
1.2.9.4 Surrounding Space .............................................................................
1.2.10 Overall Dimensions .................................................................................
1.2.11 Accessories ..............................................................................................
1.2.11.1 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 7600 ..................................

14
14
14
14
14
15
15
16
18
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
26
28
28

1.3 External View and Parts Names ......................................................................... 30
1.4 Operating Panel ..................................................................................................
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions ...............................................................................
1.4.1.1 Functions of Buttons ..........................................................................
1.4.1.2 LEDs ...................................................................................................
1.4.2 Indications on the Panel .............................................................................
1.4.2.1 lED Indications in Normal Mode .......................................................
1.4.2.2 LCD Indications in Normal Mode .....................................................
1.4.3 SelecType ..................................................................................................
1.4.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................
1.4.3.2 Panel Setting Menu Item ....................................................................
1.4.3.3 PG Setting ..........................................................................................
1.4.3.4 Page Lines ..........................................................................................
1.4.3.5 Interface Select ...................................................................................
1.4.3.6 Code Page Switching .........................................................................
1.4.3.7 Roll Paper Margin ..............................................................................
1.4.3.8 Detect Paper Width ............................................................................
1.4.3.9 Detect Skew Error ..............................................................................
1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting .........................................................................
1.4.3.11 No margin print setting ....................................................................
1.4.3.12 Cutter position adjustment ...............................................................
1.4.3.13 Auto margin refresh .........................................................................
1.4.3.14 Panel Setup Value Initialization .......................................................
1.4.3.15 Nozzle Check Pattern Printing .........................................................
1.4.3.16 Status Printing ..................................................................................
1.4.3.17 Job Information Print .......................................................................
1.4.3.18 Firmware version ..............................................................................
1.4.3.19 Printable pages of each ink cartridge ...............................................
1.4.3.20 Ink remaining ...................................................................................
1.4.3.21 Maintenance tank count ...................................................................
1.4.3.22 Use counter .......................................................................................
1.4.3.23 Clear use counter ..............................................................................
1.4.3.24 Job history display ............................................................................

31
31
31
32
33
33
34
35
35
36
40
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
44
44
45
45
46
48
49
49
49
49
50
50
50

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
1.4.3.25 Job history clear ................................................................................
1.4.3.26 Total prints .......................................................................................
1.4.3.27 Consumables life ..............................................................................
1.4.3.28 Suction adjustment for paper setting and indicator display .............
1.4.3.29 Ink remaining indicator display ........................................................
1.4.3.30 Job information .................................................................................
1.4.3.31 User Paper Setting ............................................................................
1.4.3.32 Power cleaning .................................................................................
1.4.3.33 Cutter Blade Replacement ................................................................
1.4.3.34 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) ................
1.4.3.35 BK ink cartridge replacement ...........................................................
1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1 .................................................................................
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2 .................................................................................
1.4.6 Paper feeding adjustment conversion table ...............................................
1.4.7 Firmware Reload .......................................................................................
1.4.7.1 Reload from ROM-DIMM .................................................................
1.4.7.2 Reload with F/W DOWNLOAD mode ..............................................
1.4.7.3 Installation with service utility (F/W Update function) .....................
1.4.7.4 Compulsory start F/W DOWNLOAD mode ......................................
1.4.8 Function to prevent irregular printing ........................................................
1.4.9 Initialization ...............................................................................................
1.4.9.1 Hardware initialization .......................................................................
1.4.9.2 Software initialization ........................................................................
1.4.9.3 Panel initialization ..............................................................................
1.4.10 Default Setup Values ...............................................................................
1.4.10.1 Initial Setting for Operation .............................................................
1.4.10.2 Ink Type Setting ...............................................................................
1.4.10.3 MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes ......
1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table ...................................................

Revision A
50
50
51
53
54
55
56
60
60
60
64
66
70
84
85
85
85
85
85
86
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
88
89

1.5 Controller ............................................................................................................ 90
1.6 Interfaces ............................................................................................................
1.6.1 Parallel Interface ........................................................................................
1.6.1.1 Compatibility Mode ...........................................................................
1.6.1.2 Nibble Mode .......................................................................................
1.6.1.3 ECP Mode ..........................................................................................
1.6.2 USB interface .............................................................................................
1.6.3 Optional Interface ......................................................................................
1.6.4 Supplements ...............................................................................................

91
91
91
93
94
95
96
97

1.7 Optional Units and Consumables ....................................................................... 98

1.7.1 Ink Cartridge ..............................................................................................
1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge ......................................................................................
1.7.3 Draining cartridge ......................................................................................
1.7.4 Maintenance Tank .....................................................................................

98
99
99
99

Chapter 2 Operating Principles
2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 101
2.2 Print Mechanism Components .........................................................................
2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism .......................................................................
2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly ..............................................................................
2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism ...............................................................................
2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism ............................................................................
2.2.5 Others .......................................................................................................

102
103
113
115
117
118

2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board ...................................................................... 119
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board ........................................................... 120

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 122
3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 122
3.2 Error Display ....................................................................................................
3.2.1 Errors .......................................................................................................
3.2.1.1 Error Indications on LCD .................................................................
3.2.1.2 Warning Indications on LCD ...........................................................
3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors ................................................................
3.2.2 Errors .......................................................................................................
3.2.2.1 Paper End/End of roll .......................................................................
3.2.2.2 Wrong paper source is selected on panel .........................................
3.2.2.3 Paper set lever is released during operation .....................................
3.2.2.4 Paper set lever is released .................................................................
3.2.2.5 Paper Jam .........................................................................................
3.2.2.6 Front Cover Open .............................................................................
3.2.2.7 Type-B I/F error ...............................................................................
3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error ............................................................................
3.2.2.9 Paper Not Straight ............................................................................
3.2.2.10 Paper check error/Paper eject error (sheet) ....................................
3.2.2.11 Paper is too thick for cleaning ........................................................
3.2.2.12 Not enough ink for cleaning ...........................................................

123
123
123
124
125
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
128
128
128
129
129
129

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
3.2.2.13 Ink-related Errors ........................................................................... 130
3.2.2.14 Defective ink cartridge ................................................................... 130
3.2.2.15 Ink lever released ............................................................................ 130
3.2.2.16 Illegal ink cartridge ........................................................................ 131
3.2.2.17 Maintenance tank full ..................................................................... 131
3.2.2.18 No Maintenance tank ...................................................................... 131
3.2.2.19 Wrong IK designation .................................................................... 131
3.2.2.20 Fatal Error ....................................................................................... 131
3.2.3 Troubleshooting for Warning .................................................................. 132
3.2.3.1 Ink Low ............................................................................................ 132
3.2.3.2 Maintenance tank full warning ......................................................... 132
3.2.3.3 Maintenance request ......................................................................... 132
3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors .................................................. 134
3.2.4.1 CR motor life (00000101) ................................................................ 134
3.2.4.2 PF motor encoder check error (00010000) ....................................... 135
3.2.4.3 PF Motor out of step (00010001) ..................................................... 135
3.2.4.4 PF motor overcurrent (00010002) .................................................... 136
3.2.4.5 PF motor in-position time out (00010003) ....................................... 136
3.2.4.6 CR motor encoder check error (00010004) ...................................... 137
3.2.4.7 CR motor out of step (00010005) ..................................................... 137
3.2.4.8 CR motor overcurrent (00010006) ................................................... 138
3.2.4.9 CR motor in-position time-out (00010007) ...................................... 138
3.2.4.10 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out (00010008) ............................. 139
3.2.4.11 System interrupt watchdog time-out (00010009) ........................... 139
3.2.4.12 CR home position sensor error (0001000A) .................................. 139
3.2.4.13 PF home position sensor error (0001000B) ................................... 139
3.2.4.14 Head slide (PG) home position sensor error (0001000C) .............. 140
3.2.4.15 CR motor PWM output faulty (0001000F) .................................... 140
3.2.4.16 PF motor PWM output faulty (00010010) ..................................... 141
3.2.4.17 Head driver (TG) temperature error (0001001B) ........................... 141
3.2.4.18 CR servo parameter error (0001001D) ........................................... 142
3.2.4.19 PF servo parameter error (0001001E) ............................................ 142
3.2.4.20 CSIC reed/right error (00010020) .................................................. 143
3.2.4.21 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) (00010022) ............... 143
3.2.4.22 RTC analysis error (00010023) ...................................................... 143
3.2.4.23 CSIC ROM communication error (00010025) ............................... 144
3.2.4.24 RTC communication error (00010026) .......................................... 144
3.2.4.25 Head error (00010028) ................................................................... 144
3.2.4.26 Unidentified NMI (00010029) ....................................................... 144
3.2.4.27 CR ASIC ECU error (0001002A) .................................................. 144

Revision A
3.2.4.28 PF ASIC ECU error (0001002B) ...................................................
3.2.4.29 NVRAM error (00020000) .............................................................
3.2.4.30 SDRAM error (00020002) .............................................................
3.2.4.31 BOOT program SUM error (00020003) ........................................
3.2.4.32 Flash memory SUM error (00020009) ...........................................
3.2.4.33 Program load error (0002000A) .....................................................
3.2.4.34 Internal memory shortage error (0002000B) .................................
3.2.4.35 Review error (0002000C) ...............................................................
3.2.4.36 CPU address error (load misalignment) (100000E0) .................
3.2.4.37 CPU address error (storage misalignment) (10000100) .................
3.2.4.38 CPU reserve command code exception error (10000180) .............
3.2.4.39 CPU slot illegal command exception error (100001A0) ................
3.2.4.40 CPU DMA address error (100005C0) ............................................
3.2.4.41 CPU error (10000xxx) ....................................................................

144
144
145
145
145
145
145
146
146
146
146
146
146
146

3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout .........................................................
3.3.1 Dot Missing .............................................................................................
3.3.2 Uneven Printing/Poor Resolution ............................................................
3.3.3 Smudged or Marred Printout (Front) .......................................................
3.3.4 Smudged or Marred Printout (Reverse side) ...........................................
3.3.5 White or Black Banding in the carriage running direction ......................
3.3.6 Banding in the paper feed direction .........................................................

147
147
148
148
149
149
150

Chapter 4 Disassembly & Assembly
4.1 Summary ..........................................................................................................
4.1.1 Precautions ...............................................................................................
4.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................................
4.1.3 Screw List ................................................................................................
4.1.4 Disassembly Flow ....................................................................................

152
152
155
155
156

4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing ............................................................
4.2.1 Panel Unit ................................................................................................
4.2.2 R Side Cover ............................................................................................
4.2.3 L Side Cover ............................................................................................
4.2.4 I/H Cover .................................................................................................
4.2.5 H Top Cover ............................................................................................
4.2.6 Rear Cover ...............................................................................................
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 ........................................................................................
4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover .....................................................................................
4.2.9 Front Cover ..............................................................................................

158
159
160
163
164
165
166
168
169
170

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism ..............................
4.3.1 Print Head ................................................................................................
4.3.2 Damper ASSY .........................................................................................
4.3.3 CR Board ASSY ......................................................................................
4.3.4 Cutter Section ..........................................................................................
4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY .........................................................................
4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid .................................................................................
4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY .......................................................................
4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY ...........................................................................
4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY ......................................................................................
4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY ..................................................................
4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY ..............................................................................
4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) ........................................................

171
171
173
174
175
175
177
178
179
180
182
183
184

4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism ...................................
4.4.1 PF Motor ..................................................................................................
4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY .......................................................................
4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale ...........................................
4.4.3.1 Assembly Procedure for the PF Loop Scale ASSY .........................
4.4.3.2 PF Loop Scale ASSY Affixing Procedure .......................................
4.4.4 Suction Fans .............................................................................................
4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY .....................................
4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY ...........................................................................

185
185
186
187
187
188
189
190
191

4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism ...................................
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board ................................................................................
4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY ............................................................................
4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY ................................................................................

192
192
193
197

4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism ......................................
4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal ..................................................................
4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY ..................................................................................
4.6.3 Cap ASSY ................................................................................................
4.6.4 Pump ASSY .............................................................................................
4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) ..............................................................................
4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY ................................................................................

198
199
200
200
201
203
204

4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards .................................................
4.7.1 Power Supply Board ................................................................................
4.7.2 AC Inlet ...................................................................................................
4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) ....................................................................
4.7.4 DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment ..................

205
205
206
207
209

Chapter 5 Adjustment
5.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................
5.1.1 Cautions ...................................................................................................
5.1.2 Adjustment Tools ....................................................................................
5.1.3 Procedure for Adjustment Work ..............................................................
5.1.4 Adjustment Items .....................................................................................
5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment .....................................................................
5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment ...................................................................
5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment ......................................................................
5.1.4.4 PF Motor Adjustment .......................................................................
5.1.4.5 P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment ................................................
5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment ................................................
5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment .....................
5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment ...........................................
5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment .....................................................
5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment ..........................................
5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment ...................
5.1.4.12 Damper ASSY Adjustment ............................................................
5.1.4.13 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Adjustment .........................................
5.1.4.14 Battery ............................................................................................
5.1.5 Parameter Backup ....................................................................................
5.1.5.1 Parameter Backup Procedure ...........................................................
5.1.5.2 Work Procedure ................................................................................
5.1.5.3 Others ...............................................................................................
5.1.6 Firmware Reinstallation ..........................................................................
5.1.6.1 Firmware Installation through ROM-DIMM ...................................
5.1.6.2 Firmware Installation through Interface ...........................................

211
211
211
212
212
212
213
214
214
215
215
215
215
216
216
217
217
217
217
218
218
218
218
219
219
219

5.2 Self-diagnostic Function ...................................................................................
5.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................
5.2.1.1 How to Start Self-diagnostic Function .............................................
5.2.1.2 Functions of Keys during Self-diagnosis .........................................
5.2.1.3 Top Menu .........................................................................................
5.2.2 Test ..........................................................................................................
5.2.2.1 Version .............................................................................................
5.2.2.2 Control Panel ....................................................................................
5.2.2.3 Sensors .............................................................................................
5.2.2.4 Encoder .............................................................................................
5.2.2.5 Fan ....................................................................................................
5.2.2.6 Record ..............................................................................................

220
220
220
220
221
222
223
223
224
225
225
226

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.7 CSIC ................................................................................................. 227
5.2.2.8 Actuator ............................................................................................ 229
5.2.2.9 Actuator 2 ......................................................................................... 229
5.2.3 Adjustment ............................................................................................... 230
5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment ........................................................................ 231
5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment ....................................................................... 232
5.2.3.3 Input Rank ........................................................................................ 233
5.2.3.4 Write D/A Value .............................................................................. 236
5.2.3.5 Check Nozzle ................................................................................... 237
5.2.3.6 Check Skew ...................................................................................... 238
5.2.3.7 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment ................................................ 239
5.2.3.8 Top & Bottom Adjustment ............................................................... 242
5.2.3.9 Rear Sensor Position ........................................................................ 243
5.2.3.10 Platen Position (Sponge Position) Adjustment .............................. 244
5.2.3.11 Platen Position Checking ................................................................ 245
5.2.3.12 Head Slant Checking ...................................................................... 246
5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) ............ 248
5.2.3.14 Parameter Copying ......................................................................... 251
5.2.3.15 Bi-D2 Adjustment (PG=0.7mm) .................................................... 251
5.2.3.16 Bi-D3 Adjustment (PG=2.1mm) .................................................... 251
5.2.3.17 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking ............... 252
5.2.3.18 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) ................................... 253
5.2.3.19 Test Pattern Printing ....................................................................... 255
5.2.3.20 Clean Head ..................................................................................... 256
5.2.3.21 Counter Clear ................................................................................. 257
5.2.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................... 259
5.2.5 Print .......................................................................................................... 259
5.2.6 Parameter ................................................................................................. 260
5.2.6.1 Parameter Initialize ........................................................................... 261
5.3 Mechanism Adjustment ....................................................................................
5.3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................
5.3.2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ......................................................
5.3.3 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment .......................................................
5.3.4 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate Position Adjustment .
5.3.5 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment ..............................
5.3.6 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment ...............................
5.3.7 Cutter Positioning Adjustment ................................................................
5.3.7.1 Paper Cutting Position Check ...........................................................
5.3.8 PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment ..............................
5.3.9 USB ID Writing .......................................................................................

Chapter 6 Maintenance
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 275
6.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Items and Product Life Information .................... 276
6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service Operations ...................... 279
6.2 Lubrication and Glue ........................................................................................ 280
6.2.1 Lubricating the CR Guide Rail ................................................................ 280

Chapter 7 Appendix
7.1 Connectors ........................................................................................................ 282
7.2 Component Layout ........................................................................................... 285
7.3 Circuit Diagrams .............................................................................................. 286
7.4 Exploded Diagrams .......................................................................................... 292
7.5 ASP List (Parts List) ......................................................................................... 317
7.5.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 .................................................................. 317
7.5.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 .................................................................. 320

263
263
263
264
265
267
268
269
271
272
273

CHAPTER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.1 Product Description

Stylus Pro 9600
Table 1-2. Throughput (Stylus Pro 9600)

1.1.1 Features
Large Format
Stylus Pro 7600:
Stylus Pro 9600:

EPSON media

Pigment ink / Dye ink
Pigment ink:
•
•
•

Users can select following blackish ink combinations.
Photo Black + Light Black
Matte Black + Light Black
Matte Black × 2
Dye ink:
2 black ink cartridges are installed.

High-speed Throughput
Stylus Pro 7600

Quality

Resolution
(dpi)

Mode

Throughput
(A1 printing time)

Draft*1

360 × 180

Pseudo 4-color

2 min.

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D MF 240 cps

3/2 (BK×2*2)
min.

Doubleweight
Matte Paper

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D M/W(POL) 240 cps 5 min.

Quality

720 × 360

Bi-DFOL(POL)

9 min

Glossy Photo
Paper
Glossy PaperHeavy Weight

Speed

720 × 360

Bi-D 22POL 240 cps

8 min.

Quality

720 × 720

Bi-D 14POL 240 cps

13 min.

Adv.Photo

1440 × 720

Bi-D 4-pass 240 cps

25 min

Photo 2880

2880 × 1440

Bi-D 4-pass 190 cps

55 min

Plain Paper

Throughput
(A1 printing time)

Pseudo 4-color

3.5 min

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D MF 240 cps

6/3.5 (BK×2*2)
min.

Doubleweight
Matte Paper

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D M/W(POL) 240 cps 9 min.

Quality

720 × 360

Bi-DFOL(POL)

17 min

Glossy Photo
Paper
Glossy PaperHeavy Weight

Speed

720 × 360

Bi-D 22POL 240 cps

14 min

Quality

720 × 720

Bi-D 14POL 240 cps

24 min

Adv.Photo

1440 × 720

Bi-D 4-pass 240 cps

46 min

Photo 2880

2880 × 1440

Bi-D 4-pass 190 cps

102 min

Note *1:

Color high-speed 360×180dpi mode (for POP, for all ink combinations of pigment/
dye)

*2:

Black double-speed mode (for CAD, supported with FW),
(It is switched automatically with 2 BK ink cartridge installation (dye/PPI) + M/W
OFF)

Super High Quality

High image quality with 7-color ink, 2880×1440 dpi, and minimum 4pl various
layers.

Low Running Cost
• Independent for each color and 110 ml ink cartridge
• Large capacity 220 ml ink cartridge as an option

Paper Handling
•
•
•
•

Note *1:

Color high-speed 360×180dpi mode (for POP, for all ink combinations of pigment/
dye)

*2:

Black double-speed mode (for CAD, supported with FW),
(It is switched automatically with 2 BK ink cartridge installation (dye/PPI) + M/W
OFF)

Product Description

Mode

360 × 180

Table 1-1. Throughput (Stylus Pro 7600)
EPSON media

Resolution
(dpi)

Draft*1

Plain Paper

Max. 24 inch paper width, A1+ size supported
Max. 44 inch paper width, B0+ size supported

Quality

Support various media.
Automatic roll paper cutter, manual cutter
Automatic loading (cut sheet)
Borderless print for right and left

Compatibility with other LFPs
Commands are upper compatible with Stylus Pro 10000, Stylus Pro 10000CF,
Stylus Pro 9000, Stylus Pro 9500, Stylus Pro 7000, and Stylus Pro 7500.

The latest RIP technology
CPSI Pro software RIP

Product Description

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.1.2 Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro
9600
Table 1-3. Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro 9600
Item
Product
Specifications

Maximum paper
width
RAM capacity

Option

Take-up Reel Unit
220 ml ink
cartridge

Product Description

Stylus Pro 7600

Stylus Pro 9600

610mm
(About 24 inches /
A1+size supported)

1118m
(About 44 inches /
B0+size supported)

32MB (16Mbit×2)
(IC600/601 = not mounted)

64MB (16Mbit×4)

Not supported
(CN30 = not mounted)

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Product Description

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2 Basic Specifications

Table 1-5. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 9600)

1.2.1 Print Specifications
Printing:

Horizontal resolution
(dpi)

Printable area

Maximum number
of printable dots

Printing speed

360

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

15762

240 cps

On-demand ink-jet

Nozzle configuration:
Black:
192 nozzles (Black1, Black2, 96 nozzles each)
Color:
480 nozzles (cyan, magenta, light cyan, light magenta,
yellow, 96 nozzles each)
0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color

Nozzle pitch:

31524

240 cps

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

63048

240 cps

2880

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

126087

190 cps

Character tables:

Bi-direction with logic seeking (high-speed return, high-speed skip only)

Printing speed and printable area
Character mode

Stylus Pro 7600:
Stylus Pro 9600:
• Printing speed:
Graphic Mode

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

1.2.2 Character Specification

Printing direction:

• Character quality:
• Character pitch:
• Printable area:

720
1440

2 international character sets
PC 437 (US, Standard Europe)
PC 850 (Multilingual)

NOTE: This specification is not described in the user's manual.

Typeface:

high quality
10 cpi

Bit map LQ font:

237 characters (at 10 cpi) / 8,561 dots (360dpi)
437 characters (at 10 cpi) / 15,840 dots (360dpi)
240 cps max.

EPSON Courier 10 cpi

NOTE: This specifications is not described in the user's manual.

1.2.3 Control Code
Control code:
ESC/P Raster
ESC/P3

Table 1-4. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 7600)
Horizontal resolution
(dpi)

Printable area

Maximum number
of printable dots

Printing speed

360

604 mm (24.16 inches)

8698

240 cps

1.2.4 Paper Feed
Paper feeding:

Friction feed

Line spacing:

1/6 inch or programmable at 1440 inch

Paper path:

Roll paper/manual

Feed speed:

6.35 mm paper feed: 215 ± 10 msec
(except front rush, back rush, and hold time)

720

604 mm (24.16 inches)

17395

240 cps

1440

604 mm (24.16 inches)

34790

240 cps

2880

604 mm (24.16 inches)

69581

190 cps

Product Description

NOTE: This specifications is not described in the user's manual.

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.5 Paper Specifications

PLAIN PAPER

1.2.5.1 Roll Paper

Trouble-free paper feeding is ensured only in the following specifications.

Paper Size

ACCEPTABLE PAPER

Table 1-7. Acceptable Roll Paper Sizes (Plain Paper)

The printer accepts following plain paper and EPSON special paper. With any other
paper, proper paper feeding and satisfactory print quality are not ensured.

Paper Size
Table 1-6. Acceptable Roll Paper Sizes (Acceptable Paper)
Core
2-inch core
3-inch core

Core
2-inch core

Model

3-inch core

Paper Size

Stylus Pro 7600

203mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 45 m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 45 m (H) *

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 202 m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 202 m (H) *

Note "*": Within roll size

Roll Size
2-inch core: 103 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
3-inch core: 150 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting

Model

Paper Size

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 45m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 45m (H) *

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 202m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 202m (H) *

Note "*": Within roll size

Roll Size
2-inch core: 103 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
3-inch core: 150 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
Thickness: 0.08 ~ 0.11 mm
Weight: 64 ~ 90gf/m2
Type: Plain paper, Recycle paper

Thickness: 0.08 mm ~ 0.50 mm

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

BORDERLESS PRINT ROLL PAPER

1.2.5.2 Sheet

Borderless print for right and left is enssured for roll paper with any of the paper widths
as specified in Figure 1-9 below.

ACCEPTABLE PAPER

NOTE: 300 mm, 400 mm, 500 mm and 600 mm are supported for Europe.

The printer accepts following plain paper and special paper. With any other paper,
proper paper feeding and satisfactory print quality are not ensured.

Paper Size (The sizes indicated in bold italic are only for Stylus Pro 9600.)

Paper width

Table 1-9. Acceptable Sheet Sizes (Acceptable Paper)

Table 1-8.

Paper Size

Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9600
Japan

8”

USA/Europe

8”

210
mm
210
mm

10”

12”

14”

16”

20”

24”

36”

44”

10”

300
mm

12”

14”

400
mm

16”

500
mm

20”

600
mm

24”

36”

44”

Note 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.
2: The force to remove the end of the roll paper from the core should be between 300 gf
and 2000 gf
3: If core is used, a product-exclusive option (roll paper spindle 3 inch) is necessary.
4: It is used under normal conditions. (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C, humidity 40 ~ 60%RH)
5: Roll paper can be printed before paper comes out of the core.
(Reference: Remaining paper length is 30cm approx. when roll paper come out of the
core.)
6: The mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for borderless printing.

Size (W × H)

Paper Size

Size (W × H)

B0+*

1118 mm × 1580 mm

210 mm × 297 mm

B0 *

1030 mm × 1456 mm

US E

34 × 44 in

B1 *

728 mm × 1030 mm

US D

22 × 34 in

515 mm × 728 mm

US C

17 × 22 in

364 mm × 515 mm

US B

11 × 17 in

257 mm × 364 mm

44 × 36 in *

44 × 36 in

A0+ *

914 mm × 1292 mm

30 × 24 in

A0 *

841 mm × 1189 mm

Letter

8.5 × 11 in

A1+

24 × 36 in

B1 (wide) *

1030 × 728 mm

594m × 841 mm

8 × 10 in

420 mm × 594 mm

30 cm × 45 cm

A3+

329 mm × 483 mm

60 cm × 90 cm

297 mm × 420 mm

Note "*": Only for Stylus Pro 9600

Thickness
0.08 ~ 1.5 mm (paper length: 279 mm ~ 728 mm)
0.08 ~ 0.5 mm (paper length: 728 mm ~ 1580 mm)
NOTE 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be
smooth.
2: 0.08 ~ 1.50 mm paper thickness is supported for long-edge insertion.
3: The sizes indicated in bold italic are only for Stylus Pro 9600.

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

PLAIN PAPER
C H E C K
P O IN T

Proper feeding is ensured only in the following specifications.

Paper Size:

Same as above list

Thickness:

0.08 ~ 0.11 mm

Weight:

64 ~ 90 gf/m2

Type:

Plain paper, Recycle paper

NOTE 1: Paper is fed short-edge first.
2: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be
smooth.
3: It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15 ~ 25°C, humidity 40 ~
60%RH)
4: 300mm, 400mm, 500mm, 600mm are supported for Europe.
5: Mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for borderless print.

Description of units of measure
cpi:
characters per inch
dpi:
dots per inch
cps:
characters printed per second (at 10 cpi)
1 cps = 2.54 mm/s
ips:
travel in inches per second
1 ips = 25.4 mm/s
G:
Gravity
General ambient conditions:
Temperature 15°C ~ 25°C
Humidity 40% ~ 60%

BORDERLESS PRINT WIDTH
Borderless print for right and left is assured with following paper width. *4

Paper width
Table 1-10.
Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9600
Japan

8”

USA/Europe

8”

210
mm
210
mm

Product Description

10”

12”

14”

16”

20”

24”

36”

44”

10”

300
mm

12”

14”

400
mm

16”

500
mm

20”

600
mm

24”

36”

44”

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.5.3 Special Paper
Roll (pigment)

Table 1-11. Availability with Special Paper (Pigment)
Characteristic
Roll / Pigment

Name

Black INK

Media Size

Paper
core”
Auto Borde
thickness
spindle
cut rless
(mm)

USA/
MK MK PK
Japan Europe
×2 +LK +LK
/Asia

10”

30
cm

12”

14”

40
cm

16”

50
cm

20”

22”

60
cm

24”

36”

203

210

254

300

305

356

400

406

500

508

560

600

610

914 1118

44”

{

0.21

Glossy Paper - Photo Weight

{

0.22

Glossy Film

{

0.13

Premium Glossy Photo Paper

{

0.18

Premium Semigloss Photo Paper

{

0.18

Photo Glossy Paper / Photo Grade Glossy Paper

{

0.17

Photo Semigloss Paper / Photo Grade Semigloss Paper

{

0.18

Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)

{

0.26

Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250)

{

0.26

Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (250)

{

0.26

Premium Luster Photo Paper

{

0.26

Watercolor Paper - Radiant White

{

0.29

{

Textured Fine Art Paper (Roll)

{

Canvas
Backlight Film

210
mm

Doubleweight Matte Paper

Smooth Fine Art Paper (Roll)

8”

0.37

{

0.46

{

0.13

{

{
{

Backlight Film (USA / Europe)

0.18

0.28

~
~

{

Enhanced Synthetic Paper

{

0.12

Adhesive Enhanced Synthetic Paper

{

0.17

Tyvek Brillion

{

0.24

Adhesive Vinyl

{

0.33

{

Heavyweight Polyester Banner

{

0.25

TBD

{

TBD

Semiglossy 4

{

TBD

Dupont / EPSON Semi - Gloss Proofing Paper - A

{

0.20

Enhanced Matte Paper
Semiglossy 2

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Roll (dye)
Table 1-12. Availability with Special Paper (Dye)
Characteristic
Roll / Dye

Name

Japan

USA/
Europe/
Asia

core”
spindle

Media Size

8”
Paper
thickness Auto cut Borderless
(mm)
203

210
mm

10” 30cm 12”

14” 40cm 16” 50cm 20”

22” 60cm 24”

36”

210

254

300

305

356

400

406

500

508

560

600

610

914 1118

44”

Presentation Matte Paper

{

0.20

{

Semigloss Photo Paper (Asia / Europe)
Semi Gloss Paper - Heavy Weight (US)

{

0.21

{

Glossy Photo Paper (Asia / Europe)
Glossy Paper - Heavy Weight (US)

{

0.23

{

0.21

{

0.13

{

Photo Grade Glossy Paper (Asia / Europe)
Photo Glossy Paper (US)

{

0.17

{

Photo Grade Semigloss Paper (Asia / Europe)
Photo Semigloss Paper (US)

{

0.18

{

Doubleweight Matte Paper
Glossy Film

Heavyweight Polyester Banner

{

0.28

RC 10mil Glossy Paper (TBD)

TBD

{

0.26

{

RC 10mil Semigloss Paper (TBD)

TBD

{

0.26

{

Premium Luster Photo Paper

TBD

{

0.26

{

Dupont / EPSON Commercial Proofing Paper

{

0.21

{

Dupont / EPSON Commercial Matte Proofing Paper

{

0.24

{

Dupont / EPSON Publication Proofing Paper

{

0.24

{

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Note *1:

Assured with Uni-D print.

*2:

Paper is fed short-edge first.

*3:

Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.

*4:

It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C, humidity 40% ~ 60%RH)

*5:

Paper feeding and print quality with borderless print is not assured on paper which is not assured for borderless print.

*6:

Borderless print is not assured with sheet.

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Sheet (pigment)
Table 1-13. Availability with Sheets (Pigment)
Characteristic
Sheet / Pigment

Black INK

Media size

Super
A4
LTR
A3
B
A2
C
B2
A1
D
24”×30” 30”×40” 36”×44”
A3/B
Paper
thickness
(mm) 210×297 216×279 297×420 279×432 329×483 420×594 432×559 515×728 728×1030 559×864 610×762 762×1016 914×1118

Japan

USA/
Europe/
Asia

Glossy Paper - Photo Weight

{

Watercolor Paper - Radiant White

{

0.67

Name

Smooth Fine Art Paper
Textured Fine Art Paper
Enhanced Matte - Poster Board

MK MK PK
×2 +LK +LK
{

TBD

{

0.67

{

1.3

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle

Sheet (dye)
Table 1-14. Availability with Sheets (Dye)
Characteri stic

Mediasize

Sheet / Dye
Paper
thickness

LTR

Super
A3/B

210×297

216×279

297×420

279×432

329×483

420×594

432×559

515×728

728×1030

559×864

728×1030

B1”

Japan

USA/Europe
/Asia

Glossy Photo paper

{

Photo Quality Inkjet Paper

{

Glossy Film

{

Name

Semigloss Paper - Poster Board

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Note *1:
*2:

Assured with Uni-D print.
Paper is fed short-edge first.

*3:

Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.

*4:

It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15°C~25°C, humidity
40%~60%RH)

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
For borderless print, right and left margins are 3mm each because skew detection

1.2.6 Mechanism Specifications

limit is 3mm. If the distance from the paper edge to the platen (sponge width) is
less than 3mm, the maximum surplus print quantity without ink discharge onto the
platen (0mm~3mm) is printable area.

1.2.6.1 Printable Area
Table 1-15. Printable Area

PW
(Paper width)

Roll paper
/Sheet
Roll paper
Sheet

PL
(Paper length)
TM
(Top margin)

RM
(Right margin)

Dimension

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

Max. 202m

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

279 mm ~ 1580 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

3 mm/15 mm

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

3 mm

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

3 mm/15 mm

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

14 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm/15 mm

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm/15 mm

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm

BM
Roll paper
(Bottom margin) Sheet
LM
(Left margin)

Model

Paper Feed Direction

Item

Printable Area

The printer detects paper width when paper is set. (If paper width detection setting
is OFF, it does not detect paper width.)

It does not print the image beyond the detected paper width or the printable area
specified by paper size setting.
(It may print on the platen if paper width detection setting is OFF.)

Margins of roll paper can be changed on the panel as follows;
Top/bottom 15 mm, left/right 3 mm
Top/bottom/left/right 3 mm
Top/bottom/left/right 15 mm

Figure 1-1. Printable Area

NOTE: Under special conditions, it is possible to set right and left margin (LM,
RM) to 0.

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.6.2 Paper Set Lever

Table 1-17. Cutting Conditions and Cutting Methods
Cut condition

Table 1-16. Paper Set Lever
Lever Position

Initial cut (Cut with pushing “Cut/Eject” button after paper Paper is fed for L1 length and cut in 4 steps.
is set, and set lever is pushed down.)
(50cps)

Description

In the rear

Position for paper setting
(You can set paper.)

In the front

Ready-to-print position
(Paper is held with the paper holder.)

1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification

Cut after print completed by driver

4-step cut (200cps) When paper is shorter
than L2, it is cut after feeding L2.

Initial cut during printing

Cut during printing is not allowed with this
printer. (Product specification)

Initial cut during normal waiting status

Paper is fed for L1 length and cut in 4 steps.
(50cps)

4-step cut (200cps), when paper is longer
Initial cut with Auto cut ON after print with Auto cut OFF. than L2. 4-step cut (50cps) after feeding L2,
when paper is shorter than L2.

There are two methods to cut roll paper, automatic and manual cutting.
C A U T IO N

Cut method

Do not use the auto cutting function with any paper for which auto
cutting is prohibited; otherwise, the head would be damaged.

Cut with Paper width detection OFF

3-step cut always (100cps fixed)

Note : Cutting pressure at high speed can be changed.
Cutting pressure at low speed is “Duty: 45%” fixed.
Paper edge waiting position is fed L2 for initial cut.

AUTOMATIC CUTTING OF ROLL MEDIA

MANUAL CUTTING OF ROLL PAPER

Automatic cutting under the following conditions can only be performed on the
approved media.

Manual cutting is performed by the following procedure.
1.

Select “Roll Cutter Off” on the panel.

Mechanical conditions
Distance between cut position and paper setting position:
Distance between cut position and cutter mark:
Minimum cut length (same as paper edge waiting position):

Press “Cut/ Eject” button.

Paper is automatically fed toward the cutter guide, and printer becomes Off-line.
“Pause” is indicated on the LCD panel.

Adjust cutting position with “Paper Feed +/-” button if necessary.

Slide the cutter along the cutter guide to cut the paper.

After cutting, release the printer from the pause status by pressing the “Pause”
button. Then paper is fed backward and printer enters on-line.

L0=167mm
L1= 44mm
L2=030mm

C H E C K
P O IN T

Product Description

Basic Specifications

For manual cutting of roll paper, use the manual cutter available as
an option.

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.8 Reliability

1.2.6.4 Acoustic Noise
Level:

Approx. 50dB(A) (According to ISO 7779)

1.2.8.1 Total Print Volume
Stylus Pro 7600: 50,000 pages, 6.5million pass approx. (A1, 360×360 M/F, Bi-D)

1.2.7 Electrical Specifications (TBD)

Stylus Pro 9600: 20,000 pages, 5million pass approx. (B0, 360×360 M/F, Bi-D)

Rated voltage:

AC 100 ~ 240V

1.2.8.2 Print Head Life

Input voltage range:

AC 90 ~ 264V

Monochrome: 28billion shot / nozzle

Rated frequency range:

50 ~ 60Hz

Color: 28billion shot / nozzle

Input frequency range:

49 ~ 61Hz

Rated current:
Stylus Pro 7600:
Stylus Pro 9600:

1.0A/100-120v, 0.5A/220-240v
1.0A/100-120v, 0.5A/220-240v

Power consumption:
Operation status:
Waiting status:
Power OFF:

Stylus Pro 7600: 11,000 pages approx.
(A1, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)

Stylus Pro 9600: 5,000 pages approx.
(B0, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)

Stylus Pro 7600 50W
Stylus Pro 9600 55W
Less than 15W (shifting time: 15 minutes)
Less than 0.7W

Insulation resistance:

More than 10M ohms
(between AC line and chassis, DC 500V)

Dielectric strength:

AC 1.0kV rms 1min.
AC1.2kV rms 1 sec.
(between AC line and chassis)

Leakage:

1.2.8.3 Maintenance Tank Life

1.2.8.4 Cutter Life average
Table 1-18. Cutter life average
Paper Type

Stylus Pro 7600
For 24-inch standard roll paper,
3-step cutting

Stylus Pro 9600
For 44-inch standard roll paper,
3-step cutting

Coated paper

Approx. 2000 sheets

Film

Approx. 1000 sheets

Less than 0.25mA

1.2.8.5 Maintenance Parts (TBD)

International Energy Star Program Compliant:
(Complies with the power supply harmonic control
guideline)

RTC backup battery: (TBD)
Cleaning unit life average
(Cap assembly, Pomp assembly, Flushing box, Wiper)

Stylus Pro 7600: 18,000 pages approx.
(A1, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)
Stylus Pro 9600: 8,000 pages approx.
(B0, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)

Ink absorbent sponge for right/left borderless print: (TBD)

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.9 Ambient Conditions

1.2.9.3 Shock

1.2.9.1 Temperature/Humidity
Table 1-19. Temperature/Humidity
Temperature*1

Humidity*2

During operation

10 ~ 35°C

20 ~ 80%

During storage

-20 ~ 40°C

20 ~ 85%

During transport

-20 ~ 60°C

5 ~ 85%

Condition

Note *1:
*2:

120 hours max. at 60°C, one month max. at 40°C
No condensation. These values are applicable only within the range as shown below.

During operation:

1G, 1ms max. X,Y and Z directions

During storage:

2G, 2ms max. X,Y and Z directions

NOTE 1: For storage, check that the print head is capped.
2: Before transportation, check that the print head is capped, remove the ink
cartridges, and close the ink cartridge cover .
3: If the power to the printer is OFF with the printer head uncapped, turn the
power ON with the ink cartridges installed. Then wait until capping is
completed, and turn the power OFF.
4: If the printer is left standing at temperature of -15°C or below, the ink in the
print head and ink cartridges will freeze. If the ink is frozen, leave the printer
standing at temperature of 25°C for more than three hours before its use.

Humidity (%)

Temperature (°C)

Figure 1-2. Environmental Conditions: Temperature/Humidity

1.2.9.2 Vibration
During operation:

0.15G, 10 ~ 55Hz X,Y and Z directions

During storage:

0.50G, 10 ~ 55Hz X,Y and Z directions

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.9.4 Surrounding Space
Provide the printer with an enough surrounding space to ensure proper installation of
accessories and replacement of consumables and easy work for daily maintenance.

From the front of the printer:

Stylus Pro 7600
(without stand)

60 cm or more

15 cm or more

From the rear and both sides of the printer: 15 cm or more
15 cm or more
60~80 cm or more

When Stylus Pro 7600 is not equipped with the dedicated stand:

15 cm or more

Stylus Pro 7600 ejects paper downward. To prevent the ejected paper from
being obstructed, install the printer on a table or desk 60 to 80 cm high above
the floor and provide the printer with a 60 cm or more space in front.
In doing so, locate the front rubber feet of the printer close to the front end of
the table or the desk.
60 cm or more

Stylus Pro 7600 (with stand)/
Stylus Pro 9600

15 cm or more

60 cm or more
* Shown above is Stylus Pro 7600

Figure 1-3. Surrounding Space

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.10 Overall Dimensions

560.91

1181.21

604.94

1100

754.11
1033.94

Figure 1-4. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 7600

Dimensions of Unit
Model

Stylus Pro 7600

Stylus Pro 9600

Note 1: For “rearward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the rear.
Condition

Width (W) × Depth (D) × Height (H) (mm)

Printer body

1100 ×805 × 561

Rearward paper eject

1100 × 754 × 1181

Frontward paper eject

1100 × 1034 × 1181

Frontward paper eject

1624 × 691 × 1178

Rearward paper eject

1624 × 697 × 1178

Frontward paper eject

1624 × 1076 × 1178

Product Description

2: For “frontward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the front.

Basic Specifications

Revision A

1178.41

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

697
1076.33

1624.1

Figure 1-5. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 9600

Weight
Model
Stylus Pro 7600

Condition

Printer body (without feet mounted) * About 43.5 kg
Feet

Stylus Pro 9600

Weight
About 10.5 kg

Printer body (without feet mounted) * About 62.0 kg
Feet

About 22.5 kg

Note "*": Excluding the ink cartridges

Product Description

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.11 Accessories
This section describes the accessories and options for Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro
9600.

Special Consumables
Ink cartridge (110ml)
Name

1.2.11.1 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 7600
Standard Accessories
AC Cable
Change Plug Adapter 3pin to 2pin
24 (2/3) inch roll paper spindle
Roll paper sample
Roll paper belt
Ink cartridges (110ml PK, MK, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y)
Maintenance Tank
User's Manual
Driver & User's Manual
EPSON GrayBalancer & EPSON Printer Service Utility
Utility Software
Guarantee Card
Card holder
Carton Box
Special Options
Special stand (PX70MCU)
Manual cutter unit 24” (PX70MCU)
Normal tension spindle 24”<2”/3”> (PX70RPSD)
Black ink replacement kit (Draining cartridge, Cleaning cartridge)

Product Description

Photo Black

Model Number
110 ml (Standard Product)
ICBK24

Matte Black

ICMB24

Light Black

ICGY24

Cyan

ICC24

Magenta

ICLC24

Light Cyan

ICM24

Light Magenta

ICLM24

Yellow

ICY24

Note : The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600.

Special paper (Refer to “1.2.5 Paper Specifications (p.15)” for paper type and
size)
Maintenance tank

Options Common to Other Printers
Auto cutter blade (PM90SPB)
Leo 2.13 (PRIFNW3S)
Fairbanks (PRIF14)

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.2.11.2 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 9600
Standard accessories
AC Cable
Change Plug Adapter 3pin to 2pin
Special stand
44 (2/3) inch roll paper spindle
Roll paper sample
Roll paper belt
Ink cartridges (110ml PK, MK, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y)
Maintenance Tank
User's Manual
Driver & User's Manual
EPSON GrayBalancer & EPSON Printer Service Utility
Utility Software
Guarantee Card
Card holder
Carton Box
Special Options
Manual cutter unit 44”(PX90MCU)
Normal tension spindle 44”<2”/3”> (PX90RPSD)
High tension spindle 44”<2”/3”> (PX90HSD)
Black ink replacement kit (Draining cartridge, Cleaning cartridge)

Product Description

Revision A
Special Consumables
Ink cartridge (110 ml/220 ml (only for pigment))
Name
Photo Black

Model Number
110 ml (Standard Product)
ICBK24

220ml (Option)*
ICBK25

Matte Black

ICMB24

ICMB25

Light Black

ICGY24

ICGY25

Cyan

ICC24

ICC25

Magenta

ICLC24

ICLC25

Light Cyan

ICM24

ICM25

Light Magenta

ICLM24

ICLM25

Yellow

ICY24

ICY25

Note : The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600.

Special paper (Refer to “1.2.5 Paper Specifications (p.15)” for paper type and
size)
Maintenance tank

Options common to other printers
Auto cutter blade (PM90SPB)
Take-up roller (PMARFU1)
Leo 2.13 (PRIFNW3S)
Fairbanks (PRIF14)

Basic Specifications

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.3 External View and Parts Names
EXTERNAL VIEW

Spindle Support
Paper Cover
Control Panel
Connector for Take-up Drive Unit
(Stylus Pro 9600 only)

Connector Cover
USB Interface Connector

Control Panel

AC Inlet
Paper Set Lever
Parallel Interface Connector

Paper Feed Slot

Maintenance Tank
Paper Receive Basket
Stylus Pro 7600: Option
Stylus Pro 9600: Standard

Ink Cartridge Box
Clamp
Dedicated Stand
Stylus Pro 7600: Option
Stylus Pro 9600: Standard

Note : Shown above is Stylus Pro 7600

Figure 1-6. External View and Parts Names

Product Description

External View and Parts Names

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.4 Operating Panel

Revision A

1.4.1.1 Functions of Buttons
Table 1-20. Panel Functions

1.4.1 Buttons and Functions
The operating panel contains the following buttons.

Switch

Function (Independent)

Function
(in SelecType mode)

Function
(+PowerOn )

Power

Power ON/OFF

Pause

Pause / ready,
reset (press for 3 seconds)

Leaving SelectType
mode

SelecType

During printing

Selection of SelecType
menu (major
categories)

Confirm and save
setting values

Printer status menu shift
Except above
Panel setting mode shift
Cutter replace menu
(press for 5 seconds)
Cut / Eject

Eject sheet *1
Feed roll paper from cutter

Maintenance
mode

mark to cutting position and
cut. (Auto Cut)*1
Feed roll paper to the manual
cutting position (cutter
OFF).*1

Figure 1-7. Panel Design

Power
Pause
SelecType (Panel setting menu shift, setting item shift (down))
Paper Feed ∆ (setup value +)
Paper Feed ∇ (setup value -)
Paper Source (Item shift (up))
Cut / Eject (Enter)
Cleaning

Paper Feed ∆

Paper feed (reverse)*2

(setup value +)
Increase setup value

Paper Feed ∇

Paper feed (forward)*3

(setup value -)
Decrease setup value

Paper Source

Select paper source

Selection of SelecType
items (minor
categories)

Cleaning

Cleans all heads
(press for 3 seconds)

Paper Source+
Eject+paper feed

Eject + Paper
feedD + Paper feed
Cleaning + Paper
Source + Eject

Product Description

Operating Panel

Maintenance
mode 2
Self-diagnosis
mode

F/W download

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Note *1:
*2:

*3:

Revision A
Table 1-21. LEDs (continued)

It interrupts ink drying and runs the specified operation.
LED (color)

1.27cm/second (5.0 cps) paper feeding for 2 seconds after the button is pressed.
13.2cm/second (52. cps) paper feed if pressed for another 2 seconds. Maximum
reverse feeding is 20 cm by one press of the button.

Ink Out (Y) (Red)

1.27 cm/second (5.0 cps) paper feed for 2 seconds after the button is pressed.
13.2 cm/second (52. cps) paper feed if pressed for another 2 seconds.

Maintenance tank
(Red)

1.4.1.2 LEDs
The LEDs indicate printer status as follows:
Table 1-21. LEDs
Operate (Green)
Paper Out (Red)

Pause (Green)
Ink Out (K1) (Red)
Ink Out (K2) (Red)
Ink Out (C) (Red)
Ink Out (M) (Red)
Ink Out (LC) (Red)
Ink Out (LM) (Red)

Product Description

Display

Yellow ink end, or wrong yellow ink

Blink

Yellow ink low.

Maintenance tank full error, or No maintenance tank error

Blink

Maintenance tank almost full

Printer power ON.

Blink

Printer processing data, or in power OFF sequence.

Paper out, end of roll, confusion of roll paper and sheet,
paper set lever is released, or paper is thick for cleaning

Blink

Paper jam error, paper cutting error, paper not straight,
paper recognition error, or paper (sheet) eject failure

Pause.

Blink

Cleaning print head, or ink drying.

Black ink1 end, or wrong black ink

Blink

Black ink1 low.

Black ink2 end, or wrong black ink

Blink

Black ink2 low.

Cyan ink end, or wrong cyan ink

Blink

Cyan ink low.

Magenta ink end, or wrong magenta ink

Blink

Magenta ink low.

Light cyan ink end, or light cyan ink

Blink

Light cyan ink low.

Light magenta ink end, or wrong light magenta ink

Blink

Magenta ink low.

Roll, Auto cut is selected.

Blink

Confusion of roll paper and sheet, roll paper is not set.

Roll, Cutter off
(Green)

Roll, Cutter off is selected.

Blink

Confusion of roll paper and sheet, roll paper is not set.

Sheet (Green)

Sheet is selected.

Blink

Confusion of roll paper and sheet, sheet is not set.

Printer Status

Roll, Auto cut (Green) On

The printer is equipped with the following LEDs.

LED (color)

Display

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.2 Indications on the Panel

Table 1-24.
Displayed functions

1.4.2.1 lED Indications in Normal Mode
Operate
Table 1-22.
Displayed functions

Indicator status

While processing data, during power OFF sequence

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

With power ON and in status other than those above

F/W updating completed

During ink drying time

Blink

During ink sequence

Blink

Paper set lever is released

Paper is thick for cleaning

Paper jam

Blink

Paper cutting error

Blink

Paper not straight

Blink

Paper check error

Blink

Paper (sheet) eject failure

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Ink end (warning)

Displayed functions

Pause
Table 1-24.
Indicator status

Indicator status

Out of corresponded ink
No cartridge for corresponded ink
Wrong cartridge for corresponded ink
Illegal cartridge for corresponded ink

Corresponded ink level low

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

F/W updating completed

Maintenance tank
Table 1-26.
Displayed functions

On for 100ms at intervals of 5 seconds

F/W updating completed

Blink

F/W updating completed

Maintenance call

Table 1-25.

Confusion of roll paper and sheet

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

Off
Blink

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

Indicator status
On

Product Description

Off

Ink Out

Out of paper, end of roll

Displayed functions

Off

During pause

Fatal error

Table 1-23.

Print ready

In SelecType mode

Other errors

Paper Out
Displayed functions

Indicator status

Maintenance tank full
No maintenance tank

Indicator status
On

Maintenance tank almost full warning

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Reset, timer IC reset / NVRAM clear

F/W updating completed

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.2.2 LCD Indications in Normal Mode

Table 1-27. Indications (in Normal Mode) (continued)

Table 1-27. Indications (in Normal Mode)
Functions

LCD panel display

Functions
Indicator

PG
setting

Ready to print

READY

Processing data

PRINTING

In power OFF sequence

POWER OFF

In ink sequence

WAIT

Initial filling

INK CHARGING nnn%

Pause

PAUSE

Reset

RESET

Initializing

WAIT

Waiting for paper initialize start
trigger

PRESS PAUSE BUTTON

Initializing paper

WAIT

Out of paper

PAPER OUT

Difference with roll paper and
sheet

LOAD XXX PAPER

Paper set lever is released

LOAD PAPER

Paper jam

PAPER JAM

Cover open

COVER OPEN

Paper set lever is released during
operation

SECURE PAPER LEVER

Paper cutting error

PAPER NOT CUT

Paper not straight

PAPER NOT STRAIGHT

Paper check error

RELOAD PAPER

End of roll

PAPER OUT

LCD panel display

Command error

COMMAND ERROR

Type B interface error

OPTION I/F ERROR

Fatal error

SERVICE. REQ. nn

Maintenance request

MAINTENANCE REQ. nn

Timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

WAIT

Indicator

PG
setting

After replacing ink cartridge
*2

Ink cover open

CLOSE INK CART. COVER

Wrong ink cartridge (dye/
pigment)

WRONG CARTRIDGE

Non-genuine cartridge

INVALID CARTRIDGE

Maintenance tank almost full
warning

MAINTENANCE TANK
ALMOST FULL

Maintenance tank full

MAINTENANCE TANK FULL

No maintenance tank

NO MAINTENANCE TANK

Unable to print error

UNABLE TO PRINT

Paper is too thick for cleaning

REMOVE PAPER

Ink is not enough for cleaning

NOT ENOUGH INK

Ink cartridge replacing

SET INK CARTRIDGE

Ink drying

INK DRY nn MIN

Restart request

TURN PRINTER PWR OFF AND
THEN ON

Restarting request

TURN PWR OFF AND ON

Note *1:

When PG setting = WIDE or WIDER, “W” is displayed at the left of lower line.
When PG setting = NARROW, “N” is displayed at the left of lower line.

Problem with paper output (sheet) RELOAD PAPER

*2:

Ink remaining / available rate of maintenance tank are displayed with indicator.

Ink out

INK OUT

*3:

Suction is displayed with indicator.

Ink low

INK LOW

*4:

No ink cartridge

NO INK CARTRIDGE

Character strings on the second line resulting from line feed above are displayed on
the second line of LCD panel.

Defective ink cartridge

SET INK CARTRIDGE

*5:

It is displayed only for page delay.

Wrong cartridge

WRONG CARTRIDGE

Product Description

NOTE: For details of error display, refer to “3.2.1 Errors (p.123)”.

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Termination

1.4.3 SelecType

• The printer enters the menu shift available status when the Pause button is

1.4.3.1 Outline

pressed in the SelecType mode.
• The printer enters the menu shift available status when the Paper source

Startup

button is pushed once in setting menu select mode.

The SelecType mode is selected by pressing the SelecType button during print
ready, warning, or maintenance call status. The printer is then automatically
incapable of printing.

• The printer enters the menu shift available status when setting initialization is

executed.
• The printer enters the print ready status after the nozzle check pattern or the

Operation
1. The Printer setting menu can be entered by pushing the SelecType button

4.
5.

during menu shift available state (Print ready, no paper). It is shifted to setting
menu select mode, and the setting menu is displayed on the left side of the
LCD upper line.
Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting menu] is displayed on the
upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed on the lower line.
The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The ‘*’ represents the current setup value.
Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value can
be changed. The ‘*’ represents the current setup value.
When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started. No operation occurs if ‘*’ is already
displayed.
It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.

Product Description

status sheet is printed.
• The printer enters the menu shift available status after black ink is replaced.
• The printer enters the menu shift available status after the cutter is replaced.
• The printer returns to the menu shift available status when Pause button is

pressed in any modes.
NOTE: Under the special condition, it sometimes can not return to the status.

Panel display
Character strings on the second line in the following list are displayed on the
second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of LCD
panel.

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.2 Panel Setting Menu Item
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item
Top menu
(Panel display)

Printer setting menu
(PRINTER SETTING MENU)

Test print menu
(TESTPRINTMENU)

Item menu

Product Description

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

See

PG setting

PLATEN GAP

AUTO, NARROW, WIDE, WIDER

p.40

Page line

PAGELINE

ON OFF

p.41

Interface switching

INTERFACE

AUTO PARALLEL, USB, OPTION

p.41

Code page switching

CODEPAGE

PC437, PC850

p.41

Roll paper margin

ROLL MARG

T/B 15MM, 3MM,15MM

p.41

Detect paper width

PAPERSIZECHK

ON OFF

p.42

Detect skew error

PAPERALIGNCHK

ON OFF

p.42

Job timeout setting

TIMEOUT

OFF, 30sec, 60sec, 180sec, 300sec

p.42

No margin print setting

NO MARGIN

L / R ONLY, 1 CUT, 2 CUTS

p.43

Cutter adjustment

CUTTER ADJ

EXEC

p.44

Auto margin refresh

REFRESH MRGN

ON, OFF

p.44

Initialize setting value

INITSETTING

EXEC.

p.45

Nozzle check pattern print

NOZZLECHECK

p.45

Status print

STATUSCHECK

p.46

Job information print

JOBINFO

p.48

VERSION

BXxxxx (D or P)

p.49

Black1

K1 xxxxxxxPG*

p.49

Black2

K2 xxxxxxxPG*

Firmware version

Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)

Panel display

Printable pages of ink
cartridge

Cyan
Magenta

C xxxxxxxPG*
PRINTABLEPG

M xxxxxxxPG*

Light Cyan

LC xxxxxxxPG*

Light Magenta

LM xxxxxxxPG*

Yellow

Y xxxxxxxPG*

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)

Item menu

Ink remaining

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

See

Black1

K1 XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.49

Black2

K2 XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Cyan

C XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Magenta

Use counter clear

Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)

M XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
LC XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Light Magenta

LM XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Yellow

Y XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
MAINT TANK

Ink counter
Paper counter
Ink counter clear
Paper counter clear

USECOUNT
USECOUNTCLR

E F,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F

p.49

INK xxxxx.x ml

p.50

PPR xxxxx.x cm
INK EXEC

p.50

PAPER EXEC

Job history (10 jobs)

JOBHISTORY

No.0-No.9

p.50

Job history clear

JOB HSTRY CLR

EXEC

p.50

Total print pages

TOTAL PRINTS

nnnnnnPG (Max. 6 figures)

p.50

Cutter life

CUTTER XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.51

CR motor life monitor

CR MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.51

PF MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.52

Head unit life monitor

HEAD UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.52

Cleaning unit life monitor

CL UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.53

Use life

Product Description

INKLEFT

Light Cyan

Maintenance tank count
Use counter

Panel display

PF motor life monitor

SERVICELIFE

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

User Paper Setup Menu
(PAPERCONFIG. MENU)

Item menu

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

Paper select

PAPERNUMBER

STD, 1~10

Print paper thickness detection pattern

THICKNESS PAT

PRINT*4
1~17 *5

Select paper thickness number

THICKNESS NUM

Cutting pressure

CUTPRESSURE

0%~100%

Cutting method

CUTMETHOD

3STEPS, 4STEPS

Paper feed adjustment

PPRFEEDADJ

-1.00%~1.00%

Ink drying time

DRYINGTIME

0.0sec~5.0sec

Vacuum

SUCTION

NORM, LOW

Print adjustment (MW)

PRINTADJ

0~5~9

See

p.56

PWRCLEANING

EXEC

p.60

Replace BK ink

BLKINKCHNG

EXEC

p.64

Release ink lever

RELEASE INKLEVER

Remove all ink cartridges

REMOVE ALL INKCARTRIDGES

SELECTINKSET

* Select 2 types from following depending on the situation
#1 PHOTO:#2 LGT
#1 MAT:#2 MAT
#1 MAT:#2 LGT
#1 PHOTO:#2LGT (2 cartridges change)
#1 MAT:#2 LGT
#1 MAT:#2 MAT (2 cartridges change)

Powerful cleaning

Select ink set after change

Maintenance menu
(MAINTENANCE)

Panel display

Black ink replacement
Set draining cartridge
(only for pigment printer)
Ink draining

INSERTDRAINING CARTRIDGEIN#X -

Set cleaning cartridge

INSERTCLEANING CARTRIDGEIN#X -

DRAINING

xxx%

Cleaning

CLEANING

xxx%

Cleaning solution draining

DRAINING

xxx%

Set draining cartridge

INSERTDRAINING CARTRIDGEIN#X -

* Repeat operation after “SELECT INK SET” for 2 cartridges change.

Cutter Replacement

Product Description

Ink charging

INKCHARGING

xxx%

Set all ink cartridges

INSERTALLINK CARTRIDGES

CSIC information

* See “ BK ink cartridge replacement (p64)” for details

Replace cutter

CUT.REPLACE

EXEC.

Cover open guide

OPENLOWERCOVER

Cutter replacement guide

REPLACECUTTER

Cover close guide

CLOSE LOWER COVER

Operating Panel

p.60

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

Paper thickness (in 0.1mm units)

PAPERTHKNS

STD, 0.0MMÅ`1.6MM

Adjustment pattern select and print

ALIGNMENT

BI-D BLACK, BI-D ALL, UNI-D ALL

Bi-D adjustment Black

240CPS

#1 K1

1~5~9

240CPS

#2 K1

1~5~9

190CPS

#3 K1

1~5~9

240CPS VSD1 Total 7 colors

#1 K1 ~ #1 Y

1~5~9

Bi-D adjustment All color 240CPS VSD2 Total 7 colors

#2 K1 ~ #2 Y

1~5~9

190CPS VSD4 Total 7 colors

#3 K1 ~ #3 Y

1~5~9

240CPS VSD1 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)

#1 K2

1~5~9

#1 Y

1~5~9

240CPS VSD2 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)

#2 K2

1~5~9

#2 Y

1~5~9

#3 K2

1~5~9

Gap adjustment menu
(HEADALIGNMENT MENU)

Head gap adjustment
(Uni-D)

190CPS VSD4 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)

Product Description

Panel display

#3 Y

1~5~9

Operating Panel

See

p.60

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.3 PG Setting

Table 1-29. PG Setting Values (continued)

Selecting this mode allows the user to set the platen gap. The relationship between
panel setting, command setting (SN command), and actual platen gap position is shown
below.
Table 1-29. PG Setting Values
Paper thickness
sensor
Less than 0.3mm

PH
command
00H

Panel
Narrow

SN command

Actual PG
position

Note

Minimum

Standard

01H-06H

Wide

Small

Wider

Middle

Narrow

Standard

Wide

Wider

07H-12H

Product Description

Minimum

Paper thickness
sensor
More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.7mm

PH
command
00H-06H

Panel
Narrow

Standard

Wide

SN command

Actual PG
position

Minimum

Small

Middle

Small

Big

Middle

Minimum

Small

Middle

Big

Minimum

Small

Minimum

Small

Middle

Small

Middle

Big

Middle

Minimum

Wider

Big

Minimum

Middle

Small

Big

Middle

Big

Minimum

Small

Middle

Big

Minimum

Middle

Small

Big

Middle

Big

More than 0.7mm

Big

07H-12H

Big

Note

Note 1: Only in this case, SN command is ignored. When paper thickness is 0.15mm, it is
operated with minimum Bi-D value and minimum SN(PG).
2: When “Wide” or “Wider” is set, “W” is displayed on the left side of LCD lower line.
3: When “Narrow” is set, “N” is displayed on the left side of LCD lower line.

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.7 Roll Paper Margin

The actual platen gap may be set to any of the following

Setting this panel allows switching roll paper margin, all sides 3 mm / all sides 15 mm
/ top and bottom 15 mm, right and left 3 mm. This setting is only valid for roll paper. It’
s not valid for sheets. This setting change only margin, and doesn’ t change image size.

Table 1-30.
Position

Gap width

Application

Wide

2.6 mm

Thick paper

Medium

2.2 mm

Reduce the smearing on the printed image
of thin paper.

Narrow

1.2 mm

Thin paper (Default)

Minimum

0.7 mm

Thin film (Film, glossy media)

If margin = 3 mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are same as the theoretical
paper size.

If margin = 15 mm, or Top/Bottom15 mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are widened by 12 mm for all
sides or only top and bottom. (See Figure 1-8)

1.4.3.4 Page Lines
Selecting this mode allows the user to set the page line print mode. Setup is the same as
horizontal lines ON command (AC 02H 00H 00H 02H) in the automatic cutting setup.
The solid line type is used.

If printable area is more than X = 15 mm from the right edge of paper, the portion is
clipped.
Vertical line is not printed. (See Figure 1-9)

1.4.3.5 Interface Select
Selecting this mode allows selection of the parallel, USB, or optional interface, or
automatic interface selection.

1.4.3.6 Code Page Switching
Selecting this mode allows switching between PC437 and PC850 for the code page.

Product Description

NOTE 1: The top margin is also set with “Set the top margin” (SN command).
Actual top margin is decided as follows:
• Panel setup value (top margin)>Paper top margin
(Panel setup value is used as the top margin)
• Panel setup value (top margin):
N for Stylus Pro 7600, W for Stylus Pro9600
:
firmware version
:
D for dye, P for pigment
:
Maintenance tank available quantity
:
total ink counter just before print the last nozzle check
:
:
:
:
:

Versi n
:
Maintenance Tank :
Current Ink C unt :
Current Paper C unt:

pattern (7 figures)
total ink counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(7 figures)
value of - (7 figures)
total paper counter just before print the last nozzle check
pattern (5.1 figures)
total paper counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(5.1 figures)
value of - (5.1 figures)

B
%
g Prev.Ink C unt :g C - P:g
cm Prev.Paper C unt:cm C - P:cm

Figure 1-11. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.16 Status Printing

Manufature

Display of manufacturer

Selecting this mode allows the user to print the current panel settings.

Ink Type

Display of ink kind

Ink Color

Display of ink color

Print status sheet with the following specifications.

Ink Capacity

Display of capacity to contain ink

Print paper size:A4
Font: Built-in font

Ink Cartridge *3

Output procedure:
1. Press the [SelecType] button on the control panel to enter the panel setting
2.
3.

menu.
Press the [Paper Feed ∆] or [Paper Feed ∇] to display “TEST PRINT
MENU”.
Press the [SelecType] button to enter the item menu select status and then
press the [Paper Feed ∆] or [Paper Feed ∇] again to display [STATUS
CHECK].
Select the item by pressing the [SelecType] button again.
Press the [Enter] button to execute status sheet printing.

Note *1:

Ink Left

Display of volume of remaining ink *1

Production Date

Year and month of manufacture

Expire Date

Expiration of guaranteed period for use

Ink Life

Guaranteed period for use after unpacking

Passed

Time having elapsed after unpacking

Printable Sheet

Number of sheets which can be printed with the
remaining ink (calculated value)

Details of display of remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank
100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

20% ~ 10%

E∗

#1: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Color Adjust ID information (ID1) *4

Less than 10%

nn%

#2: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Color Adjust ID information (ID2M)

0% (End)

4.
5.

Explanation of contents:

Type-B

Whether optional Type-B I/F is mounted or not

Current Setting

Setting contents of “PRINTER SETTING MENU” in SelecType mode

Printer Status

Product Description

Version

Installed firmware version

Total Print

Total number of printed sheets

Use Ink

Ink consumption counter value (total cumulative
consumption by printing, flushing and cleaning)

Use Paper

Paper consumption counter value (total
cumulative paper feed amount by printing)

*2:

Details of display of remainder of cutter life, CR motor life, PF motor life, Print
Head life or Cleaning Unit life
100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗

Mainte Tank

Remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank *1

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

Cutter Life

Remainder of cutter life *2

20% ~ 1%

E∗

CR Motor

Remainder of CR motor life *2

PF Motor

Remainder of PF motor life *2

Less than 1%

Head

Remainder of Print Head life *2

Cleaner

Remainder of Cleaning Unit life *2

Operating Panel

*3:

The ink cartridge information is displayed based on the information inside the CSIC
on the ink cartridge.

*4:

This Color Adjust ID information (ID1) is the same as can be checked through the
printer driver.

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

#1 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
#2 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
Type B
:Uninstalled
- Current Setting +------------------+- Printer Status -+----------------Platen Gap
:Standard
| Version
:BWxxxx P
Page Line
:On
| Total Prints
:xxxxxx PG
Interface
:Parallel
| Use Ink
:xxxxxx.x ml
Code Page
:PC437
| Use Paper
:xxxxxx.x cm
Margine
:T/B15mm
| Mainte. Tank
:E[*****]F
No Margine
:1 Cut
| Cutter Life
:E[*****]F
Refresh
:On
| CR Motor
:E[*****]F
Paper Size Check :ON
| PF Motor
:E[*****]F
Paper Align Check :ON
| Head
:E[*****]F
Time Out
:30sec
| Cleaner
:E[*****]F
- Ink Cartridge --+------------------+-----------------+----------------Manufacturer
: EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type
:
Pigment
Pigment
Pigment
Ink Color
:
Photo Black
LightBlack
Cyan
Ink Capacity
:
110ml
110ml
110ml
Ink Left
:
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
Production Date
:
`02/03
`02/03
`02/03
Expire Date
:
`03/10
`03/10
`03/10
Ink Life
:
06 months
06 months
06 months
Passed
:
02 months
02 months
02 months
Printable Sheet
:
120 pages
120 pages
120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+----------------EPSON GENUINE INK
EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Pigment
Pigment
Pigment
Pigment
Magenta
LightCyan
LightMagenta
Yellow
110ml
110ml
110ml
110ml
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
`02/03
`02/03
`02/03
`02/03
`03/10
`03/10
`03/10
`03/10
06 months
06 months
06 months
06 months
02 months
02 months
02 months
02 months
120 pages
120 pages
120 pages
120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------

Figure 1-12. Status Sheet Print Pattern

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.17 Job Information Print
With this mode, users can print job information saved in the printer. (Max. 10Job)
Definition of job is followings;

Adjustment patterns and test patterns
(Gap adjustment, Nozzle check pattern, Status print, Cutter position, Paper
thickness detection)
Print data from host
Job information print
The printer prints job information print pattern in the following specifications;

Print paper size:A4
Font: Built-in font
Print sample: See the chart at right.
NOTE: For details of Job Information, see “1.4.3.30 Job information (p55)”.

No.0
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.1
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.2
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.3
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.4
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.5
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.6
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.7
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.8
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.9
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min

Figure 1-13. Job information print pattern

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.18 Firmware version

1.4.3.20 Ink remaining

Firmware version is displayed as following,

Table 1-35.
Ink remaining

Table 1-34.

Stylus Pro 9600

Ink end LED

100 ~ 81% remaining

E∗∗∗∗∗F

Off

VERSION
BNxxxx P(orD)

80 ~ 61% remaining

E∗∗∗∗ F

Off

60 ~ 41% remaining

E∗∗∗ F

Off

VERSION
BWxxxx P(orD)

40 ~ 21% remaining

E∗∗

Off

Model
Stylus Pro 7600

Panel display

Display

Note 1: xxxx:interface controller version (4 letters)
2: N=Narrow machine: Stylus Pro 7600
W=Wide machine: Stylus Pro 9600
3: The character on the right of lower line represents Dye/Pigment mode.
P: Pigment mode, D: Dye mode

20% ~ just before near end

E∗

After near end ~ just before ink end

nn%

Blink

ink end

Note 1: After ink remaining is near end, the ink remaining is displayed with % on the panel. 0%
is displayed on the panel for ink end.
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption for initial
filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed as 100%. Ink
use count is started at that time. When ink cartridge is replaced, ink use is counted/
displayed according to “Ink system specifications.”

1.4.3.19 Printable pages of each ink cartridge
Printable sheets (estimation) of installed each ink cartridge are displayed.
The formula is following;

1.4.3.21 Maintenance tank count

Printable sheets = ink remain after print / ink used

How to calculate

Note 1: Printable pages within IR command range are calculated and displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.

Present available rate of maintenance tank is displayed.

Display
Available rate
100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

20% ~ 10%

E∗

Less than 10% remaining

nn%

Note : When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, maintenance tank
indicator is displayed with E*****F for 100~71% remaining and E**** F for 70~61%.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Warning
When available rate is less than 10% (Total capacity 1300g), Maintenance tank
almost full warning occurs. The Maintenance Tank LED blinks.

Error

Job NO.
It is a Job number saved in the printer. The latest job is NO.0.

Paper use

When available rate becomes 0, Maintenance tank full error occurs.
The Maintenance Tank LED lights up.

Paper use of each job is displayed. (Area in m2)
NOTE: Paper use is counted from JS command to JE command.

Counter clear
It is cleared with replacing maintenance tank.

Ink use
Ink use of each job is displayed.

1.4.3.22 Use counter
Ink used

NOTE 1: Ink use is counted within IR command or it is counted from JS command
to JE command.
2: When IR command is not set, ink use is not counted, and display value is not
changed.
3: When there is no value to display, “---” is displayed.

Ink used with following operations is counted;
• Print operation (irrespective of completion/discontinuation of printing)
• All flushing operation
• All cleaning operation

NOTE 1: Ink used within IR command range is accumulated and displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.

1.4.3.25 Job history clear

Paper used
Paper used (paper fed) with print operation is displayed in centimeter. Manual
paper feeding is not counted.
NOTE 1: Paper used within JS ~ JE command range is accumulated and
displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.

1.4.3.24 Job history display

With this menu, job history saved in the printer is cleared.
Ink use and paper use of job history are displayed “---”.

1.4.3.26 Total prints
Total prints are displayed in decimal. (Max. 6 figures)

1.4.3.23 Clear use counter
Clear ink used counter
Reset “Ink used” to 0.

Clear paper used counter
Reset “Paper used” to 0.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
CR motor life monitor
How to calculate

1.4.3.27 Consumables life
Cutter life
How to calculate
The number of times the cutter has been used is calculated by counting down
from 2000. The count is reduced by one every time one sheet is cut
irrespective of paper sizes.
The counter is cleared at replacing the cutter with a new one.
Display (Life)

It is displayed with tube life (B1 width), because tube friction causes CR
motor trouble. The tube life is calculated with the number of CR scan times.
Table 1-36. Reference value
Printer Model

B0/ Speed

Stylus Pro 9600

325 million passes

A1/ Speed

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

Note : 1 pass = 1 round trip

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

Display (Life)

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

Less than 1% remaining

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

20% ~ 1%

E∗

Less than 1% remaining

C H E C K
P O IN T

Not happen, because
Cutter condition can be checked with cutting.
It doesn’ t cause big obstacles.
Users can replace a cutter easily.
Fatal error
Not happen.
Counter clear
The counter is cleared at replacing the cutter with a new one.

Maintenance Req.

The indication as described above may not be accurate depending
on the conditions of use, thus it is given only as a yardstick.

It is happened when the life is less than 4%.
Fatal error
When the remainder of the life is judged to be 0 by taking into account
damage to the tube, service call occurs.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS CR MOTOR” or “CLEAR COUNTERS CR
TOTAL” in Maintenance mode 2 is executed, the counter is cleared.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Product Description

Condition

250 million passes

Maintenance Req.
•
•
•

Number of Passes

Stylus Pro 7600

Operating Panel

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

PF motor life monitor
How to calculate

Head unit life monitor
How to calculate

It is calculated for trouble examination in case that it is used beyond
production life, because parts of PF motor and paper feeding drive mechanism
are not supported to exchange within production life. It is displayed with ratio
of PF roller life and driven roller life, because their lives are shorter than PF
motor. PF roller life and driven roller life are calculated with total paper
feeding, because their lives are defined with paper feeding (positive direction/
negative direction).
Display (Life)

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

E∗∗∗∗∗F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

Less than 1% remaining

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

20% ~ 1%

E∗

Less than 1% remaining

100 ~ 81%

Maintenance Req.

Maintenance Req.
Not happen because it is out of service range within product life.
Fatal error
Not happen, because trouble mode is not Fatal.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS PF MOTOR” in Maintenance mode 2 is
executed, the counter is cleared.
Count continuance
Even if remaining is 0, it keeps counting until 32bit register is full, and stops
counting-up at the maximum of positive number. It counts not only with panel
display but also with trouble analysis from NVRAM detailed data.
C H E C K
P O IN T

The numbers of dot injection for each color are added up, the number of
injecting assured dots per nozzle × 96 nozzles is calculated as the life, and it is
calculated with the most number of total dots in each
Display (Life)

Maintenance request happens at 2.8 billion shot/Nozzle.
Fatal error
Not happen as a head unit.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS HEAD” in Maintenance mode 2 is executed,
the counter is cleared.
Count continuance
Same as PF motor.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Cleaning unit life monitor
How to calculate

1.4.3.28 Suction adjustment for paper setting and indicator display

Cleaning unit life is same as pump motor life. Cap assembly, pump assembly,
flushing box, and wiper are exchanged at the same time by a service person.
Display (Life)

Users can adjust paper suction to set paper easily, only when paper set lever is released,
and paper is detected with rear sensor. Followings are displayed on the LCD panel at
that time;

LCD display

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

20% ~ 1%

E∗

Note :

Less than 1% remaining

Suction display

LOAD PAPER
SUCTION

Suction

Maintenance Req.

High

When the life is TBD%, maintenance request happens.
Fatal error
When the life is 0%, service request happens.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS CLEANER2 in Maintenance mode 2 is
executed, the counter is cleared.
Count continuance
Same as PF motor.
C H E C K
P O IN T

: Indicator (3 levels)
LCD display

100%

Middle

60%

Low

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Ink remaining display and font

1.4.3.29 Ink remaining indicator display
Ink remaining indicator is displayed on the lower line of LCD panel.

Ink remaining

LCD display item and LCD panel display position

100 ~ 81% remaining*2

Ink type

80 ~ 61% remaining*3

Panel display position

Black1

8 th on the lower line

Black2

9 th on the lower line

Cyan

10 th on the lower line

Magenta

11 th on the lower line

Light Cyan

12 th on the lower line

Light Magent

13 th on the lower line

Yellow

14 th on the lower line

Maintenance*1

16 th on the lower line

60 ~ 41% remaining
40 ~ 21% remaining
20% remaining ~ just before near
end
Ink end
Note 1: Available quantity is displayed for the maintenance tank.
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption for initial
filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed as 100%. Ink
use count is started at that time. When ink cartridge is replaced, ink use is counted/
displayed according to “Ink system specifications.”

Note : It is counted from the left side

Printer status at indicator display
Status

READY

Processing data

PRINTING

Ink low

INK LOW

Ink end

INK OUT

Pause

PAUSE

Product Description

3: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, maintenance tank
indicator is displayed with “h01” font for 100~76% remaining and “h03” font for
75~61%.

LCD panel display

Ready to print

LCD panel display

C H E C K
P O IN T

Operating Panel

After detection of “Ink Low”, the display is changed from a graph
to a% indication.

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Job information

1.4.3.30 Job information

This printer saves following job information (68byte × 10job) in NVRAM.

Definition of Job
The minimum unit of printer operation is defined as “Job” with this printer. The
job print information with character/image can be saved as a record.
Basic print job functions are followings;
Note "*": Cleaning is not defined as a Job, because it can be executed during printing.

Information saving

Printable

Information saving

Count Start
JS

Normal end

Count End
JE (Complete)

Printing

Table 1-37. Job information
Information

Explanation

Capacity

The quantity of saved The quantity of saved job
job information
information in NVRAM

0~10

1byte

Information No.

Saving order

0~9

1byte

ID No.

Job ID No.

0~255(•••,255,0,1,•••)

1byte

Using I/F

Using I/F type

00:Unknown
01:Parallel
02:USB
03:Option I/F
FF:I/F is not used

1byte

Job status

Current job status

00:Unknown
01:Printing
02:Complete
03:Abort

1byte

Cancel

Count End
JE (Cancel)

Range

Character strings code Character code recognizing code *

2byte

Job ID

Job name consisting of host
name and document name

User name 16byte
Document name 32Byte

48byte

Ink used

Ink used quantity for intended
job [ml]

0~65.535 ml

2byte

Paper used

Paper used
quantity for
intended job

0~65535

2byte

Horizontal [mm] 0~65535

2byte

Figure 1-14. Printing Job Transition

Vertical [mm]

Print start time

Print start time
[Year/month/date/hour/minute]

2255/12/31/24/59[MAX]

5byte

Time used for print

Time used for print [sec]

0~65535

2byte

Total

68byte

Note "*": 00h 00h fixed as Reserve for now.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.31 User Paper Setting

Details of each setting item are following;

Selecting this mode allows detection of the thickness of the available paper, and
registration of up to four user-defined paper.
Paper feeding adjustment, ink drying time, cutting method, MW print adjustment and
suction may be registered for each paper format.

Setting
1. Select user paper setting menu from the panel.
2. Select the paper number (‘STD’, ‘1’~‘10’)
3. Print the paper thickness detection pattern.
4. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enter the number of the pattern

Table 1-40.
Setting
Paper thickness

Print paper thickness detection pattern and enter the paper thickness
number. (When “STD” is selected, it is not executed.) *1

Cutting pressure

Paper cutting pressure is set. Lower the pressure for thin and soft
paper. Manufacture setting value (75%) is displayed as 100%, which is
the maximum setting value to be assured. Setting available range is
110%~0%.

Cutting method

Cutting method is selected, 4 step cutting for thin and soft paper. Paper
feed adjustment Paper feeding is adjusted. When 0.00% is not selected
for paper feed adjustment, it ignores driver command (SN 03H 00H
00H 04H m2) and setting value with SN menu of Maintenance mode1,
and uses this setting value.

Ink drying time

Ink drying time for each pass is set.- The carriage stops at the right/left
sides of paper for setting time.

Paper suction

Paper suction is set to make paper stable on the platen. Select “LOW”
for thin paper (film), which is difficult to feed.

MW print adjustment

Micro weave mode is adjusted. When print speed has priority, lower
the setting value. When quality has priority, raise the setting value.*2

with the least displacement for each adjustment item. (See p.58)
Table 1-38. Relationship between Pattern Numbers and Paper Thickness
Number
Paper
thickness

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

0.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

Enter cutting pressure.
Select cutting method.
Enter the paper feeding adjustment value.
Enter the ink dying time for each pass.
Select paper suction.
Select MW print quality adjustment.

NOTE 1: Paper setting can be made independently for any paper number.
2: For details of patterns, refer to “Print paper thickness detection pattern (p.
58)”.

Operation

Note 1: When “STD” is selected for Paper selection, Paper thickness detection pattern print,
Paper thickness number selection, Paper feeding adjustment setting items are not
displayed. Only when Paper “1” ~ “10” is selected, they are displayed.
2: During pattern printing, “PRINTING ALGNMNT PATTERN” is displayed.
(<\n> is new line)
3: Default display of paper thickness number selection is the number same as gap
adjustment.

Paper setting and corresponding operation are as follows.

Note *1:

Table 1-39.
Paper setup
Standard
1 ~ 10

Product Description

*2:

Operation
When settings of cutting pressure ~ print quality are set with
commands, it follows the settings.

See “MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes (p.88)” for
selectable MW mode at MW print adjustment.
It prints with PG small or PG big depending on detection result of paper thickness
sensor.

User definition paper. Even when cutting pressure ~ print quality are
set with commands, user setting value is used.

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Displays the paper number currently selected.
STD, A1 ~ 10

SelecType

READY

SelecType

PAPER CONFIG

Paper Source
Paper Source

PAPER NUMBER STD

PAPER NUMBER
STD

It is displayed only when paper number 1~10 is selected.

Paper Feed

It is entered with Enter button in order. Enter

Paper Feed

PAPER CONFIG
THICK. PAT.

No.1

SelecType
Paper Source

Paper Feed

Enter
THICKNESS PAT

Paper Feed

No.10

PRINTING ALGNMENT
PAPER CONFIG
CUT PRESSURE
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PATTERN
CUT PRESSURE
00%

THICKNESS NUM

00%~99%

PAPER CONFIG
CUT METHOD
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

1
1~17

CUT METHOD
3 STEP

CUT PRESSURE
00%
00%~100%

4 STEP

PAPER CONFIG
PPR FEED ADJ
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PPR FEED ADJ

CUT METHOD
0.00%

3 STEP
4 STEP

-1.00~1.00

PAPER CONFIG
DRYING TIME
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PPR FEED ADJ

DRYING TIME
10.0~00.0

PAPER CONFIG
SUCTION
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PRINT ADJ

SelecType
Paper Source

DRYING TIME

SUCTION

00.0sec
10.0~00.0

NORM
LOW

PAPER CONFIG

0.00%
-1.00~1.00

00.0sec

SUCTION
NORM
LOW

PRINT ADJ
5
1~5~9

PRINT ADJ
Enter

5
1~5~9

Figure 1-15. Level Structure of User Setting Menu

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

PRINT PAPER THICKNESS DETECTION PATTERN

Printing Specifications
Table 1-41.
Head speed

240 cps

Pattern height

96 dots

Color

Black

Print direction

Upper patterns: Leftward
Lower patterns: Rightward

Pattern interval

Upper patterns: Equal intervals
Lower patterns:Centered on base position for gap adjustment
value, and displaced by an equal distance left and right.
Details are described in next clause.

10 mm

13.5mm(96dot)

A4 width

9.0 mm (64dot)
feeding

Relationship between numbers in print pattern and paper thickness.
Table 1-42.
Numbers in print pattern

...

Paper thickness (mm)

0.0

0.1

0.2

...

1.4

1.5

1.6

Product Description

Operating Panel

Figure 1-16. Paper Thickness Detection Pattern

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Displacement of bottom pattern
If the displacement in the gap adjustment value with a change of 0.1 mm in paper
thickness is assumed to be X microns, the following applies.

Head

AB:Gap adjustment value with paper thickness +0.1 mm
AC:Current gap adjustment value
AD:Gap adjustment value with paper thickness -0.1 mm

Paper thickness +0.1mm at gap
adjustment.

A fixed displacement is assumed with changes in paper thickness.
X = AC–AB = AD–AC

Paper thickness at gap adjustment.
Paper thickness -0.1 mm at gap
adjustment.

This adjustment value is saved into NVRAM and can be changed.
Example: With 0.2 mm gap adjustment paper thickness.
A

Table 1-43.
Pattern
number

Displacement of
bottom pattern relative to
top pattern

Pattern
number

Displacement of
bottom pattern relative to
top pattern

+2X

–7X

+1X

–8X

±0

–9X

–1X

–10X

–2X

–11X

–3X

–12X

–4X

–13X

–5X

–14X

–6X

Product Description

B C D

Figure 1-17. Displacement of Paper Thickness Detection Pattern

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.32 Power cleaning

1.4.3.34 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment)

With this mode, the printer has more power cleaning than normal cleaning.

Selecting this mode allows the user to adjust Bi-D and Uni-D depending on paper
thickness.

1.4.3.33 Cutter Blade Replacement
Selecting this mode allows the user to replace the cutter blade.
The procedure for cutter blade replacement is as follows:
1.

Select the cutter replacement menus from the panel. (The cutter replacement menu
can be selected by pressing the SelecType button for 5 sec.)

Open the cover following cover open guide.

Replace the cutter blade following cutter replacement guide.

Close the cover following cover close guide.

Setting
1. Set the paper.
2. Select the gap adjustment menu from the panel.
3. Set to 'STD' for 0.2mm or 1.2mm EPSON paper. When other paper is set
individually, set thickness in units of 0.1mm.

4. Select the adjustment pattern to be printed (Bi-D Black, Bi-D all or Uni-D
individual), and print. (“PRINTING ALGNMNT PATTERN” is displayed.)
5. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enter the number of the pattern
with the least displacement for each adjustment item.
6. Repeat (4)~(5) until adjustment of all items is completed.
NOTE: For details of patterns, refer to “Gap Adjustment Print Pattern (TBD) (p.
63)”.

Adjustment
The adjustment values set above are saved in NVRAM as 4 types of adjustment
value depending on PG height (0.7mm/1.2mm/2.2mm/2.6mm). To calculate
adjustment value, PG height and paper thickness are necessary. Saving place of
adjustment value is selected as following list. Adjustment value saved in NVRAM
is updated when the value is adjusted again;

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
4: When the following paper is to be used, select [0S] or [3S].
[0S] = Films and special thin paper
[3S] = Recommended thick RC paper for borderless printing

Table 1-44.
Paper thickness sensor

Paper thickness
setting

Less than 0.7mm

STD

PG setting

More than 0.7mm
Less than 0.3mm

More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.3mm

0.0mm

0.7~1.6mm

More than 0.7mm

For PG1.2mm

PG2.6mm

For film media
(PG0.7mm)

For glossy media
(PG0.7mm)

5: When any paper other than authentic EPSON dedicated paper is to be used, set paper
thickness in increments of 0.1 mm.

Note *1:

Adjustment values calculated with PG1.2mm for PG 0.7mm, 2.2mm, 2.6mm are
saved except adjustment value saved for PG 1.2mm at that time.

*2:

In this case, adjustment value is saved into PG0.7mm area as a special setting for
film media (paper thickness 0.15mm). This is used when special setting for film
media (00h) is set with PH command.

*3:

In this case, adjustment value is saved into PG0.7mm area as a special setting for
glossy media (paper thickness 0.3mm). This is used when glossy media is specified
with paper adjustment value of paper feed adjustment setting command.

*4:

Even when paper thickness sensor detects thin paper (less than 0.7mm), PG is set as
2.6mm if paper thickness setting is more than 0.7mm.

*5:

When paper thickness sensor detects thick paper (more than 0.7mm), PG is set as
2.6mm regardless of PG setting and paper thickness setting.

0.1~0.6mm

More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.7mm

Notes

More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.3mm

Saving place

0.0~0.6mm

Narrow

For PG0.7mm

Standard

For PG0.7mm

Wide

For PG1.2mm

Wider

For PG2.2mm

Narrow

For PG0.7mm

*6:

It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.0mm.

Standard

For PG1.2mm

*7:

It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.3mm.

Wide

For PG2.2mm

Wider

For PG2.6mm

Narrow

For PG1.2mm

Standard

For PG1.2mm

Wide For

PG2.2mm

Wider

For PG2.6mm

0.7~1.6mm

For PG2.6mm

0S/3S/
0.0~1.6mm

For PG2.6mm

Note 1: Paper thickness is saved to adjust with 0.1mm unit for paper thickness setting command
PH.
2: Paper thickness is firstly entered to reduce operation with the closest pattern print of
adjustment value saved in the printer.
3: Select "STD" when authentic EPSON dedicated paper is to be used. Then the paper
thickness sensors detect the paper thickness and make automatic setting.
(Thin paper = 0.2mm / Thick paper = 1.2mm)

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Pause

Revision A

Ready

SelecType
Paper Source
HEAD ALIGNMENT
SelecType

* Setting value 1~5~9 is selected with the Paper Feed button.
It returns to a status before pattern print with the Paper Source bottom.
* It always returns to “Ready” status with the Pause.

Paper Source

HEAD ALIGNMENT
PAPER THKNS
SelecType
Paper Source

* Same sequence
* Paper thickness sensor affects it.

PAPER THKNS
Enter

STD
Paper Source

ALIGNMENT
Bi -D BLACK

Paper Source

PRINTING ALGNMNT

Paper Feed

0.0mm

ALIGNMENT

ALIGNMENT
Bi -D ALL

Paper Source

Enter
Paper Source
#1 K1

#2 K1

SelecType

5
Enter
5
Enter

#2 Y

Paper Feed
Enter

#3 K1

Paper Feed
#3 Y

#3 Y

Paper Feed

5
Enter
#2 K2
5
Enter
#2 Y
5
Enter
#3 K2
5
Enter

Paper Feed
#3 Y

5
Enter

Paper Feed

5
Enter

#1 Y

Paper Feed
#3 K2

5
Enter

SelecType

Paper Feed
#2 Y

5
Enter

#1 K2

Paper Feed
#2 K2

5
Enter

Paper Feed

Paper Feed
#1 Y

#2 K1

5
Paper Feed

5
Enter
5
Enter

Paper Feed

#2 Y

#3 K1

SelecType

#1 K2

#1 Y

#2 K1

Paper Feed
#3 K1

#1 Y

#1 K1

Paper Source

#1 K1

Paper Feed

Paper Source

Paper Feed

Uni-D
Head gap
adjustmen
Enter

Paper Source

Enter

PATTERN

#1 K1

1.6mm

#3 Y
5
Enter

Figure 1-18. Level Structure of Gap Adjustment Menu

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-45. Adjustment Item List (continued)

GAP ADJUSTMENT PRINT PATTERN (TBD)
Print specifications of gap adjustment print pattern
Adjusting items

3 items (Refer to next clause for details)

Adjustment pattern height

Bi-D Black (#1, #2, #3) 90mm

Bi-D All (#1, #2, #3) 220mm
Uni-D All (#1, #2, #3) 145mm
Adjustment pattern width

Bi-D Black 65mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Uni-D All*1

Bi-D All 190mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)

Uni-D All 185mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Others

When it prints from paper edge, it feeds 100mm for roll paper,
50mm for sheet, and starts printing.
#3

Each adjustment item
Table 1-45. Adjustment Item List
Parameter

Adjusting item

Bi-D All

Product Description

K1
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K1
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K1
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y

Parameter

Adjusting item

Print specifications

Dot size

Head speed (CPS)

Nozzle No.

VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
190
190
190
190
190
190
190

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Bi-D Black

Note *1:

#1
#2
#3

Dot size

Head speed (CPS)

Nozzle No.

VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD1
VSD2
VSD4

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
190
190
190
190
190
190
240
240
190

2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
1

K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K1
K1
K1

For Uni-D All (between-row compensation), make each adjustment with the K1 row
as the reference.

The adjustment pattern printing method for each adjustment item is as
follows:
Print direction

Bar: Going back and forth every 4dot
Block: Upper patterns: Leftward Lower patterns: Rightward

Pattern interval

Upper patterns: equal interval
Lower patterns: Print No.5 to be always current setup value. No.5
is standard, and others have adjustment gap as
following;

The relationship between print pattern and adjustment gap is shown below.
Print pattern number

Adjustment gap N/1440 inch
(VSD1, VSD2, VSD4)

-4

-3

-2

-1

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
4. The printer reads CSIC of installed cartridge after the lever is locked.

1.4.3.35 BK ink cartridge replacement
C H E C K
P O IN T

This menu is only displayed for pigment model. It is not displayed
for dye model.

b) When wrong ink cartridge is installed, following message is displayed
every 1 second, corresponded slot LED blinks, and go back to step 3-2.

The printer is not turned off during sequence even if Power button
is pushed.

Select “BK INK CHANGE” in “MAINTENANCE” of panel setting menu and
start with “EXEC”.

Select changing ink and push the Enter button. (The panel message is depended on
installed ink combination at that time.)

LCD panel message: “WRONG CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
c)

MATTE-K+LIGHT-K

Panel message
#1 PHOTO:#2 LBK

MATTE-K+MATTE-K #1 MAT:#2 LBK

#1 PHOTO:#2 LBK (2 cartridges)

Following message is displayed after the lever is released.
LCD panel message: “REMOVE ALL INK CARTRIDGES”

#1 MAT:#2 LBK
#1 MAT:#2 MAT (2 cartridges)

Following messages are displayed every 1 second repeatedly, and all slot LEDs
are OFF, after necessary ink remaining for initial filling is checked,
LCD panel message: “REMOVE ALL INK CARTRIDGES”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

#1 MAT:#2 MAT

PHOTO-K+LIGHT-K

The printer checks available quantity of all color ink remaining for initial filling
except changing slot.

1. When ink remaining is enough, go to (4). When ink remaining is not enough,
following message is displayed, and corresponded slot LED blinks.
LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH INK”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

NOTE: The message is indicated until all ink cartridges are removed. LED turns
to ON after corresponded cartridge is removed. LEDs except changing
slot are ON until cartridges are installed.
6.

The printer checks available quantity of maintenance tank, after all cartridges are
removed.

NOTE: When 2 cartridges are selected to be changed for procedure (2), it counts
available quantity of maintenance tank for 2 cartridges.

2. Following message is indicated, and corresponded slot LED blinks until lever
is released, and new ink cartridge is installed.

1. The printer checks CSIC of maintenance tank. When available quantity is
enough, go to step 7. When available quantity is NOT enough, following
messages are displayed every 1 second, and maintenance tank LED blinks
until maintenance tank is replaced with new one.

LCD panel message: “REPLACE WITH NEW CARTRIDGE”

3. Following message is displayed, when new ink cartridge is installed, and
CSIC is contacted.
LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”

Product Description

When installed ink cartridge is not enough for initial filling, following
message is displayed every 1 second, corresponded slot LED blinks, and
go back to step 3-2.

LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH INK”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

LCD panel message: “SELECT INK SET”
Installed ink set

When all ink remaining except changing slot is enough for initial filling,
go to step 4.

LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN MAINTE TANK”
“REPLACE WITH NEW MAINTENANCE TANK”

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2. The printer checks CSIC after maintenance tank is replaced. When CSIC
detects that the maintenance tank have enough available quantity, got to step
7. When available quantity is NOT enough, repeat Procedure step 6-1 and step
6-2.
7.

10. Following message is displayed, and all slots LEDs blink, after the draining
cartridge is removed.
LCD panel message: “INSERT ALL INK CARTRIDGES”

Following messages are displayed every 1 second, and #1 slot LED blinks, after
available quantity of maintenance tank is checked.

NOTE: Ink remaining for initial filling and wrong cartridge are checked as same
as procedure step3

LCD panel message: “READY FOR DRAINING”
“INSERT DRAINING CARTRIDGE IN #X”

11. Following message is displayed and all slot LEDs blink after all cartridges are
installed, and CSIC is connected.

The printer starts ejecting ink from corresponded ink tube.

LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”

1. Following message is displayed, and XX slot LED blinks, after draining

12. Ink filling starts automatically after all ink installation.

cartridge is installed, and CSIC is connected.

LCD panel message: “INK CHARGING XXX%”

LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”

2. The printer checks CSIC after ink lever is set. When the cartridge is correct,
go to step 8-3. When the cartridge is wrong, go to step 8-2-1. When the slot is
wrong, go to step 8-2-2.
1. When a cartridge except draining cartridge is installed, following
messages are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks until the
cartridge is removed. Go back to step 8-1.

13. Ink filling completed.
The manufacture logo, ink remaining, and printable pages, which are recorded in
replaced ink cartridge CSIC, are displayed.
14. Paper is fed, and cleaning (CL2) is done only for the first printing after ink
replacement.

LCD panel message: “WRONG CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

2. When the cartridge is installed in a slot except XX, following messages
are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks until the cartridge
is removed. Go back to step 8-1.
LCD panel message: “INSERT CARTRIDGE IN CORRECT SLOT”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

3. Ink ejection starts and following message is displayed.
LCD panel message: “DRAINING XXX%” (0%~100%)

4. Following messages are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks,
after corresponded ink tube ejection is completed.
LCD panel message: “REMOVE DRAINING CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
9.

Repeat step 8 when 2 cartridges are replaced. Slot [XX] changes to [K2], and LED
shifts to #2.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1

MAINTENANCE MODE 1 SETUP ITEMS
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items

OUTLINE

Startup
The maintenance mode 1 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
Pause button.

Operation
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇

4.
5.

buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button.
[Setting menu] is displayed on the upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed
on the lower line.
The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The '*' represents the current setup value.
Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value
can be changed. The '*' represents the current setup value.
When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started.No operation occurs if '*' is already
displayed.
It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Print hexadecimal dump
HEX DUMP

(-)

(PRINT)

Panel display language
select
LANGUAGE
-LANGUAGE

(-)

ENGLISH, JAPANESE

Unit change
UNIT

(-)

METER, FEET/INCH

Parallel interface mode
PARALLEL I/F

(-)

ECP, COMPAT

Set IEEE1284.4
IEEE1284.4

(-)

ON, OFF

Initialize panel setting
DEFAULT PANEL

(-)

EXEC

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Termination
1. The printer is ready for printing following reset after selecting the panel
display language.

Ink information (K1)
(K1 CARTRIDGE)

Setup value
EXEC *1

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT K1)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE K1)

BLACK / MATTE K /
GRAY

Ink type
(INK TYPE K1)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP K1)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-K1)

E*****F, E**** F, E***
F,E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE K1)

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE K1)

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE K1)

Month

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE K1)

2. Switch power OFF > ON.
Panel display
Character strings on the second line in “Panel message translation” are displayed
on the second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of
LCD panel.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Ink information (K2)
(K2 CARTRIDGE)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Setup value

Ink information (C)
(C CARTRIDGE)

Setup value

EPSON

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT M)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE K2)

BLACK / MATTE K /
GRAY

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE M)

MAGENTA

Ink type
(INK TYPE K2)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink type
(INK TYPE M)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP K2)

110ml/220ml

Ink capacity
(INK CAP M)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-K2)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-M)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE K2)

Product date
(PROD DATE M)

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE K2)

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE K2)

Month

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT C)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE C)

Ink information (M)
(M CARTRIDGE)

Expire date

(EXPIR DATE M)
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE M)

/
Month

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE M)

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Lc)

EPSON

CYAN

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Lc)

LGT. CYAN

Ink type
(INK TYPE C)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink type
(INK TYPE LC)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP C)

110ml/220ml

Ink capacity
(INK CAP LC)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-C)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-LC)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE C)

Product date
(PROD DATE LC)

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE C)

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE LC)

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE C)

Month

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE LC)

Month

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE C)

Product Description

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT K2)

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE K2)

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Ink information (Lc)
(Lc CARTRIDGE)

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE LC)

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Ink information (Lm)
(Lm CARTRIDGE)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Setup value

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Lm)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Lm)

LGT. MAGENTA

Ink type
(INK TYPE LM)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP LM)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-LM)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE LM)

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE LM)
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE LM)

Ink information (Y)
(Y CARTRIDGE)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Setup value

Paper feeding adjustment
conversion table 1 (User
table pigment)
(XX1=:)

(-)

:00H~C9H
:00H~C9H,FFH

Paper feeding adjustment
conversion table 2 (User
table dye)
(XX2=:)

(-)

:00H~C9H
:00H~C9H,FFH

The whole paper feeding
adjustment offset (Pigment)
(XXO=)

(-)

:-32~0~+32

(-)

:-32~0~+32

The whole paper feeding
adjustment offset (Dye)
(XXP=)

Month

System table version
(XXS=)

(-)

: F/W Version

User table version
(XXU=)

(-)

:00H~FFH

Initialize user table
(XXI)

(-)

EXEC

SN Menu
(SN MENU)

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE LM)

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Y)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Y)

YELLOW

Ink type
(INK TYPE Y)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP Y)

110ml/220ml

HEXADECIMAL DUMP

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-Y)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE Y)

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE Y)

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE Y)

Month

The hex dump function allows data sent to the printer to be printed and displayed in
hexadecimal format. One line contains 16 data items in hexadecimal format, with the
equivalent characters printed at the right of each line. If no equipment characters exist
(control codes, etc.), a period is printed. It prints every 16 data. It prints the last data
with pressing the Pause button, when it is less than 16. Panel setting is not available in
the hex dump mode. Using this function, users can check that data has been sent
correctly from the computer to the printer. To terminate this mode, stop printing with
Pause button and shut off the power.

Passed time after open
Month
(AGE Y)

Note *1:

When hexadecimal dump mode is executed, “PRINT” is displayed.

PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION
Users can select English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, and Portuguese for display
on the LCD with this mode.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

UNIT CHANGE

INK INFORMATION MENU

Users can change length unit of LCD panel / pattern print with this mode.

It displays ink information recorded in CSIC.

METER: meter (m)
FEET/INCH: Feet(ft)/Inch(in)

• Manufacture logo: Manufacture information saved in CSIC of each ink

cartridge is displayed.
• Ink Color: Ink color information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

Unit of following messages can be changed;

displayed.
• Ink Type: Ink type information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

Table 1-47.
Item
Panel LCD display

displayed.

Message
Meter

• Ink capacity: Ink capacity information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

Feet/Inch

Paper counter

xxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Job information display (Paper used)

xxxxxxxcm2

xxxxxx.xsqft

Current Paper Count

xxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Previous Paper Count

xxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Status sheet

Use Paper

xxxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Job information print

Paper used (vertical)

xxxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Paper used (horizontal)

xxxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Nozzle check pattern

Note : This function is available only for English.

PARALLEL I/F MODE
Users can switch parallel I/F receiving speed with this mode; ECP/compatibility
1284.4 SETTING (D4)
Users can set 1284.4mode with this mode ON.

displayed.
• Ink remaining: Ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed.
• Product date: Product date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

displayed with / form.
• Expire date: Ink expire date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge

is displayed.
• Ink life after open: Ink life information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

displayed.
• Passed time after open: Passed time after opened of each ink cartridge is

displayed.
NOTE: These are displayed every color (K~Y).
SSN MENU

Paper feed adjustment table
m2 value set by mechanism sequence command “Paper feed adjustment” is converted
to the actual paper feed adjustment value with paper feed adjustment table saved in
NVRAM.
(The conversion is valid when mechanism sequence command “Paper feed adjustment
mode = ON”.)
Users can change following conversion table with this maintenance mode.
• User table for dye media
• User table for pigment media

Change of paper feed adjustment table by users
Format
“XXx=nn:mm”

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

indicates conversion value of designated with mechanism
•
•

•
•
•

sequence command
Conversion tables are XX1 ~ XX2.
When = FFh, applicable input value is not converted.
Operation
The cursor shifts between and with SelecType button and Paper
Source button.
The value pointed with the cursor increases/decreases with Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons.
Setting value is saved into NVRAM with “Enter” button.

1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2
OUTLINE

Startup
The maintenance mode 2 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
Paper source, Cut/Eject, and Paper Feed ∇ buttons.

Operation
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇

Paper feed adjustment offset
Offset value is set to add to the actual paper feed adjustment value. The setup
value is always valid regardless of mechanism sequence command “Paper feed
adjustment mode” setting.

Format

“XX0=” Bias value is set for pigment.
Operation
• The value increases/decreases with Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons.
• Setting value is saved into NVRAM with Enter button.

System table version
It displays version No. of paper feed adjustment conversion table saved in the
printer.
Format:

“XXS=”
NOTE 1: is 5 letters indicating version of engine controller.
(e.g. “0270C”)
2: is 1-figure hexadecimal number indicating change history of conversion
table. (e.g.”0”)

User table version
When a user change the table, the version No. is added 1 optionally.
Format:
“XXU=nn” * is 2-figure hexadecimal number

User table initializing

buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button.
[Setting menu] is displayed on the upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed
on the lower line.
The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The '*' represents the current setup value.
Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value can
be changed. The '*' represents the current setup value.
When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started. No operation occurs if '*' is already
displayed.
It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.

Termination
Switch power OFF > ON.

Panel display
Character strings on the second line in “Panel message translation” are displayed
on the second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of
LCD panel.

Users can initialize user table to system table with this mode.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

MAINTENANCE MODE 2 SETUP ITEMS
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items
Top menu
(Panel display)

Counter view menu
(VIEW COUNTERS)

Counter initialize menu
(CLEAR COUNTERS)

Product Description

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Cutter life counter value (CUTTER)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Cutter life total counter value (CUTTER TOTAL)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Total prints counter value (TOTAL PAGES)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Waste ink counter value (MAINTE TANK)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

CR motor life counter value (CR MOTOR)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

CR motor life total counter value (CR TOTAL)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

PF motor life counter value (PF MOTOR)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (K1) life counter value (HEAD K1)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (K2) life counter value (HEAD K2)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (C) life counter value (HEAD C)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (M) life counter value (HEAD M)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (LC) life counter value (HEAD LC)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (LM) life counter value (HEAD LM)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (Y) life counter value (HEAD Y)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Flashing box (FL BOX)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Cleaning unit life counter value (CLEANER)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Sponge for borderless print counter (SPONGE)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Initialize NVRAM, timer, life counter, mechanical
counter (INIT ALL)

EXEC

Initialize NVRAM (NVRAM)

EXEC

Initialize RTC (RTC)

///

Initialize cutter life total (CUTTER)

EXEC

Initialize CR motor life (CR MOTOR)

EXEC

Initialize total CR motor life (CR TOTAL)

EXEC

Initialize total PF motor life (PF MOTOR)

EXEC

Initialize head unit (HEAD)

EXEC

Initialize cleaning unit (CLEANER)

EXEC

Initialize total printed pages counter (TOTAL
PAGES)

EXEC

Initialize waste ink capacity (MAINTE TANK)

EXEC

Initialize flashing box (FL BOX)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Initialize sponge for borderless print counter
(SPONGE)

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Item menu 2

Panel display

Paper feeding adjustment conversion table 3 (System
table pigment) (XX1=:)

:00H~C9H
:00H~C9H,FFH

Paper feeding adjustment conversion table 4 (System
table dye) (XX2=:)

:00H~C9H
:00H~C9H,FFH

System table version (XXS=)

: F/W version

Parameter backup (BACKUP)

EXEC

Adjustment / setup menu
(SERVICE CONFIG)
Device ID change (D-ID)

nk cartridge type setting (NPD)

CSIC detection level (ED MODE)

Operation time, environment (MENUE)
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Carriage (MENUR)

Product Description

Setup value

For R4C803P
StylusPro7600
StylusPro7600D
PX-7000

For R4C825P
StylusPro9600
StylusPro9600D
PX-9000
0,1,2
O/N/X

RTC date

RTC initialized date

Environment temperature

First power ON date

Printer total energization time

Energy star non-sleep mode total time

Paper sensor total energization time

Suction fan total energization time

Front cover open/close times

Temperature at print less than 15°C

E10

Temperature at print 15°C ~ 20°C

E11

Temperature at print 20°C ~ 25°C

E12

Temperature at print 25°C ~ 30°C

E13

Temperature at print 30°C ~ 35°C

E14

Temperature at print more than 35°C

E15

The highest temperature at print

E16

The lowest temperature at print

E17

Carriage total turning times (190~240cps)

Carriage total turning times (240cps)

Carriage durable parts replacement date

Carriage turning times after durable parts replacement (190~240cps)

Carriage turning times after durable parts replacement (240cps)

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
Ink system (MENUS)
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Total waste ink counter (sponge)

Total waste ink counter (flushing box)

Manual cleaning times

Cleaning times (CL1)

Cleaning times (CL2)

Cleaning times (CL3)

Cleaning times (CL4)

Cleaning times (CL5PowerCL)

Final CL5 cleaning date

Cleaning times (TCL1)

S10

Cleaning times (TCL2)

S11

Cleaning times (TCL3)

S12

Cleaning times (TCL4)

S13

Ink type replacement times

S14

Ink replacement date (last time)

S15

Ink replacement date (2 times before)

S16

Ink type replacement times

S17

Ink replacement date (last time)

S18

Ink replacement date (2 times before)

S19

Ink type replacement times

S20

Ink replacement date (last time)

S21

Ink replacement date (2 times before)

S22

Ink type replacement times

S23

Ink replacement date (last time)

S24

Ink replacement date (2 times before)

S25

Ink type replacement times

S26

Ink replacement date (last time)

S27

Ink treplacement date (2 times before)

S28

Ink type replacement times

S29

Ink type replacement (last time)

S30

Ink type replacement (2 times before)

S31

Maintenance tank replacement times

S32

Maintenance tank replacement date (this time)

S33

Maintenance tank replacement date (last time)

S34

Maintenance tank replacement date (2 times before)

S35

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
menu
Ink 1 (MENUA)
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model)

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model)

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

M.K

Total ink use

Others

Slot 1

Total ink use

Others

Slot 2

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

Total ink use

Others

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

Total ink use

Others

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

A10

Total ink use

Others

A11

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

A12

Total ink use

Others

A13

Total ink use

EPSON genuine ink

A14

Total ink use

Others

Ink cartridge replacement times P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) 110ml

A15

A16

Ink cartridge replacement times P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) 220ml

A17

Ink cartridge replacement times L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) 110ml

A18

Ink cartridge replacement times L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) 220ml

A19

Ink cartridge replacement times M.K

A20

110ml

Ink cartridge replacement times M.K

220ml

A21

Ink cartridge replacement times C

110ml

A22

Ink cartridge replacement times C

220ml

A23

Ink cartridge replacement times M

110ml

A24

Ink cartridge replacement times M

220ml

A25

Ink cartridge replacement times LC

110ml

A26

Ink cartridge replacement times LC

220ml

A27

Ink cartridge replacement times LM

110ml

A28

Ink cartridge replacement times LM

220ml

A29

Ink cartridge replacement times Y

110ml

A30

Ink cartridge replacement times Y

220ml

A31

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
Ink 2 (MENUB)
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Each color ink replacement date (Black1, this time)

Each color ink vendor (Black1, this time)

Each color ink replacement date (Black1, last time)

Each color ink vendor (Black1, last time)

Each color ink replacement date (Black1, 2 times before)

Each color ink vendor (Black1, 2 times before)

Each color ink replacement date (Black2, this time)

Each color ink vendor (Black2, this time)

Each color ink replacement date (Black2, last time)

Each color ink vendor (Black2, last time)

B10

Each color ink replacement date (Black2, 2 times before)

B11

Each color ink vendor (Black2, 2 times before)

B12

Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, this time)

B13

Each color ink vendor (Cyan, this time)

B14

Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, last time)

B15

Each color ink vendor (Cyan, last time)

B16

Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, 2 times before)

B17

Each color ink vendor (Cyan, 2 times before)

B18

Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, this time)

B19

Each color ink vendor (Magenta, this time)

B20

Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, last time)

B21

Each color ink vendor (Magenta, last time)

B22

Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, 2 times before)

B23

Each color ink vendor (Magenta, 2 times before)

B24

Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, this time)

B25

Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, this time)

B26

Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, last time)

B27

Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, last time)

B28

Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, 2 times before)

B29

Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, 2 times before)

B30

Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, this time)

B31

Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, this time)

B32

Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, last time)

B33

Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, last time)

B34

Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, 2 times before)

B35

Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, 2 times before)

B36

Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, this time)

B37

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
menu
Ink 2 (MENUB)
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Each color ink vendor (Yellow, this time)

B38

Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, last time)

B39

Each color ink vendor (Yellow, last time)

B40

Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, 2 times before)

B41

Each color ink vendor (Yellow, 2 times before)

B42

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
Paper (MENUP)
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Roll paper setting times

Sheets setting times

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 1)

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 1)

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 2)

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 2)

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 3)

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 3)

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 4)

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 4)

P10

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 5)

P11

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 5)

P12

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 6)

P13

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 6)

P14

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 7)

P15

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 7)

P16

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 8)

P17

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 8)

P18

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 9)

P19

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 9)

P20

Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 10)

P21

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 10)

P22

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 1)

P23

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 1)

P24

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 2)

P25

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 2)

P26

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 3)

P27

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 3)

P28

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 4)

P29

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 4)

P30

Print length of each paper size(Sheetwidth5)

P31

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 5)

P32

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 6)

P33

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Paper (MENUP)

Item menu 2

Panel display

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 6)

P34

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 7)

P35

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 7)

P36

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 8)

P37

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 8)

P38

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 9)

P39

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 9)

P40

Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 10)

P41

Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 10)

Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Print mode (MENUM)

Product Description

Setup value

P42

Print mode setting times

2880-1440

Uni-D

Print mode setting times

1440-0720

Uni-D

Print mode setting times

720-720

Uni-D

Print mode setting times

720-360

Uni-D

Print mode setting times

360-720

Uni-D

Print mode setting times

Others

Uni-D

Print mode setting times

2880-1440

Bi-D

Print mode setting times

1440-720

Bi-D

Print mode setting times

720-720

Bi-D

Print mode setting times

720-360

Bi-D

M10

Print mode setting times

360-720

Bi-D

M11

Print mode setting times

Others

Bi-D

M12

Borderless print times

Sponge 1

M13

Borderless printing times

Sponge 2

M14

Borderless print times

Sponge 3

M15

Borderless print times

Sponge 4

M16

Borderless print times

Sponge 5

M17

Borderless print times

Sponge 6

M18

Borderless print times

Sponge 7

M19

Borderless print times

Sponge 8

M20

Borderless print times

Sponge 9

M21

Borderless print times

Sponge 10

M22

Borderless print times

Sponge 11

M23

Borderless print times

Sponge 12

M24

Borderless print (four edges) Operation times (1 cut)

M25

Borderless print (four edges) Operation times (2 cuts)

M26

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
Panel setting (MENUO)
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

PC setting

Roll paper margin

Borderless print setting

Cutter position adjustment

Final cutter position adjustment

Nozzle check pattern print

Final nozzle check pattern print

Bi-D

BLACK

Adjustment times

Bi-D

BLACK

Final adjustment date

Bi-D

COLOR

Adjustment times

O10

Final adjustment times/date

Bi-D

COLOR

Uni-D

Adjustment times

Uni-D

Final adjustment date

O11

O12

O13

Cutting pressure

O14

Cutting method

O15

Paper feeding adjustment

O16

Paper suction

O17

Print adjustment

O18

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Maintenance information
Fatal error (MENUF)
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Service call history1 (Type)

Service call history1 (Date)

Service call history2 (Type)

Service call history2 (Date)

Service call history3 (Type)

Service call history3 (Date)

Service call history4 (Type)

Service call history4 (Date)

Service call history5 (Type)

Service call history5 (Date)

F10

Service call history6 (Type)

F11

Service call history6 (Date)

F12

Service call history7 (Type)

F13

Service call history7 (Date)

F14

Service call history8 (Type)

F15

Service call history8 (Date)

F16

Service call history9 (Type)

F17

Service call history9 (Date)

F18

Service call history10 (Type)

F19

Service call history1 0(Date)

F20

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Normal error (MENUN)
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)

Parts counter clear at replacement (MENUX)

Product Description

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Normal error history 1 (Type)

Normal error history 1 (Date)

Normal error history 2 (Type)

Normal error history 2 (Date)

Normal error history 3 (Type)

Normal error history 3 (Date)

Normal error history 4 (Type)

Normal error history 4 (Date)

Normal error history 5 (Type)

Normal error history 5 (Date)

N10

Normal error history 6 (Type)

N11

Normal error history 6 (Date)

N12

Normal error history 7 (Type)

N13

Normal error history 7 (Date)

N14

Normal error history 8 (Type)

N15

Normal error history 8 (Date)

N16

Normal error history 9 (Type)

N17

Normal error history 9 (Date)

N18

Normal error history 10 (Type)

N19

Normal error history 1 (0Date)

N20

Error times (Roll paper width)

N21

Error times (Sheet)

N22

Carriage unit clear at replacement

EXEC

Cleaning unit clear at replacement

EXEC

Head clear at replacement

EXEC

Cutter solenoid clear at replacement

EXEC

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Operation time, environment information counter
clear (INIT.MENUE)

EXEC
EXEC

Carriage information counter clear (INIT.MENUR)

Ink system information clear (INIT.MENUS)

EXEC

Head information counter clear (INIT.MENUH)

EXEC

Cutter information counter clear (INIT.MENUC)
Maintenance information Ink information 1 counter clear (INIT.MENUA)
initializing menu
Ink information 2 counter clear (INIT.MENUB)
(INITINFO)
Paper information counter clear (INIT.MENUP)

EXEC

Print mode information counter clear (INIT.MENUM)

EXEC

Panel setting information counter clear
(INIT.MENUO)

EXEC

Fatal error information counter clear (INIT.MENUF)

EXEC

Normal error information counter clear
(INIT.MENUN)

EXEC

Note 1: The panel display is English that is common for Japanese / English / French / German / Spanish / Portuguese.
2: Roll paper widths XX are following,
Stylus Pro 7600: 610mm and over ~ 160mm and under is classified at 50mm intervals.
Stylus Pro 9600: 1018mm and over ~ 10mm and under is classified at 100mm intervals.
3: However, if the witdth of the installed paper is smaller than set width, the latter will be used.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

INITIALIZE NVRAM, TIMER, LIFE COUNTER, MECHANICAL COUNTER

INITIALIZE CLEANING UNIT LIFE

Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the NVRAM, timer, life counter, and
mechanical counter.

Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the cleaning unit life counter.
INITIALIZE TOTAL PRINTS

INITIALIZE NVRAM

Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the total printed page counter.

Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the NVRAM.
INITIALIZE INK CAPACITY
INITIALIZE RTC

Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the ink capacity counter.

Selecting this mode allows the user to set RTC initialized time to NVRAM.
The panel display is following;

NVRAM COUNTER VALUE INDICATION

RTC INIT = //
/

Selecting this mode allows the user to indicate each life counter in decimal.

NOTE: : year, : month,
: day, : hour

PARAMETER BACKUP

The cursor shifts “year → month → day → hour → year···.” with SelecType button.
Time is adjusted with Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons. RTC initialized time is set to NVRAM
with Enter button, and RTC is initialized.
NOTE: “RTC backup battery end” maintenance call is reset when RTC is
initialized.
INITIALIZE CR MOTOR LIFE
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the CR motor life counter.
INITIALIZE CR MOTOR LIFE TOTAL
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the CR motor life total counter.

Selecting this mode allows the user to move to parameter backup mode. In parameter
backup mode, NVRAM responses and changes to manufacture setting commands are
possible with minimal chance of error. When an error occurs, NVRAM contents are
acquired and can be analyzed.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MENU
Read information for printer maintenance.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION INITIALIZING MENU
Initialize information for printer maintenance. (Counter clear)
PARAMETER BACKUP MODE MENU

INITIALIZE PF MOTOR LIFE

When this mode is selected, you can execute NVRAM backup or writing.

Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the PF motor life counter.

This mode does not support any printing data. In case printing data is sent, normal
operation is not guaranteed.

INITIALIZE HEAD UNIT LIFE
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the head unit life counter.

Product Description

Only turning off the power works to terminate this mode. (Transition to any other
menu is not allowed.)

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.6 Paper feeding adjustment conversion table
The adjustment conversion table has four 256byte screens in NVRAM. The details are
as follows.

How to change correction values
User table
The user table can be changed from the SN menu of Maintenance mode 1.
(See “1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1 (p.66)” for details.)
It can be changed by registering the remote commands paper feeding
adjustment offset value commands (SN83). It is necessary to save changes
(SV).

Table 1-49.
Table name

Description

1 Pigment user table

For pigment ink media, can be changed by user, 256byte

2 Dye user table

For dye inku media, can be changed by user 256byte

3 Pigment system table

For pigment ink media, cannot be changed by user, 256byte

4 Dye system table

For dye ink media, user cannot be changed by user, 256byte

System table

Use during printing
User table
When the conversion mode is ON in the paper feeding adjustment conversion
mode (SN 0A), the paper feeding adjustment setting (SN 04) m2 parameter
will be media ID and indicate user table address. The value stored in this
address is used as the paper feeding adjustment value. However, if the stored
value is FFh, the table is divided into three parts as shown below. The m2
parameter of the paper feeding adjustment setting (SN 04) to be used as the
paper feeding adjustment value changes depending on the corresponding ID
value.

The system table can be changed from the Maintenance mode 2 adjustment
menu. (See “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2 (p.70)” for details.)

User table initialization
Maintenance mode 1
Selecting “User table initialization” in SN menu allows the user to initialize
Maintenance mode 1.

Remote commands
Setting m2=00h in paper feeding adjustment offset value registration (SN 83)
allows the user to initialize remote commands.

1. 01h ~ 40h Use the value of ID+50h as the paper feeding adjustment
value.
2. 41h ~ C0h Use ID as the paper feeding adjustment value.
3. C1h ~ FFh Use the value of ID-64h as the paper feeding adjustment
value.
NOTE: Designation of pigment/dye depends on ink type setting (NPD setting/IK).

System table
This table is not used during printing. The manufacture setting value is stored
to use as backup for user table.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.4.7 Firmware Reload

Revision A

1.4.7.4 Compulsory start F/W DOWNLOAD mode

Reload method from ROM-DIMM is following;

When F/W installation fails for some reasons and start up from begins the backup area,
F/W DOWNLOAD mode is automatically selected. See above for more information
about F/W DOWNLOAD mode.

Write RCC format F/W file into ROM-DIMM (C309type).

NOTE: This mode is released when F/W installation is completed properly.

Switch power OFF and unplug the cable.

Remove the rear cover and insert “1.” ROM-DIMM into the exclusive slot.

Switch power ON.

Installation starts and finishes automatically.

Switch power OFF and unplug the cable.

Remove ROM-DIMM from exclusive slot.

Switch power ON.

1.4.7.1 Reload from ROM-DIMM

1.4.7.2 Reload with F/W DOWNLOAD mode
Reload method via parallel interface is following;
1.

Connect the printer to the host with a parallel cable.

Switch power ON pushing Enter + Paper Source + Cleaning buttons.

Check the printer panel displays “F/W DOWNLOAD”.

Send UPG format F/W file from the host.

Installation is completed.

Restart the printer (Power Off → Power On)

1.4.7.3 Installation with service utility (F/W Update function)
Installation via parallel interface is following;
1.

Connect the printer to the host with a parallel cable.

Switch power ON.

Check that the printer panel displays “READY”.

Send UPG format F/W file from the host service utility.

Installation is completed.

The printer restarts automatically.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.8 Function to prevent irregular printing

1.4.9 Initialization

Strong cancel data

There are three kinds of initialization method.

When 16KB DC1 is sent to the head of each job, the printer performs a special
initialization operation.
Refer to “1.4.9 Initialization (p.86)” for this initialization operation.

1.4.9.1 Hardware initialization

Skip reading of irregular data
Unprintable characters

For initialization, printer operates as follows:
Initializes printer mechanism.
Clears input data buffer.
Clears print buffer.
Sets default values.

It doesn't print characters including ASCII code with text print mode.
Table 1-50. Unprintable hexadecimal code (Control character code)
Code

Character

Code

Character

Code

Character

00h

NULL

10h

DLE

7Fh

DEL

01h

SOH

11h

DC1

02h

STX

12h

DC2

03h

ETX

13h

DC3

This printer is initialized when power to the printer is turned on.

1.4.9.2 Software initialization
The printer is initialized also by the ESC @ command.
For initialization, printer operates as follows:
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values.

04h

EOT

14h

DC4

05h

ENQ

15h

NAK

06h

ACK

16h

SYN

07h

BEL

17h

ETB

08h

18h

CAN

09h

19h

0Ah

NL (LF)

1Ah

SUB

1.4.9.3 Panel initialization

0Bh

1Bh

ESC

0Ch

NP (FF)

1Ch

The printer is initialized when the Pause button is pressed for more than 3 seconds, or
the printer recognizes the -INIT signal.

0Dh

1Dh

0Eh

1Eh

0Fh

1Fh

NOTE: 0Ah, 0Ch, 0Dh, 11h, and 1Bh are ESCP command supported by the
printer. The printer judges the command and decides to print it.

Job timeout
Refer to “1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting (p.42)”.

Product Description

Cancel enhancement data(DC1×16kbyte) initializes the printer.
For initialization, printer operates as follows:
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values.
• Immediately cut only when some printing remain on the paper.

For initialization, printer operates as follows:
Eject a paper. (If roll paper, it cuts paper skipping print part when Paper

Operating Panel

Source = Auto Cut, it doesn’t cut when Paper Source = Cutter Off with
SelecType)
Cap the print head.
Clears input data buffer.
Clears print buffer.
Sets default values.

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.10 Default Setup Values

1.4.10.2 Ink Type Setting

1.4.10.1 Initial Setting for Operation

In ink type setting during initial operation, dye ink will not be recognized if the switch
No. 6 of the DIP Switches (SWD600) on the Main Board of the printer.

Default setup values are as follows. The parameters for items that may be saved for
panel setup, default setup, and remote commands are used as default values.

Page position: Current paper position as page start position
Line feed: 1/6 inch
Left margin
: Stylus Pro 7600 237th character
: Stylus Pro 9600 437th character
Right margin: 1st character
Character pitch: 10 cpi
Print mode: Text mode
(non-raster graphics mode)

There may be a case where "Ink Type" is not set (NPD=0) by ink detection at power on
(with the cartridges installed and without any other error). In such a case, check the
position of the switch No. 6 of the DIP Switches.
NOTE: When the power is turned off without the cartridges installed, NPD=0
will be maintained.

When switch No. 6 is OFF (dye prohibited)
When pigment has been installed
• Sets "Ink Type" for the printer to "Pigment".
• Initial charge is started if the initial charge flag has been set.
• Every time the power is turned on after that, the printer will start as the

•

•
•

Pigment machine.
When dye has been installed
Displays "INVALID CARTRIDGE".
(The LEDs for all colors flash even when dye for only one color has been
installed.)
Does not set "Ink Type" for the printer. (NPD=0 is maintained)
NPD=0 even at the next start of the printer.

When switch No. 6 is ON
• Determines the ink type from the ink set that has been installed properly.
• If the printer is currently used as the dye machine (NPD=2), the printer does

not make judgment at power on. Therefore, the printer can be used as the dye
machine the same way as before.
• Even when "Ink Type" is changed to "Dye" directly in NPD mode, the printer
can be used as the dye machine.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.10.3 MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing
Modes
Table below indicates the relationship between the setting values by MW printing
adjustment (setting on panel) and the printing mode numbers.
Table 1-51. MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes
No. ESC(K
4

03h

–

360×360

–

360×360

–

Non-MW/FOL

–

ESC(D

Setting on Panel
1

–

FOL

–

Non-FOL

–

Non-FOL

–

Non-FOL

–

360×360

FOL

–

360×720

–

720×360

–

FOL2/MW2

–

720×360

8
10

–

12
14

–

66h 720×720

–

68h 720×720

720×720

16
16

01h 720×720

–

8
8

–

9
9

Non-FOL2/MW2

B0h 360×720

–

360×720

–

50h 360×720

360×360

–

No.4

20h 360×360

18
18

–

Non-8PASS

–

1440×720

–

8PASS

–

1440×720

–

2880×720

–

2880×1440

Note : For printing modes (Nos.), see “1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table (p.89)”.

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table
Valid print mode combination is following;
Table 1-52.
No. ESC ( K

ESC( i
n1

ESC ( D

ESC ( e

Output
resolution

Output dot size

Pass

Nozzle Nozzle #

POL
nozzle

Feeding

CR speed
[CPS]

Notes

Specified by
ESC(v command
Specified by
ESC(v command
Specified by
ESC(v command

240

DMW

240

DMW

190

DMW

192/360”

240

#1~#95
#1~#95
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96
#1~#96

0
0
35
22
21
35
43
14
22
14
0
14
26
30
4
8

1-189/360”
95/360”
61/360”
37/360”
75/720”
61/720”
53/720”
41/720”
37/360”
41/720”
2-93/720”
41/720”
35/720”
33/720”
23/720”
11/720”

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240

#3~#94

23/1440”

190

180×180

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

180×180

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

360×180

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

360×180

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

720×180

VSD4

720×180

VSD4

03H

360×360

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

360×360

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

192

#1~#96

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Non-MW/FOL
MW
MW
FOL
Non-FOL
Non-FOL
Non-FOL
FOL
Non-FOL2/MW2
FOL2/MW2
Except 8PASS
8PASS

20H
50H
B0H
01H
66H
68H
-

360×360
360×360
360×360
360×360
360×720
360×720
360×720
360×720
720×360
720×360
720×720
720×720
720×720
720×720
1440×720
1440×720

MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2
MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2

360×360
360×360
360×360
360×360
360×720
360×720
360×720
360×720
720×360
720×720
720×720
720×720
720×720
720×720
1440×720
1440×720

1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
8

95
95
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96

2880×1440

VSD4

2880×1440

VSD4

Pseudo 4 color highspeed color mode
Color skip supported

V resolution conversion
Color skip supported

Note : When an improper combination is set, it prints with default of setting resolution
(designated dot size).

Product Description

Operating Panel

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.5 Controller
CPU:

Hitachi SH7709S 100MHz

Code ROM: External, 2MB
Font ROM: None
RAM:
Stylus Pro 7600: 32MB (Mounted RAM: IC4/6)
Stylus Pro 9600:64MB (Mounted RAM: IC4/6, IC600/604)
Interface
IEEE 1284 interface
USB (HS, FS)
Type B interface

Product Description

Controller

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.6 Interfaces

Table 1-53. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Compatibility) (continued)
Pin No.

1.6.1 Parallel Interface

Return
GND pin
28

Signal Name

-ACKNLG

In/Out

Function

Out

This signal, when the signal level is “Low”, indicates
that the printer has received data and is ready to accept
the next data. The pulse width is 1 µs or 3 µs. (See
Figure 1-19)

1.6.1.1 Compatibility Mode
11

BUSY

Out

This signal, when the level is “HIGH”, indicates that
the printer can not receive data. When the level is
“LOW”, the signal indicates that the printer can
accept data. This signal turns “HIGH” in one of the
following cases:
During data entry
In error status

Out

This signal, when the level is “HIGH”, indicates
paper-out error. (Valid when ERROR = “LOW”)

SLCT

Out

Always at “HIGH” level when the power to the printer
is on. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 kΩ.

-AFXT

Not used

NOTE: It is recommended to use as short an interface cable as possible.

-INIT

The printer is initialized by input of a “LOW” pulse
whose width is 50 µs or more.

CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS

-ERROR

For these signals, twist-pair wires are used, with the return side connected to the signal
ground.

-SLIN

Logic H

Out

Always at “HIGH” level. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9
KΩ.

+5V

Out

Always at “HIGH” level. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0
kΩ.

17
16,33
19-30
15,34

Chassis GND

Chassis GND.

GND

Signal GND.

Not used

SPECIFICATION

Transmission mode:

8 bit parallel

Synchronization:

By STROBE pulse

Handshaking:

By BUSY and ACKNLG signal

Signal level:

TTL level (IEEE1284Level 1 device)

Adaptable connector:

57-30360(amphenol) 36 pin or equivalent

Table 1-53. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Compatibility)
Pin No.

Return
GND pin

Signal Name

In/Out

Function
The strobe pulse. This signal is normally “HIGH” and
read-in of data is executed after turning “LOW”. The
pulse width required at the receive end is 0.5 µs or
more.

-STROBE

DATA0

DATA1

DATA2

DATA3

DATA4

DATA5

DATA6

DATA7

Out
In

The “LOW” signal indicates that the printer is in error
status.
Not used

Note 1: “-” is prefixed to each signal which is active at “LOW” level.
2: In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view.

The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data
bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level
when data is logical 1 and low level when data is
logical 0.

3: The “return side” means twist-pair return, which is connected to the signal GND. For
interface, each signal is connected with a twist-pair wire and the return side is also
connected. For protection against noise, this cable is shielded and connected to the
chassis GND for each of the center machine and the printer.
4: All the interface conditions are based on the TTL level standard. Each of the rise time
and fall time is 0.2 µs or less.
5: See Figure 1-19 for details of signal timing.

Product Description

Interfaces

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

6: Do not perform data transfer by ignoring the -ACKNLG signal or BUSY signal. (Data
transfer to this printer must be executed by checking the level of the -ACKNLG signal
or when the BUSY signal is “LOW”.)

PARALLEL INTERFACE TIMING CHART

7: Assign appropriate character codes to DATA0 ~ 7 of the interface connector (“1” for
open to GND and “0” for short to GND) and connect the BUSY signal line and the STROBE signal line. Then without using any external equipment, you can conduct
printing test of the printer including the interface circuit

Figure 1-19. Timing Chart
Table 1-54.
Parameter

Minimum

Maximum

tsetup

500 ns

thold

500 ns

tstb

500 ns

tready

tbusy

500 ns

tt-out*1

120 ns

tt-in*2

200 ns

treply

tack

Note *1:
*2:

Product Description

Interfaces

Typical 2us

tnbusy

tnext

Rise and fall time of every output signals
Rise and fall time of every input signals

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.6.1.2 Nibble Mode

CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS

SPECIFICATION

Table 1-55. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Nibble)
Pin
No.

Transmission mode: 8 bit parallel
Synchronization:

By STROBE pulse

Handshaking:

By BUSY and ACKNLG signal

Signal level:

TTL compatible (IEEE1284Level 1 device)

Data trans. timing:

Refer to the IEEE-1284 specification

Return
GND Pin

Signal Name

In/Out *

HostClk

DATA0

In
In

DATA1

DATA2

DATA3

Function
Host clock signal.

The DATA0 through DATA7 signals
represent data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each
signal is at high level when data is logical 1
and low level when data is logical 0.

DATA4

The printer responds affirmatively when the extensibility request values are 00H
or 04H, that mean,

DATA5

DATA6

00H Request Nibble Mode Reverse Channel Transfer.
04H Request Device ID; Return Data Using Nibble Mode Rev Channel

DATA7

PtrClk

Out

Printer clock signal.

PtrBusy
/DataBit-3,7

Out

Printer busy signal and reverse channel
transfer data bit 3 or 7.

AckDataReq
/DataBit-2,6

Out

Acknowledge data request signal and reverse
channel transfer data bit 2 or 6.

Xflag
/DataBit-1,5

Out

X-flag signal and reverse channel transfer
data bit 1 or 5.

HostBusy

-INIT

-DataAvail
/DataBit-0,4

Out

1284-Active

Extensibility Request:

Transfer.

Device ID:
When IEEE1284.4 is valid
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

(Character strings, depending on )
MFG: EPSON;
CMD: ESCPL2,BDC,D4;
MDL: ;
CLS: PRINTER;
DES: EPSON;(:space)
When IEEE1284.4 is not valid

(Character strings, depending on )
MFG: EPSON;
CMD: ESCPL2,BDC;
MDL: ;
CLS: PRINTER;
DES: EPSONT;
(:space)

Product Description

Host busy signal.
Not used.
Data available signal and reverse channel
transfer data bit 0 or 4.
1284 active signal.

Logic H

Out

Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 K
ohm resistor.

+5V

Out

Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 K
ohm resistor.

17
16,33,
19-30
15,34

Chassis GND

Chassis GND.

GND

Signal GND.

Not used

Note "*": In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view.

Interfaces

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.6.1.3 ECP Mode

CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS

SPECIFICATION

Table 1-56. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (ECP)

Transmission mode: IEEE-1284ECP mode
Synchronization:

IEEE-1284 specification

Handshaking:

IEEE-1284 specification

Signal level:

TTL compatible (IEEE1284Level 1 device)

Data trans. timing:

IEEE-1284 specification

Pin
No.

Return
GND Pin

HostClk

DATA0

DATA1

DATA2

DATA3

DATA4

DATA5

Extensibility Request:
The printer responds affirmatively when the extensibility request values are 10H
or 04H, that mean,

10H Request ECP Mode Reverse Channel Transfer.
14H Request Device ID; Return Data Using ECP Mode Rev Channel

Signal Name

In/Out*

Function

Data or address information are transferred from a host to a
printer.

DATA6

DATA7

PeriphClk

Out

Data is transferred from a printer to a host.

PeriphAck

Out

A printer uses this signal for a flow control of forward
direction. Also this signal offers the data bit 9 that use it to
judge whether or not it is information command
information or data to be output on the data signal of
reverse direction.
A printer does drive to Low and approve nReverseRequest.

Transfer.

Device ID:
When IEEE1284.4 is valid
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

(Character strings, depending on )
MFG: EPSON;
CMD: ESCPL2,BDC,D4;
MDL: ;
CLS: PRINTER;
DES: EPSONT;(:
space)
When IEEE1284.4 is not valid

(Character strings, depending on )
MFG: EPSON;
CMD: ESCPL2,BDC;
MDL: ;
CLS: PRINTER;
DES: EPSONT;
(: space)

Product Description

The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data bits 0
to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level when data is
logical 1 and low level when data is logical 0.

nAckReverse

Out

Xflag

Out

X-flag signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 1 or 5.

HostAck

A host uses this signal for a flow control of reverse
direction. Also this signal offers the data bit 9 that use it to
judge whether or not it is information command
information or data to be output on the data signal of
forward direction.

nReverseRequest

This signal is made a low, to change a channel toward
reverse.

nPeriphReques

1284-Active

Out
In

This signal uses to produce a host interrupt.

PeriphLogic

Out

+5V

Out

17
16,33
19-30
15,34

Chassis GND

Chassis GND.

GND

Signal GND.

Not connected.

1284 active signal. “HIGH” in ECP mode
Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 K ohm resistor.
Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 K ohm resistor.

Note "*": In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view.

Interfaces

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.6.2 USB interface

Revision A

CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS
Table 1-57. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (USB(FS)

SPECIFICATION

Standard:

Bit rate:

“Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0”
“Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 1.1”
“Universal Serial Bus Devices Class Definition for
Printing Devices Version 1.1”

Pin No

Signal name

In/Out

Function description

VCC

Cable power. Maximum power consumption is
100mA

480Mbps (High Speed Mode)
12Mbp (Full Speed Device)

Data format:

NRZI

Adaptable connector:

USB Series B

-Data

bi-directional

data

+Data

bi-directional

data, pull up to +3.3V via 1.5K ohm resistor

Ground

Cable ground

Acceptable cable length: 2m
Device ID:
When IEEE1284.4 is valid
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

(Character strings, depending on )
MFG : EPSON;
CMD : ESCPL2,BDC,D4;
MDL : ;
CLS
: PRINTER;
DES
: EPSONT;(: space)
When IEEE1284.4 is not valid

(Character strings, depending on )
MFG : EPSON;
CMD : ESCPL2,BDC;
MDL : ;
CLS
: PRINTER;
DES
: EPSONT;(: space)

Product Description

Figure 1-20. Pin Assignment

Interfaces

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.6.3 Optional Interface

Revision A

REPLY FOR OPTION COMMAND

Type-B interface (level 2, 1200mA type) is supported.

Table 1-58. Reply List
Option command
number

REPLY MESSAGE

Command name

Reply-A

Reply-B

(Case of using Type-B I/F card except above)

00h

No-operation

None

Card in Type-B slot 1:

Execute OK

01h

Start Hardware Reset

Main-Type

02h

Start Software Reset

Reject

Stylus Pro 7600:

03h

Send Main System Type

04h

Send Name Data

Reject

05h

Inquire Name Data

MT48p,PW240cl10cpi,PRG(BNxxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,GDI

Stylus Pro 9600:
MT48p,PW440cl10cpi,PRG(BWxxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,GDI

06h

Send Product Name

NOTE: xxxx is F/W version.

07h

Send Software Emulation Type

Product-Name:

08h

Complete Buffered Data

Check Condition

09h

Stop Procedure

Reject

Execute OK

0Ah

Return Buffered Data

Reject

0Bh

Send Entity Type

0Ch

Send Status

0Dh

Quit Procedure

Reject

Emulation-Type

: ESCPL2-00

Entity-Type

: EPSONLQ2

0Eh

Inquire ASCII Message

Reject

0Fh

Send ASCII Message

None

Unknown

None

10h-13h

Product Description

Interfaces

14h

Inquire Emergency Message

15h

Send Emergency Reply

Execute OK

16h-1Fh

Unknown

None

20h-FFh

Reserved

None

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

SUPPORTED MAIN COMMAND AND SENDING TIMING
Table 1-59. Commands and Sending Timing
Main command
number

Command name

Sending timing

1.6.4 Supplements
PREVENTION HOSTS FROM DATA TRANSFER TIME-OUT
When data is received from the parallel interface or the type B interface while no error
has occurred (including the pause condition), the printer receives data a rate of 2 byte/
second while buffer free space is less than 16 kbytes in order to prevent host timeout.
When buffer free space is more than 32kbytes, the 2 byte/second receive rate is cleared,
and receive is halted when free space reaches 16 bytes, and returns to the 2 byte/second
rate when free space reaches 512 kbyte or more.

01h

Start Software Reset

-Init signal on the std. parallel
-Type B I/F Option command: 01h
-Panel Reset
-Cold start

04h

Send Name Data

-Type B I/F Option command: 05h

07h

Inquire Software Emulation
Type

-Changing Software Emulation type

INTERFACE SELECTION

0Eh

Inquire ASCII Message

-Writing to DBIN-register

The printer has the parallel interface, the USB interface, the optional interface. These
interfaces are selected manually by the default setting mode or selected automatically.

14h

Inquire Emergency Reply

-Reply for Emergency command

15h

Send Emergency Message

-Receive Emergency command

Sending BDC-ST through DBIN register
When State-Reply is set “ON” by ST from Type-B I/F, sending BDC-ST through
DBIN register is started. When State-Reply is started, “Start” and “End” of BDC-ST
characters are announced by sending the Main command 0Eh.

Emergency command (BGJC):

Manual selection
One of 3 interfaces can be selected; the parallel interface, the USB interface, the
optional interface.

Automatic selection
Select a interface which the printer received data first after power ON. If it passes
10 seconds after interruption of data receiving, it will be idle status (any interface
is not selected) and will select a interface which the printer received data first.

Interface state and interface selection
When the parallel interface is not selected, the interface goes into the busy
status.
Only reverse communication can be done at this time.
When the printer is initialized or returned to the idle state, the parallel
interface becomes ready status, the USB interface becomes non NACK reply
status, and the option interface resets OFF-LINE bit of Main Status Register
(MNSTS).
INIT signal on the parallel interface is not effective while that interface is not
selected or nibble Mode , ECP Mode.

“0x00”: Get device ID
“0x01”: Get all status
“0x08”:LFP Bi-D command (For acquisition of job information)

Product Description

Interfaces

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.7 Optional Units and Consumables

Storage temperature
Condition

1.7.1 Ink Cartridge
Selection of ink types, detection of cartridges and the amount of remaining ink are
controlled by CSIC.
C H E C K
P O IN T

When installing the pigment ink cartridges, shake them gently
a couple of times beforehand to ensure the designed print
quality.
The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro
9600.

temperature

Remarks

Packed

-30°C ~ 40°C

Within 1 month when 40°C

Installed

-20°C ~ 40°C

Within 1 month when 40°C

Packed
transportation

-30°C ~ 60°C

Within 1 month when 40°C
Within 120 hours when 0°C

C H E C K
P O IN T

If you remove an ink cartridge before it reaches the ink end state,
you should store it under the same ambient conditions as for the
printer body in such a way that the ink discharge opening is
protected from dust intrusion. The ink cartridge stored as such and
installed again can be used if it is within the term of availability.

SPECIFICATION

Ink life: 2 years from production date

Type: Pigment / Dye ink cartridge

Print quality assured: pigment:

Form: Exclusive ink cartridge

6 months after open / dye: 2 years from production date

Ink capacity:
110ml (Model Number: ICxx24)
220ml (Stylus Pro 9600 only) (Model Number: ICxx25)

INSTALLATION LOCATIONS
The locations to install the ink cartridges are assigned from the left side of the ink
cartridge holder as indicated below:

Dimension:
110ml: 25.1 mm (W) × 165.8 mm (D) × 105.3 mm (H)
220ml: 25.1 mm (W) × 280.8 mm (D) × 105.3 mm (H)

Table 1-60. Locations to Install Ink Cartridges
Dye

Total weight:
110ml: approx. 200g
220ml: approx. 385g

Effective ink:
110ml: more than 97.0 g
220ml: more than 205.0 g

Color:
Photo Black, magenta, light magenta, cyan, light cyan, yellow Light Black
(pigment only), Matte black (pigment only)

Environment condition
Temperature:
10°C ~ 40°C
Relative humidity:: 5% ~ 85%

Product Description

C H E C K
P O IN T

Optional Units and Consumables

Pigment 1

Pigment 2

Pigment 3

Photo K

Matte K

Any ink cartridge other than the K and LK ink cartridges is
equipped with a wrong insertion preventing mechanism so that it
can be installed only at its position and in the correct orientation.

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.7.4 Maintenance Tank

1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge
C H E C K
P O IN T

The cleaning cartridge is the same as the 220-ml ink cartridge in
shape except that it does not have the projection for a color block.

The maintenance tank is located in the lower space at the right side of the printer body
and constructed in such a way that the user can replace it when “maintenance tank full”
is detected.

Type:

Exclusive maintenance tank for waste ink

Dimension:

Width: 102.5 mm × Depth: 235 mm × Height:
79.5 mm

Type:

Exclusive cleaning cartridge

Capacity:

1000ml approx.

Dimension:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

Total weight:

TBD

Capacity:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

Waste ink permitted limit:

650ml

Total weight:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

Environment condition:

TBD

Effective cleaning solution:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

Environment condition:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

Storage temperature:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

Life:

Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge

1.7.3 Draining cartridge
C H E C K
P O IN T

The draining cartridge is the same as the 110-ml ink cartridge in
shape except that it does not have the projection for a color block.

Type:

Exclusive draining cartridge (no ink pack)

Dimension:

Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge

Capacity:

None

Total weight:

75g approx.

Effective cleaning solution:

None

Environment condition:

Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge

Storage temperature:

Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge

Life:

Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge

Product Description

Optional Units and Consumables

CHAPTER

OPERATING PRINCIPLES

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.1 Overview
This chapter explains the print mechanism and operating principles for the EPSON
Stylus Pro 7600/9600.
The explanation is composed as follows:

2.2

Print Mechanism Components (p.102)
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5

Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.103)
Paper Feed Assembly (p.113)
Cleaning Mechanism (p.115)
Ink Supply Mechanism (p.117)
Others (p.118)

2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board (p.119)
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board (p.120)

Operating Principles

Overview

101

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.2 Print Mechanism Components

Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components (continued)

The major electrical parts used in the printer mechanism of this printer are as shown
below. Hereafter, we will explain each printer mechanism focusing on these parts.
Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components
Part

Drive
voltage

Description

Refer
to

The number of nozzles: 96
Nozzle x 7 colors

Head thermistor

+3.3V

Incorporated in the print head

CR motor

+42V

DC motor

CR_HP sensor
(Carriage origin)

+3.3V

p.105

Transmission type photo-interrupter

p.104

CR encoder sensor

+5V

Linear encoder (180LPI)

Pump motor

+42V

DC motor

p.104
p.115

HD_SLID sensor
(Head slide origin)

+3.3V

Reflection type photo-interrupter

p.107

P_EDGE sensor
(Paper edge)

+5V

Reflection type photo-interrupter

p.108

Cutter solenoid

+24V

DC solenoid

p.112
p.113
p.113

Description

Refer
to

+5V,
+3.3V

CSIC

p.117

Maintenance tank

+5V,
+3.3V

CSIC

p.115

+3.3V

Limit switch

p.118

Printer control/drive circuit board

p.119

Others (p.118)

MAIN board
Radiator cooling fan

p.104

Drive
voltage

Ink ID

Cover open sensor
(Cover Open L)

Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.103)
Print head

Part

+5V

DC brushless fan

Dip swich

–

Dip swich

Jumper

–

Jumper

Power supply board

–

p.207
p.120

Paper Feed Assembly (p.113)
PF motor

+42V

DC motor

PF encoder sensor

+5V

Linear encoder (360LPI)

Paper suction fans

+24V

The number of DC blowers
Stylus Pro 7600: 2
Stylus Pro 9600: 3

p.114

P_REAR sensor
(Paper rear)

+5V

Reflection type photo-interrupter

p.114

+3.3V/
+5V

Transmission type photo-interrupter

p.114

P_THICK sensor
(Paper thickness)

+5V

Transmission type photo-interrupter

p.114

Release Sensor
(I/H lever)

+5V

Limit switch

p.114

+42V

DC motor

p.115

P_THICK_0.3 sensor
(Paper thickness)

Ink Supply Mechanism (p.117)
Pump motor

Cleaning Mechanism (p.115)

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

102

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is equipped with a unique carriage mechanism which enables
reliable, high-precision movement of the on-carriage head for high-precision printing
in the printing range (= carriage movement range).

P_EDGE sensor

Carriage
CR_HP Sensor and Flag

Encoder Sensor and
Timing Fence

HD-SLID Sensor and
Slide Gear

Figure 2-1. Carriage Mechanism

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

103

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

CARRIAGE MOVING UNIT
In place of the carriage holding system in which 2 CR guide shafts extending in the
column direction were used, as in the conventional models, a structure with the
carriage mounted via multiple rollers (bearings) on a CR guide rail made of a square
extruded aluminum pipe is used. Steel rails are incorporated in the roller contact and
running surface, and the result is a reduction in friction in the direction of movement,
reduced vibration and improved durability.
C A U T IO N

Projection on Carriage
CR_HP Sensor
(Mounted on the
mechanism’s right
end.)
Outside HP range

Inside HP Range

Encoder Sensor
(On Carriage)

The screws used to fasten the CR guide rail should not be taken out
and the carriage should not be removed. These are adjusted and
assembled to the nearest 1/100 mm at the factory.

Step Ruler (Slit Plate)

CR motor
A DC motor is used for the CR motor and the slit in the timing fence affixed on the
bottom of and parallel with the CR guide rail is read by the encoder sensor
mounted on the carriage (linear encoder system), and this signal is compared to
logical control values in the control circuit on the MAIN board, which carries out
feedback speed control. Through this control, high print precision is maintained.

Encoder Sensor

HP Flag

Drive transmissions from the CR motor to the carriage use the easy-to-maintain,
durable timing belt.
CR Motor

The sensors used in the carriage moving unit are described below.

Carriage

CR Timing Belt

CR_HP Sensor

Figure 2-2. Carriage Mechanism Unit, Carriage Moving Unit

CR_HP Sensor (Carriage Home Position)
This is a transmissive photosensor which is mounted on the right end of the printer
mechanism and detects the entry position of the flag (projection) provided on the
carriage as the carriage moving home position. Outputs from this sensor are
“OFF” in the HP range and “ON” outside the HP range.

CR encoder sensor (Linear Encoder)
This encoder is mounted on the back of the carriage and outputs pulses (2
channels) corresponding to the position of the slit on the timing fence that is
incorporated into the CR guide rail which are used for CR motor servo control and
PTS (Print Timing Signal) generation. The resolution is 1/180 inch.

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

104

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Paper Feed Direction

PRINT HEAD

Nozzle pitch:

F Row

G Row

Black:
Color:

E Row

96 nozzles x 7 rows = 672 nozzles
(See Figure 2-3 for nozzle arrangement.)

D Row

Nozzle configuration:

C Row

On-demand ink-jet
B Row

Printing method:

A Row

Stylus Pro 7600/9600 employs a single print head which incorporates both functions
for black and color. (The preceding model has two print heads, namely, head B and
head C.)
The print head incorporates a thermistor. According to the temperature around the head
detected by the thermistor, the CPU on the Main Board controls the ink discharge
speed and the amount of ink to be discharged.

192 nozzles (96 nozzles for each of Black1 and Black2)
480 nozzles (96 nozzles for each of cyan, magenta,
light cyan, light magenta and yellow)
0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color

Table 2-2. Relationship between Nozzle Rows and Colors
Ink Type
Pigment

Dye

Operating Principles

Nozzle Row

Color

Photo Black or Matte Black

Gray or Matte Black

Carriage Moving Direction

Figure 2-3. Nozzle Arrangement

Drive waveform:
There are three printing modes (drive waveforms) for each of use of pigment ink
and use of dye ink.
Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms)
Waveform
Name

Ink Discharged
(ng)

Drive Frequency

Print Resolution

CR Speed

VSD1

13.8-27.6-41.5

8.64 KHz

H360 x V360
H720 x V360

240 CPS

VSD2

4.5-9.5-23.0

8.64 KHz

H720 x V720
H1440 x V720

240 CPS

VSD4

4.5

2 shots at 6.84 KHz

H2880 x V1440

190 CPS

Ink Type

Pigment ink

Print Mechanism Components

105

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms)
Ink Type

Waveform
Name
VSD1-Dye

Dye ink

Ink Discharged
(ng)

Drive Frequency

Print Resolution

CR Speed

13.8-27.6-41.5

8.64 KHz

H360 x V360
H720 x V360

240 CPS
240 CPS
190 CPS

VSD2-Dye

5.4-9.5-23.0

8.64 KHz

H720 x V720
H1440 x V720

VSD4-Dye

2.5

2 shots at 6.84 KHz

H2880 x V1440

CR Guide Rail
Right Side of Carriage
Bearing

Carriage
Bearing

PLATEN GAP ADJUSTMENT UNIT
In order to maintain the print precision, it is necessary to maintain the carriage (= head)
mounting position so that it is always a constant distance from the surface of the paper.
In this printer, the print head nozzle surfaces and platen surface are variable
mechanisms so that the gap between the paper printing surface and the head nozzle
surface can be kept constant.
The carriage has a 2-body construction with a sub-carriage on which the print heads are
mounted attached to the carriage which forms the base. The sub-carriage moves in the
vertical direction with respect to the paper surface. This movable system uses a cam.
The sub-carriage to paper surface distance changes linearly from the cam (= PG) home
position. When the carriage is in the HP position (= right end), the pump motor and the
gear mounted on the cam shaft engage, the motor's rotation (reverse) drives the cam
and the sub-carriage is positioned at the proper gap position.
In order to maintain the distance between the print head nozzle surface and the paper
properly, the thicknesses of the paper used are classified into 3 levels for PG setting,
namely, PG small (1.3 mm), PG medium (2.2 mm) and PG large (2.7 mm).

Sub-carriage
(head mounted)
PG (Head SLID)
Slide Gear

HD_SLID
Sensor

Pump motor driving
force (CCW)

HP Detection Flag

The sensors used in the platen gap adjustment unit are explained below.

Right Side of Printer Mechanism

Figure 2-4. Carriage Mechanical Unit and PG Adjustment Unit

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

106

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

HD_SLID (Head Gap Home Position Detection) Sensor
This sensor detects the mechanical home position when the position of the subcarriage (head height from the paper surface) on the carriage undergoes change. A
reflective type photosensor is used and the position of the flag on the gear mounted
on the camshaft is detected.
The cam is so shaped as to realize the four head positions relative to the
mechanical home position.

Start
Sequence for moving to pseudo-vacuum position
Slide Sensor OFF
?

Detecting distance up to the reflector: 7.5 ± 0.5 mm

No
Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns
OFF

NOTE: Error number displayed when the total pulse count has exceeded 1000:
0001000C Head slide origin detection error (Service Call Error)
Table 2-4. Pulse Positions
Application

Pulse Count from
Origin (Converted to 22 Phase Excitation)

Position

Gap Width

Large

2.6 mm

Platen gap for thick paper

Medium

2.2 mm

Platen gap for paper which can be
soiled if setting is for thin paper

121

1.2 mm

Platen gap for thin paper

204

Minimum

0.7 mm

Platen gap for film

287

Slide Sensor OFF
?
Yes

Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns
ON
No

Small
One round

Yes

Slide Sensor ON
?
Yes

After head slide origin sensor turns ON, pump motor runs
forward by 10 pulses

333

Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns
OFF
No

Slide Sensor OFF
?
Yes

Pump motor runs forward by 204 pulses (till the “Small”
platen gap position)
Pump motor runs forward by 18 pulses (till epicyclic gear
release)
End

Figure 2-5. Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

107

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

P_EDGE (Paper Width Detection) Sensor
This sensor, mounted at the left side of the cutter unit of the carriage, detects paper
edges by moving the carriage.
It detects four points of paper edges, namely, left and right points on the front edge
and a front point on the left and right edges of the paper. Each position is
calculated from the difference in reflection value between the platen and the paper.
A reflective type photosensor is used. Each paper edge position (presence or
absence of paper) is determined by an A/D converted value of the output from the
photosensor.
During printing, the sensor monitors the left and right edges of the paper to detect
a skew.

Carriage

Left edge

Scanning of HP side →
Opposite side

Detecting distance up to the paper surface: 7.0mm ± 0.5
C H E C K
P O IN T

Right edge

Scanning of opposite side
→ HP side
P_EDGE Sensor

HP Side

It must be ensured that the reflection value of the least
reflective paper is greater than the reflection value of the
platen.
The paper must be free from floating at the detection point.
If external light, such as sunlight, can enter the sensor due to
the construction, mis-detection must be prevented by LED ON/
OFF control.
(Same as with Stylus Pro 7000)
In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, the P_EDGE Sensor works also to
detect the paper front edge. (Stylus Pro 7600/9600 does not
have the P_FRONT Sensor for exclusive use to detect the paper
front edge which is incorporated in the conventional printer
models.)

Figure 2-6. Carriage Unit Paper Width Detection Sensor

NOTE: It is possible to turn this sensor off by “SelecType” (p.35).
The following pages show paper size detection sequence (left and right edges and front
edge).

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

108

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Paper size detection sequence (left and right edges)
Error display:
Set the paper correctly
C H E C K
P O IN T

Transition to this sequence is allowed only at paper initial.
At inter-page skew checking, transition to Simplified detection
sequence for left and right edges (skew check) (p.111) takes place.
Solid Line: Paper
Broken Line: Printable
Area

Right edge
detection
position

Note "*1": Paper presence position = 215.4 mm
Paper absence position = 132.9 mm
LED turns off upon completion of front
detection.
"*2": Printing area MAX position
CR moves to the paper presence position (100CPS).
Stylus Pro 9600:
Flashing during acceleration on Fl_Box
1260.5mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width)
Stylus Pro 7600
752.5mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width)
Moving to paper absence position. Threshold value is
"*3": Printing area MIN position
142.9mm –4.0mm (Reserved width)
calculated during moving to paper presence position. After
determination of threshold value, edge sensor LED is kept on. "*4": To prevent wrong recognition as paper
*1
presence when there is no paper as a result
of wrong detection of the rib of the platen
by the edge sensor, a paper width detected
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves outward
to be not greater than A4 size - 20 mm is
toward the printing area MAX position (350CPS). *2
judged to be paper absence.

Left and right edge
detection start

Left edge
detection
position

Paper absence detected
?

Yes
From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR
moves by 2 mm toward the home. (240CPS)
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves outward
at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is detected is
judged to be the right edge position of the paper.
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home to the printing area MIN position (350CPS). *3

Paper absence detected
?

Yes
From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR
moves by 2 mm outward (240CPS).
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is
detected is judged to be the left edge position of the paper.

Paper width>210 – 20mm
? *4

Yes
Return

No
Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Error

Figure 2-7. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Left and Right Edges)

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

109

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Paper size detection sequence (front edge)

Note "*1": Paper left upper detection position =
Paper left edge position +27.5mm
"*2": PF maximum travel = –260mm
CR moves onto Fl_Box. (350CPS)
(Self-diagnostics mode –340mm)
No change in sensor output even
1
CR moves to the paper left upper detection position. *
when this travel has been exceeded is
handled as an error.
Stylus Pro 9600: 1260.5mm + 7.0mm
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
(Reserved width)
negative direction (picks up paper). (40CPS)
Stylus Pro 7600: 752.5mm + 7.0mm
PF stops if paper absence is detected. *2
(Reserved width)
"*3": PF moving target position = 1st
nozzle position (0.00 mm)
No
Paper absence detected
No change in sensor output even
?
when this position has been passed is
handled as an error.
Yes
"*4": Paper right upper detection position =
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
Paper right edge pos. –27.5mm
positive direction (gets paper off). (5CPS) The position where
"*5": In the figure below, the left upper
paper presence is detected is judged to be the left front edge
leading edge is handled as the paper
position of the paper. *3
size front position. (On the
assumption that the paper front edge
CR moves to the paper right upper detection position.
is not correctly perpendicular to the
4
(350CPS) *
paper feed direction)

Front edge detection start

Conditions:
For execution of this processing, the paper level threshold value must be
known. (Execute this processing after detection of the right and left edges.)
Error display:
Set the paper correctly
When the paper width detection function is turned off, use the paper size front
position as the user paper setting position. (On the assumption that detection
is not made by the edge sensors)

Solid Line: Paper
Broken Line: Printable
Area

Paper absence detected by
edge sensor?

Yes

While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
positive direction (gets paper off) (40CPS). PF stops if paper
presence is detected. (Prevention of skew at leading edge) *3

Paper presence detected
?

Yes

While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
negative direction (picks up paper) (40CPS).
PF stops if paper absence is detected. *2

Paper absence detected
?

Detection
position for
right upper
leading edge
position

Detection
position for left
upper leading
edge position

Yes

While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
positive direction (gets paper off) (40CPS). The position
where paper absence is detected is judged to be the right front
edge position of the paper. *3
The paper left front edge position and the right front edge
position are compared and the one in the positive direction
(upper one) is judged to be the paper size front position. *3
Edge sensor LED is turned off.

Edge sensor LED is turned off.

Return

Error

Figure 2-8. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Front Edge)

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

110

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Simplified detection sequence for left and right edges (skew check)

Note "*1": Paper presence position = 215.4 mm
Paper absence position = 132.9 mm
LED turns off upon completion of skew
check.
"*2": Printing area MIN position
=142.9 mm –4.0 mm (Reserved width)
A4 size (210.0 mm) – 20.0 mm = 190.0
mm

When the paper width detection function is turned off, left and right edge
detection (skew check) is not carried out.
Error display:
1: Set the paper correctly
2: PAPER NOT STRAIGHT

C H E C K
P O IN T

Left and right edge
detection start
CR moves to the paper presence position (100CPS).
Flashing during acceleration on Fl_Box

Transition to this sequence is allowed only at inter-page skew
checking (at cut/eject, etc.) At paper initial, transition to “Paper size
detection sequence (left and right edges)” (p.109) takes place.

Right edge
detection position

Solid Line: Paper
Broken Line: Printable
Area

Left edge
detection position

Moving to paper absence position. Threshold value is
calculated during moving to paper presence position. After
determination of threshold value, edge sensor LED is kept on.
*1
CR moves to the position "printing area MIN position + A4
size - 20 mm = 328.9 mm" (350CPS) *2
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home to the printing area MIN position (350CPS).

Paper absence detected
?

Previously determined
paper width X mm

Yes

From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR
moves by 2 mm outward (240CPS).

Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Error 1

While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is
detected is judged to be the left edge position of the paper.
The paper width determined by the previously executed left
and right edge detection (at paper initial or skew check) is
added to the left edge position. The resultant position is
regarded as the paper right edge position.
Paper right edge
position deflected by 3 mm from previously
determined position?
No
Paper left edge
position deflected by 3 mm from previously
determined position?
No
Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Return

Yes

Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Error 2

Figure 2-9. Simplified Detection Sequence for Left and Right Edges
(Skew Check)

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

111

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Cutter Solenoid
This DC solenoid controls the cutting pressure of the roll paper cutter. It also
unlock the carriage.
This function can be set On or Off using the Panel buttons.

Cutter Solenoid

Carriage

Roll Paper

NOTE: See “1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification” (p.22)

Cutter

Figure 2-10. Carriage Unit Cutter Solenoid

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

112

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
PF motor

2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly
This printer uses friction feed to carry out highly precise feeding of roll paper and cut
sheets, and comprises a unique paper feed mechanism.
The paper feed mechanism unit is configured from a grid roller (one piece
construction), and pressurizing and follower roller assemblies mounted on the back of
the CR guide rail opposite the front surface.

The PF motor is a DC motor. The grid of the loop scale mounted on the Grid
Roller is read by the PF_ENC sensor and the output pulse is fed back to control the
motor. This feedback control ensures high printing accuracy.
Driving of the grid roller is accomplished by the PF motor via the PF timing belt
which attaches to a reduction pulley that is connected to the grid roller.
Secondary Roller Assembly
Grid Roller
CR Guide Rail

Secondary Roller Assembly
Grid Roller

R = Paper width flag
L = Paper Set Lever flag

Speed-Reduction Gear
Center Frame
Platen

Sub Platen
PF Motor

Paper Set Lever

Paper
Paper Guide L1, L2

Figure 2-11. Paper Feed Mechanism Unit 1/2

PF Motor

Figure 2-12. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit PF Rail Unit

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

113

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Paper Suction Fans
The printer is equipped with suction fans in the lower space in the rear. The space
in the column direction behind Paper Guide L2 is divided into 2 compartments
(Stylus Pro 7600) or 3 compartments (Stylus Pro 9600), and one fan is mounted in
each compartment. By drawing air through multiple holes punched in Paper Guide
L2 in the back surface of the paper path and blowing it out through the rear of the
printer housing, suction is applied to the surfaces of Paper Guides L1 and L2 and
the paper is stabilized (prevented from flying up) as it passes through the printer.
The suction fans undergo air flow control (fan rotation duty control), which is
carried out by firmware control based on the printer's operating state (when paper
is set and during printing, etc.) and the type of paper used.

Table 2-5. Modes
Paper Thickness

Shield Plate

Sensor Output

P_THICK_0.3

P_THICK

P_THICK_0.3

Absent (Open)

0.3 mm to 0.8 mm incl.

Present (Closed)

Absent (Open)

0.81 mm or above

Below 0.3 mm

P_THICK

Present (Closed)

Connector not connected

Pressure release (Hi-Up)

Paper suction fans

NOTE: Fans mounted
Stylus Pro 7600: 2 fans
Stylus Pro 9600: 3 fans
P-Rear sensor

The following sensors aid in the paper feeding process.

P_REAR sensor
This sensor is attached to the Upper Paper Guide and is an optical (photoreflective) sensor. This sensor detects the rear edge of the paper and detects the
front edge when the paper is first loaded in the paper path. The position of this
sensor is stored in EEPROM.

Paper set lever, paper thickness detection (P_THICK, P_THICK_0.3)
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor:
Transmission type photosensor, left side.
P_THICK Sensor:
Transmission type photosensor, right side.
The mechanism is so designed that the threshold values for paper thickness are 0.3 ~
0.4 mm (P_THICK_0.3 sensor) and 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (P_THICK sensor). The sensors
operate just when the pressure lever is brought down.
The designed detection values of the sensors for the UP and DOWN positions of the
pressure lever are 0.3 mm and 0.8 mm. The pressure lever in the UP position is
detected by a combination of both sensors.
“Thick paper state” occurs when the connections are open.
There is no error processing since this mechanism can not determine whether it has
broke down or not.
Since the mechanism is always in recognition of thick paper, printing on thin paper is
carry out with the platen gap kept large.

Operating Principles

Figure 2-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit (Stylus Pro 7600) 2/2

Print Mechanism Components

114

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism

Cleaning Mechanism
(Maintenance ASSY)

The cleaning mechanism in this printer is compatible with the cleaning mechanism in
the Stylus Pro 5000/9000. The cleaning mechanism is located on the right side of the
printer. The waste ink from the cleaning mechanism is channeled to the waste ink pad
(Maintenance Tank) in the lower right side through the tube.
The cleaning mechanism components are installed above the sub-frame and some are
fixed on the main frame as shown below.

Pump assembly (head cleaner)
When the head is in the capped position (valve closed), the pump motor creates a
vacuum that sucks ink from the nozzles. This is used for removing ink from the
nozzles and nozzle plate, initial ink charge, as well as cleaning. The waste ink
flows through one small tube to the waste ink pads.

Head cleaner
The head cleaner has felt on one side and rubber on the other, and is used to wipe
or rub off ink and foreign materials from the nozzle surface.

Pump motor (stepping motor)
The pump motor runs normally (the pump wheel turns clockwise as viewed from the
pump wheel side) and reverses (the pump wheel turns counterclockwise) to execute the
following functions:

Maintenance Tank

Figure 2-14. Cleaning Mechanism Components

Clockwise rotation (CW):
pump assembly drive for cleaning and so on
(Suction, wiper setting)
Counter clockwise rotation (CCW):
Pump release, wiper reset, HD_SLIDE (head gap adjustment) cam drive. See
“Platen Gap Adjustment Unit” (p.106).

Pump assembly
Head cleaner
Flushing box

Table 2-6. Pump Drive Modes
Suction Speed Name
(Drive Mode)
Low speed (IS5)

Pump Wheel
Revolving Speed
0.46 rev/sec

Pump Wheel
Motor Frequency
Revolving Speed (2-2 phase conversion)
0.15 ml/sec
186 Hz

Standard (IS4)

1.6 rev/sec

0.6 ml/sec

648 Hz

High speed (IS3)

2.6 rev/sec

0.9 ml/sec

1053 Hz

Super-high speed (IS2)

4.2 rev/sec

1.1 ml/sec

1702 Hz

Super-high speed (IS1)

5 rev/sec

1.2 ml/sec

2026 Hz

Pump motor

Note : The values for Motor Frequency above, given only for information, are obtained by 2-2
phase drive conversion with a drive system consisting of the pump wheel with P.C.D of
φ 30.4 and motor gear with P.C.D of φ 6.

Operating Principles

Cap assembly

CR Lock

Print Mechanism Components

Figure 2-15. Cleaning Mechanism Components

115

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Cap assembly

Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation (continued)

When not printing, the print head (should) rest on the cap assembly to ensure that
the nozzles don't clog. Also, the print head is in the capped position during ink
charging, cleaning, and so on.

Flushing box
Flushing (dummy printing) is performed over the flushing box, and the flushed ink
flows through the pipe to the waste ink pads.

Operation
Empty Suction
Operation

•

Wiping Operation

The carriage is moved from right to left along the rubber side of the
wiper (the right half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so
that the head surface is rubbed with the rubber of the wiper.
Purpose:
• Before ink suction, removes the ink and other substances adhering to
the head surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.

Rubbing Operation

The carriage is moved from left to right along the felt side of the wiper
(the left half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so that
the head surface is rubbed with the felt of the wiper.
For easy removal of adhering substances, the nozzle surface is wetted
before rubbing operation by suction of a small amount of ink.
Purpose:
• Removes ink and other substances adhering strongly to the head
surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.

Capping

In order to prevent the ink viscosity from increasing while it is being
kept, a rubber cap is placed over the print head nozzles when entering a
shutdown operation.

CR Lock Mechanism
If the carriage moves from the printable area to beyond the capping (CR_HOME)
position to the right, the carriage moving prevention lock is engaged. The CR lock
mechanism uses the cutter solenoid in common. When the cutter solenoid goes ON
in the capping position, the CR lock is released.

Maintenance Tank (Waste ink absorber)
NOTE: The Ink System Terms used in the above text are explained in the
following table.
Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation
Operation

Explanation

Carriage (CR) Lock

• This is the carriage stop position when the power is Off.
• The time when the carriage is in the standby position (home position)
with the power On and with no paper loaded and no print data to
print.

Ink Initial Filling

Flushing

Explanation
After ink is sucked up, the remaining ink inside the cap is sucked up
and the ink adhering to the head nozzle surface is removed.
• Through flushing, etc., the ink that has accumulated in the cap is
sucked up and discharged.

• This is the operation where the head is filled with ink for the first
time. When the first ink cartridge is inserted (after all 6 colors have
been inserted), the ink initial filling operation is performed
automatically.
• The initial filling flag is set when the printer is shipped from the
factory, then after this operation, the initial filling flag is reset. The
initial filling flag is also set after the “ Input Rank” (p233) is run.
• In order to prevent the viscosity of the ink inside the head nozzles
from increasing, the ink inside the flushing box is flushed out.
• Flushing is done when paper is set, when printing from the standby
state, during continuous printing, during paper Eject, during paper
cutting, etc.

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

116

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is so constructed that the 7 cartridges for different colors are
installed in the respective ink holders (I/H) in the left area of the printer. A projection
and unique marking are placed on each color ink cartridge case to prevent wrong
insertion so that the correct cartridge is inserted in the right direction.

Ink cartridge holder (I/H: x7)
Ink tube (x7)
To each color head damper

Explanation of valve mechanism mounted on the cartridge

Pump motor (stepping
motor) (p.115)

The valve automatically opens and closes when the ink cartridge is mounted and
removed.

Ink cartridge holder (Opening/closing)
Ink cartridge

Ink cartridge (x7)
To print head

Maintenance Tank

Figure 2-16. Valve Mechanism
The ink flow is as shown below.
Each color's ink cartridge → Each color's I/H (Ink Holder) → Each color's ink tube →
Each color's head dumper (carriage) → Print Heads
The information in EEPROM of each color ink cartridge is sent through the CSIC
Relay Board in each ink holder and stored in memory on the CSIC Board.
The CSIC Board stores various pieces of information, such as ink colors and remaining
amount of ink. (Refer to “Ink information menu (p.69)”)

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

Figure 2-17. Ink Supply Mechanism

117

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.2.5 Others
COVER SENSOR

Panel Unit

In order to detect whether the front cover on the lower front of this printer is open or
closed, a cover sensor is mounted on the printer on the left side where the front cover
opens and closes.

Cover Sensor

This sensor carries out control of operating and stopping of the CR motor and PF motor
drive circuits via the MAIN board's logic circuit after detecting the cover's status. This
control is the same when the paper support level is in the release state.
CIRCUIT BOARD PLACEMENT
The panel unit is located i the right front of the printer and the AC inlet, power supply
circuit board and the MAIN circuit board are mounted in the compartment on the
printer's rear side.
Front Cover Flag
Front Cover

Figure 2-18. Cover Sensor Panel Unit
AC Inlet
Power Supply Circuit Board
MAIN Circuit Board

Figure 2-19. Circuit Board Layout

Operating Principles

Print Mechanism Components

118

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board

Note "*": Stylus Pro 7600: IC4/6 only (32MByte)
Stylus Pro 9600: IC4/6 and IC600/601 (64MByte)

This section describes the operation of C472MAIN Board, which controls and drives
the printer mechanism of Stylus Pro 7600/9600.
NOTE: For details of each circuit, refer to Chapter 7 Appendix (p.281).

Explanation of major elements on C472MAIN Board
Table 2-8. Major Elements
Name/Code
SH-3
HD6417709A

Location

CY24242PVC

IC602

E09A42AA

IC607

E05B80CD

IC35

E09A41RA

IC34

E05C02BA

IC603

Flash Memory

SD-RAM
L6203
LB11847

IC10

IC9
IC4/6
IC600/601
IC31/32
IC30

Operating Principles

Function
32 bit RISC-CPU
• Drive clock frequency = 100 MHz
System clock controller
• CPU clock
• SDRAM clock
• Clock for I/O control
Custom ASIC
1. Print data processing
• Rasterizer
• Head drive control
2. Mechanism control (motors and solenoids)
3. Sensor control
Custom ASIC
• External I/O control
IEEE1284 (bidirectional parallel) I/F
Type-B port
Custom ASIC
• Head drive voltage waveform generation control
Custom ASIC
• USB-I/F (2.0) control
Flash Memory (16Mbit)
• For storage of control program (firmware)
• Saving of various setting parameters and control
information
System memory *
128mbit x 16
PF/CR Motor Drivers IC
• PWM constant current drive control
Pump Motor Driver IC

Outline of Control Circuit Board

Block01.eps

Figure 2-20. C472MAIN Board-Circuit Block Diagram

119

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board

There are three control signals between the C472MAIN Board and the Power Supply
Circuit Board. Table below describes details of the control signals:

The 100 V AC power from the wall outlet is supplied via the power cable, an accessory
of Stylus Pro 7600/9600, into the Inlet of the printer and to the Power Supply Circuit
Board.

Table 2-10. Control Signals between C472MAIN Board and Power Supply Board

The power switch constitutes a secondary power switch system. The secondary power
switch system operates as follows: even with the power switch turned off, the Power
Supply Circuit Board is operating by a slight power as long as the power cable is
connected.

C A U T IO N

Even after the power switch is turned off, the Power Supply Circuit
Board does not stop operating immediately, but power is kept on
until the ink system ending sequence is completed.
Do not disconnect the power cable or do not shut off power by
turning off any power switch other than that on the printer.

Signal Name
REM_ON
(MAIN→
Power Supply)

Operating

Turned ON/OFF by C472MAIN Board.
• When these terminals are shorted, the drive system
power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC are active.

Off

• When these terminals are open (= L), the drive
system power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC are 0
VDC.
• The 5 VDC power is not controlled with these
terminals.

Operating
(= H)

When each output from the Power Supply Circuit
Board has become inactive because of turning off of
the power switch or when the input voltage has
dropped below the rated voltage value, “H” signal is
sent to the C472MAIN Board.

Off
(= L)

The power switch is turned on and the Power Supply
Circuit Board Unit starts operating so that each output
becomes active.
“H” signal is sent to the C472MAIN Board.

POW_ON/OFF

Operating

(Panel /
MAIN→Power
Supply)

Connected to the power switch on the Panel Unit.
• These terminals are shorted when the switch is ON.
The Power Supply Circuit Board becomes active.

Off

• These terminals are open when the switch is
OFF.The Power Supply Unit keeps operating for
about ten and several seconds to a few minutes and
then turns off.

AC_OFF
(MAIN←
Power Supply)

The Power Supply Circuit Board is equipped with a fuse for overcurrent protection.
Table 2-9 below indicates the rating of the fuse:
Table 2-9. Fuse Rating
Input Voltage Range [V AC]
100 +/– 10%

Operating Principles

Fuse Rating
125 V AC / 6.3A

Function

Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board

120

CHAPTER

TROUBLESHOOTING

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.1 Outline
This section explains procedures for rapid and efficient troubleshooting if trouble
occurs in the printer.

C H E C K
P O IN T

When disassembling the printer, turn the printer's power switch
Off, then after making sure that the panel display is off, pull out the
power cable from the outlet and disconnect the interface cable.

C A U T IO N

Only the specified printer tools should be used so as to maintain

3.1.1 Introduction
First of all, when performing troubleshooting, the following basic parts should be
checked.
1.

Look in the printer for any foreign matter and make sure there is nothing there
to hinder normal operation.
2. Carry out printing by setting the printer in the “Pause” state, then press the
[SelecType] button 2 times. Next using the [Paper Feed] switch in the “TEST
PRINT MENU,” select “STATUS CHECK”, then press the [Enter] switch
and print.
From the status sheet, you can Check to see if the cause of the trouble is that
the printer (either the printer unit itself or some major unit) is at the end of its
service life, and check the user inherent panel settings, etc.
3. There should be no market soiling of the outside or the inside of the printer. If
it is extremely soiled, carry out cleaning.
4. Each of the units and parts in the printer should not be missing or damaged,
and should have the normal shape and configuration.
5. Each of the harnesses should be undamaged, and should be correctly
connected to the relevant connector (perpendicularly and in the correct
direction).
6. Each cam and gear in the printer mechanism should have no uneven wear or
be overly worn, and the combinations should be correct.
7. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should be cleaned and it
should be ascertained whether the cause of the trouble is because of dirt or due
to some other cause.
8. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should not be unevenly
worn or excessively worn, and their combinations should be correct.
9. As necessary, initialize the NVRAM on the C472MAIN Board (return the
individual customer settings and panel settings to the factory settings).
Carry out initialization by executing “INIT. NVRAM” from the “CLEAR
COUNTERS MENU” in “Maintenance Mode 2."
10. Make certain that the DIP Switches and Jumpers have been set correctly.
(Refer to “DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment”
(p.209))

Troubleshooting

Outline

the printer's quality.
Only the specified lubricants and adhesives should be used.
The specified adjustments should definitely be carried out.

122

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2 Error Display

Table 3-1. Error Indications on LCD (continued)
LCD Panel Message

The printer displays the relevant error message on the LCD and the error status by
LEDs. At the same time, it stops not only printing operation but also receiving data
from the host PC. (Among the interface signals, the “-ERROR” signal is turned “low”
and the “BUSY” signal is turned “high” to inhibit data input.)

3.2.1 Errors
Errors, Warnings and service call errors (fatal errors) are described below.

3.2.1.1 Error Indications on LCD

Printer Status

Refer to
p.127

LOWER PAPER SET LVR

Paper set lever is released

REMOVE PAPER

Paper is too thick for cleaning

RELOAD PAPER

Paper check error

p.129

PAPER NOT STRAIGHT

Paper not straight

p.128

INVALID CARTRIDGE

Non-genuine cartridge

p.130

SET INK LEVER

Ink lever released

p.130

NO MAINTENANCE TANK

No maintenance tank

p.131

COMMAND ERROR

Command error

p.131

OPTION I/F ERROR

Type-B I/F error

p.128

Table 3-1. Error Indications on LCD
LCD Panel Message

Printer Status

Refer to

SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnn

Fatal error*

COVER OPEN

Cover open error

p.127

LOAD PAPER

Paper set lever is released during operation

p.126

PAPER JAM

Paper jam

p.127

INK OUT

Ink out error

p.130

NO INK CARTRIDGE

No ink cartridge

p.130

INVALID CARTRIDGE

Wrong ink cartridge

p.130

SET INK CARTRIDGE

Defective ink cartridge

p.131

Paper out error

p.126

PAPER OUT

COMMAND ERROR

• Ink sequence currently executed
• Paper currently initialized
• Timer IC reset
/NVRAM clear

LOAD XXX PAPER

• Wrong setting with roll paper and sheet
(Roll paper)
• Wrong setting with roll paper and sheet
(Sheet)

–

p.126

RELOAD PAPER

Problem with paper output (sheet)

p.129

MAINTENANCE TANK FULL

Maintenance tank full

p.131

PAPER NOT CUT

Paper cutting error

p.128

Troubleshooting

Note : The status can't be replied during service call.

Error Display

123

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.1.2 Warning Indications on LCD
Warning warns the user of the occurrence of a corresponding event by replacing the
“READY” or “PRINTING” message on the LCD with the warning message. But it has
no effect on any other operations of the printer.
The warning message will not be cleared until the cause is resolved.
Table 3-2. Warning Indications on LCD
LCD Panel Message

Printer Status

Refer to

Photo Black Ink Low
Cyan Ink Low
Magenta Ink Low
Yellow Ink Low
INK LOW

Light Cyan Ink Low

p.132

Light Magenta Ink Low
Light Black Ink Low
Matte Black Ink Low (K1)
Matte Black Ink Low (K2)
MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST
FULL

Maintenance tank full warning

MAINTENANCE REQ. nnnn

Maintenance request (Set RTC date)

p.132

Maintenance request (CR motor life)
p.132

Maintenance request (Head life)

Troubleshooting

Error Display

124

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors

Table 3-3. Service Call (Fatal) Errors (continued)
Error Code

Table 3-3. Service Call (Fatal) Errors
Error Code

Description

Refer to

00000101

CR motor life

p.134

00010000

PF motor encoder check error

p.135

00010001

PF motor out of step

p.135

00010002

PF motor overcurrent

p.136

00010003

PF motor in-position time-out

p.136

00010004

CR motor encoder check error

p.137

00010005

CR motor out of step

p.137

00010006

CR motor overcurrent

p.138

00010007

CR motor in-position time-out

p.138

00010008

Servo interrupt watchdog time-out

p.139

00010009

System interrupt watchdog time-out

p.139

0001000A

CR home position sensor error

p.139

0001000B

PF home position sensor error

p.139

0001000C

Head slide (PG) home position sensor error

p.140

0001000F

CR motor PWM output faulty

p.140

00010010

PF motor PWM output faulty

p.141

0001001B

Head driver (TG) temperature error

p.141

0001001D

CR servo parameter error

p.142

0001001E

PF servo parameter error

p.142

00010020

CSIC reed/right error

p.143

00010022

Ink type error (setting on printer body side)

p.143

00010023

RTC analysis error

p.143

00010025

CSIC ROM communication error

p.144

00010026

RTC communication error

p.144

00010028

Head error

p.144

00010029

Unidentified NMI

p.144

0001002A

CR ASIC ECU error

p.144

0001002B

PF ASIC ECU error

p.144

00020000

NVRAM error

p.144

Troubleshooting

Description

Refer to

00020002

SDRAM error

p.145

00020003

BOOT program SUM error

p.145

00020009

Flash memory SUM error

p.145

0002000A

Program load error

p.145

0002000B

Internal memory shortage error

p.145

0002000C

Review error

p.146

100000E0

CPU address error (load misalignment)

p.146

10000100

CPU address error (storage misalignment)

p.146

10000180

CPU reserve command code exception error

p.146

100001A0

CPU slot illegal command exception error

p.146

100005C0

CPU DMA address error

p.146

10000xxx

CPU error

p.146

Error Display

125

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.2 Errors

3.2.2.2 Wrong paper source is selected on panel
Table 3-5.
Item

3.2.2.1 Paper End/End of roll
Table 3-4.
Item

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

LOAD xxx PAPER

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED lights up.
The LED blinks corresponding to paper path set with PP
command of remote command. (See Table 3-6)

Explanation

Different paper source is selected on panel from the paper source
that is selected by PP command.

Recovery

Replace the paper into one that is selected by command, or the
error will be also cleared by toggle the paper source setting on
panel, if only the panel setting is wrong. After it is cleared, it is
ready to print.

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

PAPER OUT

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED lights up.

Explanation

The error occurs in following cases.
[A]: Paper is not set.
[B]: The printer detects end of the roll. In this time the paper
feed roller holds and keeps the end of the roll.
[C]: The printer completed a printing on a sheet or detects end
of the sheet. In this time the paper feed roller holds and keeps
the end of the sheet.

Table 3-6. LED Indications for Wrong Setting (Roll Paper/Sheet)

Set paper.

Recovery

Troubleshooting

Description

In the case of [B] and [C] above, remove the paper and set new
paper.
After setting new paper, the error will be cleared. If the printing
data remains in the printer, the printing job will continue on the
newly set paper. When printing job continue, the printer ejects
buffer content, cuts or ejects the paper, and starts printing after
developing new data. Remained data is printed and ejected with
paper length designated with the command.
If the error is not cleared even after paper setting,
Possible causes are problems with the following sensors. Take
corrective action as instructed below.
• P_REAR sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
1. Check for paper dust or foreign matters on the sensor and clean
it.
2. Check the operation of each sensor and make AD adjustment in
the self-diagnostics menu.
(Rear AD Adjustment (p.231) / Edge AD Adjustment (p.232))
Note: Change the location of the printer if there may be an
effect of any strong external light, such as the sunlight.

PP Command

Roll paper auto cut
LED

Roll paper manual cut
LED

Sheet LED

Roll Paper

Blink

Off

Sheet

Off

Blink

3.2.2.3 Paper set lever is released during operation
Table 3-7.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

SET PAPER LEVER

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED lights up.

Explanation

Paper set lever is released during operation

Recovery

It is cleared with pushing down the lever, and the printer continues
the operation.

Error Display

126

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.2.4 Paper set lever is released

3.2.2.6 Front Cover Open

Table 3-8.
Item
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

Table 3-10.
Description

Item

Description

LOWER PAPER SET LVR

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

FRONT COVER OPEN

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED lights up.

LED STATUS

None

Explanation

Paper set lever is released during paper set operation.
Explanation

Front cover is opened. Under this error, all of CR motion and ink
sequences are halted. Therefore it may give damages to printing
head if this situation continues very long time.

The error display will be cleared after finishing paper set and
pushing down the lever, and message “PRESS PAUSE BUTTON”
will appear.
Refer to user's manuals for paper setting procedure.

Recovery

Close the front cover. If it is happened with print ready status

3.2.2.5 Paper Jam
Recovery

Table 3-9.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

PAPER JAM

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.

Explanation

While printing, feeding or cutting, a jammed paper prevents the
CR motion. Paper jam is detected if one of rear and front paper
sensor detect paper existing and over drive current or missynchronization of CR motor is detected.

during printing, it recovers to print ready status automatically. If
it is happened during pause, it recovers to pause status
automatically. If the cover is opened during printing, the
suspended printing pass is never resumed. Therefore there may
appear a stripe on the printout. It is better to make the printer
PAUSE by pressing the Pause button prior to open the cover
while printing, however there may appear a uneven-coloring on
some media because of the difference of printing time.
If the error is not cleared even after cover closing,
Execute Checking Cover Sensor Operation in the selfdiagnostics menu and if any problem is found, take corrective
action.
1. Check that the cover is closed properly.
2. Replace the sensor.

After removing the jammed paper, “TURN PWR OFF AND

Recovery

ON” is displayed and then reboot by turning off and on
according to the message.
Check the paper path for foreign matters or any deformed parts
which can cause a paper jam.

Note : Errors in the drive system can occur in case of out-of-step, overcurrent or any other
significant deviation from command values to the servo motor.

Troubleshooting

Error Display

127

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.2.7 Type-B I/F error

3.2.2.9 Paper Not Straight
Table 3-11.

Item

Table 3-13.
Description

Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

OPTION I/F ERROR

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

PAPER NOT STRAIGHT

LED STATUS

None

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.

Explanation

A non-supported option Type-B I/F card is installed into the
printer.
This error occurs when the printer is turned on.

Explanation

Recovery

Turn off the printer, remove the option Type-B I/F card, and then
turn on again.
If the error recurs, repeat checking by installing another Type-B
interface.

When a skew exceed 3mm between top and end of the paper is
occur, user should confirm the previous printout because it may
not be printed completely. And also smudges on back of following
printouts may occur because of poured ink on the platen.

Recovery

This error is cleared by paper set operation.
• User should set the paper according the description of User's
guide exactly in order to prevent the occurrence of this error.
• The roll edge should be neatly arranged.
• This error can be prevented at following printing by paper set
operation.
This error may also cleared by turning OFF→ ON, but this error
may occur at following printing.

3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error
Table 3-12.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

PAPER NOT CUT

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.

Explanation

The paper cannot cut whole paper completely by the cutter, or cut
paper remains over the front paper sensor.
Remove the cut paper, or cut manually the paper using scissors

Recovery

Troubleshooting

or else. User should lift the paper set lever and reset the paper or
push the Pause button. Thereby the printer will execute paper
initialize operation and will be printable status. In this time, if
the paper is so disarranged that it may cause head friction or
paper jam, user should cut the disarranged part neatly and reset
the paper. User should replace the cutter blade if it becomes
dull.
Checking the operation of the Cutter Solenoid:
Execute “Actuator 2 (p.229)” in the self-diagnostics menu and if
any problem is found, replace the actuator.

Error Display

128

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.2.10 Paper check error/Paper eject error (sheet)

3.2.2.11 Paper is too thick for cleaning

Table 3-14.
Item

Table 3-15.
Description

Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

RELOAD PAPER

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

REMOVE PAPER

LED STATUS

“PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.

LED STATUS

PAPER OUT LED is blinking.

Explanation

This error occurs when cleaning is executed although a paper
thickness of with1.2mm is set.

Recovery

Cleaning is executed automatically when paper is removed and the
paper set lever is set.

Explanation

This error occur in following cases
1. The top length of ejected paper is too long to be back-fed
when paper is set.
2. Paper's horizontal position exceeds the normally printable area
when paper is set.
3. Paper's horizontal position exceeds the normal cutting
permission area just after printing.
4. Length of sheet exceeds the ejectable length and cannot be
ejected completely.
5. After recovery of cutter error.
See “3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error (p.128)”.

Recovery

Troubleshooting

In case of 1,2,3, user should set the paper again according the
User's guide exactly. If the top of the paper has indentation, it
should be trimmed. In case of 4,5, the ejected portion of paper top
should be removed and then user set paper again. User can cut the
portion using auto cutter after paper set lever is lifted up (in this
time, it shifts to “RELOAD PAPER”), horizontal position is reset
straight, paper set lever is pushed down, roll paper auto cut is
selected, and “Paper Cut/Eject” button is pushed if the paper
cutting is possible.

3.2.2.12 Not enough ink for cleaning
Table 3-16.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

NOT ENOUGH INK

LED STATUS

INK OUT LED goes on

Explanation

This error occurs when cleaning is executed although the amount
of ink necessary for cleaning is not left in each ink cartridge. The
amount of ink necessary differs with each cleaning. *Timer CL
and others are excluded.

Recovery

This error clears automatically after about 5 seconds. Error
message appears again during cleaning, unless all the installed
cartridges are replaced with ones with enough ink for cleaning.
The message “NOT ENOUGH INK” is displayed on the panel for
5 seconds. The corresponding “INK OUT” LED goes on for 5
seconds to alert the user to the error. The error is cleared by
pressing Pause button during the 5 second period.

Error Display

129

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.2.13 Ink-related Errors

3.2.2.14 Defective ink cartridge
Table 3-18.

Ink End (error)

: Ink end error occurs when the defined amount of ink
have been consumed after NearEnd is detected. It
occurs when NearEnd cartridge is inserted, whether the
defined amount of ink have been consumed or not.
No Ink Cartridge : There detected any ink cartridge slot without cartridge.
Wrong/Non-genuine Ink Cartridge (dye / pigment):
This error occurs when wrong ink type (dye / pigment)
is installed.
Table 3-17.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

“INK OUT”, “NO INK CARTRIDGE” or “INVALID
CARTRIDGE“

LED STATUS

Corresponding color LED lights up

Recovery

Check the CSIC contact terminal on the I/C Holder and the CSIC
terminal on the ink cartridge. (damage or deformation)
If no problem with the CSIC terminals is found, install a new ink
cartridge.

Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

INK OUT

LED STATUS

This error occurs when the ink cartridge CSIC has some problems
with the contents and has loose connection. Corresponded “INK
OUT” LED goes on.

Explanation

There detected some problems with the contents of the ink
cartridge CSIC. Reading/writing into ink cartridge was failed.

Recovery

In case of loose connection, release the ink lever (at this time the
massage “SET INK” is displayed and reload the ink cartridge.
When the error is not recovered, open the ink compartment, and
then replace cartridge with new full one.

3.2.2.15 Ink lever released
Table 3-19.
Item

Troubleshooting

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

SET INK LEVER

LED STATUS

None

Explanation

It is happen when ink lever is released.

Recovery

Set the ink lever.

Error Display

130

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.2.19 Wrong IK designation

3.2.2.16 Illegal ink cartridge
Table 3-20.
Item
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

Table 3-23.
Description

Item

Description

INVALID CARTRIDGE

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

COMMAND ERROR

LED STATUS

Corresponding color LED lights up

LED STATUS

All color LEDs blink

Explanation

This error occurs when illegal ink cartridge is installed.

Recovery

Push the Pause button.

Explanation

This error occurs when ink type (dye / pigment / black ink type)
designated with IK command is different from ink cartridge
installed in the printer, or when non-supported ESC/P3 format
data is received.

Recovery

Stop data transmitting from the host and reset the panel.

3.2.2.17 Maintenance tank full

3.2.2.20 Fatal Error

Table 3-21.
Item

Table 3-24.

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE TANK FULL

LED STATUS

Item

Description

Maintenance tank LED lights up

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnn indicates type of error.

Explanation

This error occurs when maintenance tank is full.

LED STATUS

All color LEDs blink

Recovery

Replace a maintenance tank.
Explanation

This error occurs in following cases
• A serious failure is detected which can not fixed by users.
• A life end of a unit is detected and the continuous operation
may cause a more fatal problems.
• Printer halted by an un-expected operation or command
receiving.

Recovery

Once turn off the printer and on if the error is cleared, then user
can use the printer.
If the fatal error of the same code occurs again and results in
impossible printer operation, find the cause of the trouble by
consulting “3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors
(p.134)” and replace the relevant defective parts.

Fatal error type

Refer to “3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors (p.125)”.

3.2.2.18 No Maintenance tank
Table 3-22.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

NO MAINTENANCE TANK

LED STATUS

Maintenance tank LED lights up

Explanation

This error occurs when maintenance tank is not installed properly.

Recovery

Replace a maintenance tank.

Troubleshooting

Error Display

131

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.3 Troubleshooting for Warning

3.2.3.3 Maintenance request

Warnings warn users the occurrences of corresponding events by replacing “READY”
or “PRINTING” messages into each warning messages on LCD. But it gives no effect
to any other operations. The warning messages will never cleared until the cause is
resolved.

LCD PANEL MESSAGE
“MAINTENANCE REQ. nnnn”
NOTE: The code “nnnn” designates the unit to be maintained.

Maintenance request type
The acquired value with applying exclusive OR process to bits designated as the
following table is displayed on nnnn in hexadecimal form.

3.2.3.1 Ink Low

Table 3-27.

Table 3-25.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

INK LOW

LED STATUS

Corresponding INK OUT LED blinks

Explanation

The warring occurs if CSIC detects “Near End”.

Recovery

Replace the ink cartridge with new one.

3.2.3.2 Maintenance tank full warning

Bit

Request object

Life of discharged ink
tank

CR life

Reciprocating time of CR has
reached predetermined amount.

Continue nozzle check
error

Battery shutoff

RTC backup battery shutoff

White dot detector
AGC error

Head unit

Shot time has reached
predetermined amount.

Execute head unit life
initialization in
Maintenance mode 2.

Cleaning unit

Pump counter has reached
predetermined amount.

Execute cleaning unit life
initialization in
Maintenance mode 2

Date is not set

Date is not set.

Set with RTC initialization
in Maintenance mode 2.

Battery pressure

RTC backup battery pressure is
low temporarily

Wait for a while

Reserved

Table 3-26.
Item

Description

LCD PANEL
MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST FULL

LED STATUS

Maintenance tank LED blinks

Explanation

The warring occurs when the maintenance tank is almost full.

Recovery

Replace the maintenance tank with new one.

Cause

How to recover errors
Execute CR motor
initialization in
Maintenance mode 2.
Replace RTC backup
battery.
-

:
31

Note : In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, Bit0, Bit2, Bit4 are also treated as Reserve.

Troubleshooting

Error Display

132

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

LED STATUS

C H E C K
P O IN T

Paper Out LED goes on at intervals of 5 seconds

Explanation
The life of the unit that designated by the code “nnnn” is almost run out. It prompts
users to call the service person to maintain it.

Maintenance requests for head unit occur at the time of 28
billion shots/nozzle.

A cap, pump, pump motor, wiper, flushing box are replaced
together when replacing the cleaning unit.

Recovery
This message is cleared only when the printer is maintained by the service person.
Table 3-28. “MAINTENANCE REQ nnnn” Message
Assigned bit
3

9-31

(NA)

(RSVD)

0002

CR pass count reaches the limit

Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / CR
MOTOR]

(NA)

(RSVD)

0008

RTC backup battery is empty

Install the battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2
[CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC]

(NA)

(RSVD)

0020

The number of shots (per nozzle)
reaches the limit

Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / HEAD]

(NA)

(RSVD)

0040

Pump motor operation count
reaches the limit

Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / CLEANER]

(NA)

(RSVD)

0080

Date is not specified

Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC]

(NA)

(RSVD)

0100

RTC backup battery drops
instantaneously

(Wait for a while) *2

(NA)

(RSVD)

0088

RTC backup battery is not
installed

Install the battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2
[CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC]

(Nozzle check error - Continue) *1

Battery empty

(Dot missing detector - AGC error) *1

Print head - Life end

Cleaning unit - Life end

Date not specified

Abnormal battery voltage

(Reserved: Not used)

How to clear

CR Motor - Life end

Conditions
*1

Cause

(Maintenance Tank life-end) *1

ex.

nnnn

Not applicable to the Stylus Pro 7600/9600.

Troubleshooting

Error Display

“If the same message appears again, replace the RTC backup battery and perform
Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC].”

133

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors

3.2.4.1 CR motor life (00000101)

If any service call error has occurred, Stylus Pro 7600/9600 inhibits interruption,
restores the actuators to their respective initial positions, writes the NVRAM values as
a rule, and makes all the LEDs on the panel flash.

Problem:

Description:
Occurrence of any error from which the user can not recover the printer.
Life expiration of a long-life part which can cause secondary problems if the
part is further used.

The number of carriage round trips has reached the specified value.

Specified value:
Stylus Pro 9600: 2,500,000 passes (B0/Speed)
Stylus Pro 7600: 3,250,000 passes (A1/Speed)
NOTE:

1 Pass = 1 round trip

Remedy:

The printer has been brought into malfunction by unexpected operation or by

1.
2.

receiving an unexpected command.

Solution:

Replace the CR Motor and Driven Pulley.
Check the Head FFC for breakage, scratches on the surface or damage.

Check the ink supply tube for cracks, breakage or ink leakage.

3.
4.

Turn the power off once and turn it on again. If the error display is cleared, try to
continue using the printer.
If the error of the same code has occurred again, the service technician must
replace the relevant part with a new one. Then the error display will be cleared.

•

NOTE: See “3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors (p.125)”.

•

C H E C K
P O IN T

Check the CR motor life by “SelecType” (p.35).
([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU”
→ “SERVICE LIFE”)
When the life of the CR motor has been almost expired:
Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
When the CR motor has still an adequate life remaining.:
Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

After replacing the CR Motor, execute “ Initialize CR motor
life” (p83) in “Maintenance Mode 2".

Do not initialize the CR Motor cumulative counter value (“CR
TOTAL”).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

134

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.2 PF motor encoder check error (00010000)

3.2.4.3 PF Motor out of step (00010001)

Explanation:

During initial operation at power on or during PF Motor operation, there may be a
case where the encoder pulse signal can not be recognized at specified intervals. In
such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
Broken wire for the PF motor encoder, inverted wiring for A and B pulses,
disconnected connector for the encoder or motor, or inverted wiring for the motor.

During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal
within the specified range is not input within a specified period of time or the pulse
width is extremely long. In such a case, the PF Motor is judged to be out-of-step,
so that this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
• During paper feed operation, the error counter has reached the out-of-step

pulse count.

Points to be checked:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8 Ω).
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu.
All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.

• Defective motor.

Points to be checked:
1.

The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu.
All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

Remedy:
• Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186).

(Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272))

Remedy:

• Replace the PF Motor (p.185).

•
•
•
•

(Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264))
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264)
Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
Replace the PF motor extension cable
Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

135

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.4 PF motor overcurrent (00010002)

3.2.4.5 PF motor in-position time out (00010003)

Explanation:

During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal current out of
the specified limits is detected in the PF Motor drive circuit on the C472MAIN
Board or a current exceeding the specified value is required. In such a case, this
message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:

At PF stop processing in PF Motor control, there may be a case where the paper
can not move to the final target position within a specified period of time. In such
a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without completing
paper feed.

Hardware has detected overcurrent in the PF motor circuit.

Points to be checked:
1.

2.
3.

Points to be checked:

Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
By visual inspection, check the PF Loop Scale for any defect, such as damage
or soiling, which can cause faulty reading by the sensor.
By visual inspection, check the harness of the PF Motor for any problem
causing a short circuit to the frame.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remedy:

• Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
• Replace the PF motor extension cable
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu.
All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.

Remedy:
• Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186).

(Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272))
• Replace the PF Motor (p.185).

(Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264))
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Replace the PF motor extension cable

Troubleshooting

Error Display

136

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.6 CR motor encoder check error (00010004)

3.2.4.7 CR motor out of step (00010005)

Explanation:

During initial operation at power on or during CR Motor operation, there may be a
case where the encoder pulse signal is not input at specified intervals. In such a
case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
Broken wire for the CR motor encoder, inverted wiring for A and B pulses,
disconnected connector for the encoder or motor, or inverted wiring for the motor.

During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal
within the specified range is not input within a specified period of time or the pulse
width is extremely long. In such a case, the CR Motor is judged to be out-of-step,
so that this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
• The error counter has reached the out-of-step pulse count because of

impossible movement of the carriage, bumping of the carriage or dirty timing
fence.
• Defective motor.

Points to be checked:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other
foreign matters.
The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω)
Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu.
All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.

Points to be checked:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remedy:

• Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).

(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))

• Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).

(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Check to see if the timing fence for detection of the encoder pulse is removed
• Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the timing fence

Remedy:
• Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).

(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183).
• Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).

(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))
• Replace the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) (p.184).
• Check to see if the timing fence for detection of the encoder pulse is not

installed correctly.
• Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the timing fence

Troubleshooting

Error Display

137

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.8 CR motor overcurrent (00010006)

3.2.4.9 CR motor in-position time-out (00010007)

Explanation:

During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal current out of
the specified limits is detected in the CR Motor drive circuit on the C472MAIN
Board or a current exceeding the specified value is required. In such a case, this
message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:

At carriage stop processing in CR Motor control, there may be a case where the
carriage can not move to the final target position within a specified period of time
(as per pulse detection). In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.

Cause of trouble:

Hardware has detected overcurrent in the CR motor circuit.

There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without completing
paper feed.

Points to be checked:
1.

2.
3.

Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
By visual inspection, check the T Fence for any defect, such as damage or
soiling, which can cause faulty reading by the sensor.
By visual inspection, check the harness of the CR Motor for any problem
causing a short circuit to the frame.

Points to be checked:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remedy:
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).

(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
• Correct the carriage home position.
• Remove the foreign matters. Clean the timing fence.

Remedy:
• Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).

(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))
• Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).

(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

138

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.10 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out (00010008)

3.2.4.12 CR home position sensor error (0001000A)

Explanation:

During the CR Motor or PF Motor operation, there may be a case where watch dog
time-out is detected in the DC motor control circuit or on the ASIC. In such a case,
this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:

During initial operation at power on or during printing operation, there may be a
case where the home position can not be detected at the home position detection
timing or within a specified period of time. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:

System trouble.

Shield plate detection error due to no change in the signal from the CR home
position sensor.

Remedy:
Since the cause is deemed to be a defective CPU or ASIC, replace the MAIN
Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Points to be checked:
1.

3.2.4.11 System interrupt watchdog time-out (00010009)

Explanation:
In the data processing stage on the C472MAIN Board, there may be a case where
runaway or defective cash occurs on CPU or ASIC. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.

Check that the sensor functions properly.
(Refer to “5.2.2.3 Sensors ”(p224) in the self-diagnostics menu.)
Check that the sensor is free from adhesion of any foreign matters.

Remedy:
• Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183).
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Cause of trouble:
System trouble.

3.2.4.13 PF home position sensor error (0001000B)

Remedy:

Does not occur (there is no function to detect PF home position).

Since the CPU or ASIC is deemed defective, take the following action:
If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on again, replace
the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

139

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.14 Head slide (PG) home position sensor error (0001000C)

3.2.4.15 CR motor PWM output faulty (0001000F)

Explanation:

During initial operation at power on or during head platen gap fluctuation (change)
operation after paper setting, there may be a case where the head slide home
position can not be detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and the
printer stops operating.

There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows during
CR Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.
This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which does not
reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon 00010005 in the carriage drive
system has occurred and the running speed of the motor has been detected to be
too low, so that the current is increased to raise the running speed of the motor.
Thus, this message appears to prevent the CR Motor from being overheated.

Cause of trouble:
•
•
•
•

Home position detection error due to head slide out-of-step
Defective head slide home position sensor
Defective head slide motor, disconnected connector or broken cable
Gears not engaged properly

Cause of trouble:
• A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept

Points to be checked:
Head Slide Detection Sensor

applied).
• Carriage related mechanism out of step or carriage bumped.

• Check that the sensor functions properly.
• Check that the sensor and the head platen gap drive gear are free from

•

•
•

Remedy/Points to be checked:

obstruction by adhesion of foreign matters or soiling.
Head Slide Motor (Pump Motor)
Measure the resistance value. (9.2Ω)
If the motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same
time.
Check that the motor operates properly.
(Refer to “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-diagnostics menu.)
Check that the gear train including the head platen gap drive gear is free from
any obstruction.

Remedy:

1.
•
•
•
•
•
•

Check the load on the CR Motor.
Running load of CR Motor (check by manual operation)
Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω)
Damage to or wear in the CR Driven Pulley
Damaged or worn bearing of the CR Unit
Flaws in the CR Rail caused by roller running
Tension of the steel belt
Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

• Replace the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY (p.182).
• Replace the Pump Motor ASSY (p.200).

NOTE: Refer to “Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence” (p.107).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

140

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.16 PF motor PWM output faulty (00010010)

3.2.4.17 Head driver (TG) temperature error (0001001B)

Explanation:

There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows during
PF Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.
This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which does not
reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon 00010001 in the paper feed
drive system has occurred and the running speed of the motor has been detected to
be too low, so that the current is increased to raise the running speed of the motor.
Thus, this message appears to prevent the PF Motor from being overheated.

During printing operation, there may be a case where the temperature inside the
print head has risen above the specified value and the thermistor in the print head
detects it as abnormal temperature. In such a case, this message is displayed and
the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
• Head broken down.
• Faulty contact of tape electric wire, broken wire or wire out of position.

Remedy:

Cause of trouble:

• A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept

applied).

• Paper feed related mechanism out of step.

Remedy/Points to be checked:

Turn off the power to the printer once and turn it on again and check for
recovery.
If the same error occurs immediately or in a short time, replace the print head
with a new one.

Check the load on the PF Motor.
• Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
• Running load of PF Motor (check by manual operation)
• Rotation load of PF Roller
2. Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
3. Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

141

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.18 CR servo parameter error (0001001D)

3.2.4.19 PF servo parameter error (0001001E)

Explanation:

There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is about to be
applied to the CR Motor. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.

Cause of trouble:

• A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept

applied).
• Carriage related mechanism out of step or carriage bumped.

• Paper feed related mechanism out of step.

applied).

Points to be checked:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is about to be
applied to the PF Motor. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.

Points to be checked:

The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other
foreign matters.
The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu.
All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.

Remedy:

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

Remedy:

• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).

• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
• Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186).

(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))

(Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272))

• Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).

• Replace the PF Motor (p.185).

(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))

(Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264))

• Make the mechanism adjustment for the carriage-related mechanism.
• Remove the foreign matters.

Troubleshooting

The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu.
All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.

• Clear the cause of paper feed related mechanism out-of-step.

Error Display

142

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.20 CSIC reed/right error (00010020)

3.2.4.21 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) (00010022)

Explanation:

Cause of trouble:

At turning on or off the power, at opening or closing the I/C Cover or at
completion of one-page printing, there may be a case where it is impossible to read
the data from the CSIC of the ink cartridge or write the latest ink information in
the CSIC. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

• An ink type other than dye/pigment has been set.
• “Ink type: neutral” setting with “CSIC detection: OFF” setting.

Remedy:
• Install the correct cartridge.
• With the ink lever released, set “ink type” in “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70).

Cause of trouble:
Read/write for CSIC (ink cartridge) is impossible.

NOTE: If setting is performed with the ink lever in the set position,
initialization will start again and the service call error will
occur again.

Remedy:
• Faulty contact with the CSIC

•
•
•
•
•
•

(Deformation of the CSIC contact connector / Replace the Holder Assembly
IC.)
Defective CSIC Board (Replace the ink cartridge.)
Replace the CSIC Board (ink cartridge).
Tape electric wire out of position
Replace the supply valve unit. (Faulty contact with the CSIC)
Replace the C472_SUB-B Board (p.192).
Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.22 RTC analysis error (00010023)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the absolute time data stored on NVRAM indicates an
impossible date or hour. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
Various values of the absolute time data stored in NVRAM are abnormal.

Remedy:
Initialize RTC (p.83)
1.

With the paper set lever in the up position, start “Maintenance Mode 2”
(p.70).
(Power OFF→ [Paper Source] + [Cut/Eject] + [Paper Feed ∇] → Power ON)
2. Input a date and hour in “Initialize RTC” in the counter initialize menu and
turn off the power.
(“CLEAR COUNTERS”→ “RTC”)
Remove the lithium battery once and install it again.
Replace the lithium battery with a new one.
Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

143

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.23 CSIC ROM communication error (00010025)

3.2.4.26 Unidentified NMI (00010029)

Explanation:

Cause of trouble:

Only when the starter cartridge is used, there may be a case where an error occurs
in communication with the CSIC and Main Board. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.

CPU has detected undefined NMI.

Remedy:
If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on again,
replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Cause of trouble:
Faulty contact of ink cartridge
(Only with the starter cartridge or with individual cartridges for which writing has
been performed by the factory setting command.)

Remedy:

3.2.4.27 CR ASIC ECU error (0001002A)
Cause of trouble:

Make sure that the ink cartridge is connected properly.

Faulty firmware or damaged drive circuit board

Remedy:
• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.24 RTC communication error (00010026)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the RTC circuit on the Main Board operates
incorrectly. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.

3.2.4.28 PF ASIC ECU error (0001002B)
Cause of trouble:

Cause of trouble:
The RTC on the circuit board is operating abnormally (operating in test mode).

Remedy:
1.
2.
3.

Remove the battery once with the power turned off and after waiting for a
while, install the battery again and turn the power on.
Repeat step 1 above until this error does not occur at power-on.
After making certain that the error does not occur, set the date and hour for the
RTC by Initialize RTC (p.83) in “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70) or by booting
the printer in the normal mode and sending the timer IC value change
command of the factory setting commands.

3.2.4.25 Head error (00010028)
Cause of trouble:

Faulty firmware or damaged drive circuit board

Remedy:
• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.29 NVRAM error (00020000)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the parameter data in NVRAM is broken. In such a
case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
NVRAM erase error or write error (Check in 2 bytes)

Remedy:

The head is damaged.

• Download the parameter data from another model.

(However, make the necessary adjustments.)

Remedy:

• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

• Replace the Print Head (p.171).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

144

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.2.4.30 SDRAM error (00020002)

3.2.4.32 Flash memory SUM error (00020009)

Explanation:

In memory check of SDRAM executed at power on, there may be a case where a
bit error is detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.

Cause of trouble:

This error is displayed when the firmware has not been installed in flash memory
or when the firmware has not been installed successfully.

Cause of trouble:
SUM check error for program area.

SDRAM check error at power-on.

Remedy:

• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.31 BOOT program SUM error (00020003)

3.2.4.33 Program load error (0002000A)

Explanation:

Cause of trouble:

There may be a case where the boot program of firmware is broken. In such a case,
this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. (Only at power on)

Cause of trouble:

SUM check error for program area on RAM.

Remedy:
• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

SUM check error for BOOT program area.

Remedy:
• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.34 Internal memory shortage error (0002000B)
Explanation:
This error appears when the cash area is insufficient. There may be a case where
the assigned work area varies with the I/F mode and I/F mode setting does not
agree or decoding of a command is impossible. Then the work area is consumed
up, thus memory runs short. In such a case, this message is displayed and the
printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
Faulty program.

Remedy:
• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Check I/F mode.
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Troubleshooting

Error Display

145

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Remedy:

3.2.4.35 Review error (0002000C)

• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

Explanation:
There may be a case where the combination of the DIP Switch setting positions on
the Main Board is not supported by the firmware. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.

Cause of trouble:
Driver circuit board review and the state of the DIP switch are not consistent with
the program version.

3.2.4.39 CPU slot illegal command exception error (100001A0)
Cause of trouble:
Faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error.

Remedy:
Check driver circuit board review and state of DIP switch.
Check the DIP Switch setting. (See p.209)

Remedy:

3.2.4.36 CPU address error (load misalignment)

3.2.4.40 CPU DMA address error (100005C0)

• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

(100000E0)

Cause of trouble:

Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.

Remedy:

• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.37 CPU address error (storage misalignment) (10000100)

3.2.4.41 CPU error (10000xxx)

Cause of trouble:

Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.

Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.

Remedy:

• Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
• Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).

3.2.4.38 CPU reserve command code exception error (10000180)
Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.

Troubleshooting

Error Display

146

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout

The actions above do not work to recover the printer, check the following points:
If trouble occurs in all the ink colors:

This section describes conceivable print quality problems that may occur with this
printer and the troubleshooting points for those errors.

•
•
•
•

Table 3-29. Diagnosing trouble based on printout
Item

Description

Refer to

Dot missing

p.147

Uneven printing/poor resolution

p.148

Smudged or marred printout on front side

p.148

Smudged or marred printout on reverse side

p.149

White/black banding

p.149

•
•

•

3.3.1 Dot Missing
If the printer is kept for a long time without being used, the viscosity of the ink on the
nozzle surfaces of the print heads, and in the nozzles themselves, increases, and may
cause skipping of dots during printing. In such cases, execute Power cleaning (p.60) in
SelecType mode first (execute several times). If normal printing is not recovered even
after this power cleaning, check the following particulars.

Execute powerful cleaning of the ink head.
1.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Execute Initial filling (p.259) or [KK2] cleaning.
Execute “Initial charge or [KK2]” in the Cleaning (p.259) menu of Selfdiagnostic Function (p.220).
(Power OFF→[Paper Feed ∆]+[Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→Power ON) → “Cleaning” → “Init.Fill”
Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.45)
Execute “Nozzle Check Pattern Printing” in the SelecType menu.
([SelecType] → “TEST PRINT MENU” → “NOZZLE CHECK”)

•

•
•
•

Are the print heads and cap assemblies sealed during ink filling?
If the cap assembly / pump tubes have come off.
If the life of the cleaning unit has expired.
If the gear train between the pump motor and pump unit has been assembled
improperly.
If the cap assembly has failed.
(The tension spring has come off, the cap rubber is damaged, etc.)
If the pump unit has failed.
(The tubes are crushed, etc.)
If the trouble occurs with a specific ink color:
Abnormal connections between the ink cartridge, ink holder, tube, damper,
print head.
(Fastening nuts loose, or the O-ring deformed or damaged, causing ink to
leak, etc. could occur.)
Print head failure
If the trouble still has not been recovered from with the items up to this point,
replace the following electric system related parts and check again.
Check the connections to the CR cable (FFC long) and if there is any damage
to it or not.
Check the connections to the head cables (FFC short; x 2), and if there is any
damage to them or not.
MAIN Board

C A U T IO N

If you replace the MAIN board or the print heads, the

In initial filling, a large amount of ink will be discharged into the
Maintenance Tank. Therefore, check the counter indication
(remaining value) beforehand. (If deemed necessary, prepare
another Maintenance Tank as a spare.)

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout

connection state of the connection cables (FFC) should be
checked. Particularly in cases where the connector is inserted
at a slant, etc., when the power is turned on, it could cause
destruction of the circuit and the insides of the heads, so
sufficient caution should be exercised.

147

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.3.2 Uneven Printing/Poor Resolution

3.3.3 Smudged or Marred Printout (Front)

If the print quality is abnormal (uneven printing, diffused image, etc.), the following
items should be checked.

If smudging or marring occurs due to rubbing by the head, etc. on the paper's printed
surface, check the following items.

Adjust the gap
In the SelecType (p.35) or the Self-diagnostic Function (p.220) menu, carry out
gap adjustment (“Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) (p.60)”
and “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) (p.248)”).

If the trouble occurs only when the user is using a specific type of paper (thick
paper), carry out “User Paper Setting” using the panel setting procedure.
(By setting the information concerning the thickness of the paper the user is using
and correcting the print position (correction of changes in the position where ink
hits the paper surface due to differences in paper thickness), avoid influencing the
print position.)

If smudging is occurring at the front end of the roll paper or at the rear end, widen
the margins at the front end and rear end. (Set the “Roll Paper Margin” front end
and rear end on “15 mm”.)
(If high duty printing was done close to the front end and rear end (margin = 3
mm), the paper will contain a large amount of ink and deformation of the paper
will be accelerated, and depending on the case, the paper will touch the heads.)

If paper with weak edges which cannot move smoothly along the paper path is
being used, Select “NORM” for “SUCTION” in the “PAPER CONFIG. MENU”,
which is in the “Panel Settings”.

If there is rubbing and smudging due to slow drying in printing of user paper.

If the this problem occurs after replacing the Main Board with a new one:

Set the stand basket paper Eject direction on Front.
In the item “DRYING TIME” in the User Paper Setting Menu”, in “Panel

• Transfer the backup parameters on the old Main Board to the new board.

(p.219)

Settings,” set the drying time (the time until auto paper cutting is carried out
after printing is finished. (Default: 0 second; Maximum: 10 seconds)

• Execute “Write D/A Correction Values” in the diagnostic mode.(p.236)

If the printer's condition is not improved by the above items (adjustments), check
the following items using the self-diagnostic function.

Head Slant Checking (p.246)
C H E C K
P O IN T

Once you have made the “Head Slant Adjustment”, be sure to make
the “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)
(p.248)” and “Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D
Adjustment)” (p.60).

Troubleshooting

If the trouble cannot be resolved by the above methods, check the following.

The cap assembly / tension spring is off.
(If this spring comes off, cap will collect inside the cap and ink that adheres
around the head nozzle surface ends up adhering to the paper.
Check to see if dust containing ink, foreign matters or paper is adhering to the
side surface of the head.

Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout

148

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.3.4 Smudged or Marred Printout (Reverse side)
If smudging or marring of the paper back surface with ink occurs, the following items
should be checked.
1.

Check to see if there isn't ink adhering to the paper feed path. If there is ink
adhering, it should be wiped off.

3.3.5 White or Black Banding in the carriage running
direction
If white or black banding (uneven density) in parallel with the carriage running
direction appears on your printout, check the following points:
1.

Sub-platen A/B Surface
Grid roller surface
Paper guide L surface
Paper guide L2 surface

Dot missing
Head ID setting value

One likely cause of ink adhering to the above parts is the following cause.

If dot missing is found, execute head cleaning. (If deemed necessary, select and
execute “Power cleaning (p.60)” in the SelecType mode or “Cleaning (p.259)” by
self-diagnostic function.)If the Head ID value is wrong, set the correct value.

Paper feeding at a slant during printing (at the point when 1 page is finished)
The ink absorbing sponge for “borderless printing” is deformed or swelling.
C A U T IO N

If the Paper Skew Detection setting is off in “Printer Settings” →
“Panel Setting Menu” → “Paper Width Detection,” if the user's
paper size setting is not correct, the surface of the platen will be
printed.

Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.45)
Select “Adj: Check Nozzle” in the Adjustment (p.230) menu by the self-diagnostic
function.
Check the following points:

Adjustment
If dot missing is not found, perform the following adjustments and check for
improvement:

Paper feed correction (driver)
Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment) (p.247)
If each line of nozzles in the head is perpendicular to the carriage running
direction correctly, the raster lines printed with nozzles can overlap or be
dislocated, so that black banding (uneven density) or white banding (blank
spaces between raster lines) may occur.
If the adjustments above do not work enough to improve the quality, try to improve by
executing Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment (p.239) by the self-diagnostic
function.

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout

149

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

3.3.6 Banding in the paper feed direction
If banding (uneven density, rough image) in parallel with the paper feed direction is
found on the print, perform the following adjustment:

Bi-D adjustment:
The Bi-D adjustment can be executed by any of the following methods.

“Gap Adjustment” in the panel setting menu
Adjustment by printer driver
If the adjustment above does not work to improve the print quality, you may improve it
by adjusting the “Paper thickness” setting value (± 0.1 ~ 0.2 mm) in “User Paper
Setting Menu” of the panel setting menu.

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout

150

CHAPTER

DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.1 Summary

W A R N IN G

This Chapter describes the disassembly and reassembly procedure chiefly for Stylus
Pro 7600, with descriptions added to particulars specific to Stylus Pro 9600.
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by
reversing the disassembly procedure.
Things, if not strictly observed, that could result in injury or loss of life are described
under the heading “Warning”.
Precautions for any disassembly or assembly procedures are described under the
heading “CAUTION”.
Chips for disassembling procedures are described under the heading “CHECK
POINT”.
If the assembling procedure is different from the reversed procedure of the
disassembling, the procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”.
Any adjustments required after disassembling the units are described under the heading
“ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”. Be sure to make the specified adjustments by
referring to Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT”.
When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer
to the exploded diagrams in the appendix.

4.1.1 Precautions
Before proceeding with any disassembly or assembly work, make absolutely sure of
the following.

Disassembly & Assembly

Summary

The power switch for Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is incorporated in
the secondary circuit of the power supply circuit. Therefore, the
printer is always supplied with electric power, unless the power
cable is disconnected. Before servicing, unless otherwise stated,
be sure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to
prevent injury, burn, and electric shocks or damage to the
circuit. In doing so, be sure to turn the printer off and wait
several seconds first and then unplug the power cord. If you
must keep the power supplied to measure voltage, be aware of
the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks with the most
care.
With the front cover open, the cover sensor stops the operation
of the CR motor and PF motor. To ensure safety, you are
prohibited from disabling this interlock function.
A lithium battery for memory backup is installed on the main
circuit board of Stylus Pro 7600/9600. To prevent accidents
caused by the battery, never fail to observe the following
instructions when serving the main circuit board:
• Keep the battery away from any metal or other batteries so
that electrodes of the opposite polarity do not come in
contact with each other.
• Do not solder on any part of the battery. (Doing so may result
in leakage of electrolyte from the battery, burning or
explosion. The leakage may affect other devices close to the
battery.)
• Do not charge the battery. (This may cause burning or
explosion.)
• Do not dismantle the battery. (The gas inside the battery may
hurt your throat. Leakage, burning or explosion may also be
caused.)
• Do not short-circuit the terminals of the battery. Do not put
the battery on a conductive table in such a way that the
terminal face comes in contact with the table.
• Do not remove and install the battery. Do not install the
battery in the wrong direction.
• Do not heat the battery or put it near fire.

152

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

W A R N IN G

Revision A

Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacture. Dispose the used batteries according to
government's law and regulations.
Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes from ink. If ink
gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a doctor
immediately.
Wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands from the sharp
edge in the printer mechanism.
If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap
and water. If irritation occurs, contact a physician.

C A U T IO N

Before servicing or performing maintenance on the printer,

W A R N IN G

Avant de commencer, assurez vous que l'imprimante soit

eteinte et que le cordon d'alimentation soit debranche.

Lorsque vous changez la pile au lithium, assurez vous que la

nouvelle respecte bien les caracteristiques requises.

Lorque que vous installez la pile au lithium, faites attention a
l'inserer dans le bon sens en respectant la polarite.
Veillez a jeter les piles usagees selon le reglement local.
Ne rechargez pas les piles au lithium.

C A U T IO N

Risque d’explosion si la pile est remplacée incorrectment. Ne
remplacer que par une pile du même type ou d’un type équivalent
recommandé par le fabricant. Eliminer les piles déchargées selon
les lois et les règles de sécurité en vigueur.

Disassembly & Assembly

Summary

make sure you have enough space. If you need to move the
printer, make sure the space you move to is safe.
Because the printer is much heavier than most printers you
need to take extra care. If you need to take apart the printer
and the stand from each other or put then together, two people
are necessary.
If you remove and replace any parts of the ink path system, be
sure to discharge the ink beforehand by executing “Ink
Blowing” in “Clean Head” process.
Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”.
After removing any of the ink related parts, double check to
make sure all parts are secured; otherwise you're going to be in
big trouble.
Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or
adjusting the printer.
Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
Ink may leak onto other printer parts or the printer basket
when removing printer parts, so it is recommended to put a
sheet or cloth under the printer, especially when working on or
near ink-related parts.
When working on the electrical circuit boards, be careful
concerning static electricity which can cause damage to the
board. It is recommended you use an anti-static wrist band or
similar grounding device to prevent static electricity buildup.
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 uses many FFCs (Flexible Flat Cables).
Improper connection, such as slanting insertion, of an FFC can
cause a short circuit resulting in broken elements on the circuit
board. Be sure to connect the FFCs to the connectors properly
with great care.

153

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

C A U T IO N

Revision A

In reassembly, place the wiring of electric parts in specified

Top

positions. (If wiring is located in places other than specified,
cables can come in contact with a sharp edge or the anti-noise
margin may lessen.)
As necessary, if you remove each cover and operate the printer,
care should be taken not to get injured by the operation of the
drive system units.
The cutter blade is extremely sharp, so care should be taken
not to injure yourself when handling it.
An ultra-hardened blade is used for the cutter blade, and
physically, it is extremely brittle material, so care should be
taken not to bump it against any of the metal parts of the
printer, etc. and damage it.
When performing service operations on items which are
controlled as after service parts but which no procedures have
been provided for, the state of the parts should be observed
closely before beginning the operation to get a thorough idea of
how to proceed.
If you have to loosen a screw that has blue screw-lock applied
to its head, make sure you apply blue screw-lock again when
reassembling.

Rear

Front
R

Bottom

Figure 4-1. Directional View of the Printer

Disassembly & Assembly

Summary

154

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.1.2 Tools

4.1.3 Screw List

This section lists the tools necessary to disassemble or assemble the printer.

The following table lists all the screws used in this printer.

Table 4-1. Necessary Tools
Tool
(+) Phillips screwdriver #2
(+) Phillips screwdriver #1

Table 4-2. Screws

Part Code
Commonly available
tools, no special tools
necessary

Notes

Type

longer than 250mm is
helpful

Color

Description

CB M3×6

White

(+) Bind

CBP M3×6

Silver

(+) Bind P-tight

CBP M4×10

Black

(+) Bind P-tight

(-) Standard screwdriver

CBS M3×10

White

(+) Bind S-tight

Round-nosed pliers

CBS M4×6

White

(+) Bind S-tight

Tweezers

CBS M2×8

White

(+) Bind S-tight

CBS M3×6

White

(+) Bind S-tight

CBS M4×8

White

(+) Bind S-tight

CBS M3×10

White

(+) Bind S-tight

CUPS M3×6

White

(+) Cup S-tight

CUPS M4×6

White

(+) Cup S-tight

CUPS M4×8

White

(+) Cup S-tight

CPP M3×8

White

(+) Cup P-tight

CPS M3×12

White

(+) Crosshead Pan S-tight

CP M3×6

White

(+) Crosshead Pan

CP(W) M2×12

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

#E 589 Torque Wrench
(6 mm x 1.0 kg)
or
#f760 Torque Wrench
Hex Wrench

B765106901
1059914

For tube coupling screws.

Part with Exclusive
Stand (Commercially
available part)

5.5 mm

PF Loop Scale ASSY Assembly tool

1051765

Exclusive tool No. #f730

PF Loop Scale Attachment tool

1051767

Exclusive tool No. #731

Ink Cartridge*2
Draining cartridge*2
Maintenance Tank*2
PF_ENC
CR_ENC
Cutter
Note *1:
*2:

CP(W) M2×8

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

CP(W) M3×6

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

CP(W) M3×8

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

CP(W) M3×25

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

This hex wrench is necessary only when removing the stand (feet).

CP(W) M4×8

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

7 of these cartridges are necessary for one operation.

CP(W) M4×10

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

Disassembly & Assembly

Summary

CP(W) M4×40

Silver

(+) Crosshead Pan, washer

Flush head screw M3×6

White

(+) Flush head

Truss screw M4×6

White

(+) Truss screw

Toothed washer M3

White

Outer teeth

Toothed washer M4

White

Outer teeth

155

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.1.4 Disassembly Flow
Refer to Figure 4-2 when determining the disassembly flow.

C A U T IO N

This printer has been assembled with high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
Therefore, you are prohibited to disassemble the frames or some
specific parts. Permission of disassembly and assembly or removal
and installation is limited to the parts provided with a parts number
in the ASP List in Chapter 7. (If any parts other than specified are
disassembled or removed, there may be a case you can not repair
the printer except at the factory.)

Disassembly & Assembly

Summary

156

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.1 Panel Unit (p.159)
4.2.3 L Side Cover (p.163)

4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover (p.169)

4.2.9 Front Cover (p.170)

4.2.2 R Side Cover (p.160)
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 (p.168)

4.2.4 I/H Cover (p.164)

4.2.6 Rear Cover (p.166)
4.2.5 H Top Cover (p.165)

4.3.1 Print Head (p.171)
4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197)

4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY
(p.183)

4.3.2 Damper ASSY (p.173)
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board (p.192)

4.4.1 PF Motor (p.185)

4.7.1 Power Supply Board (p.205)

4.3.3 CR Board ASSY (p.174)

4.7.2 AC Inlet (p.206)

4.3.4 Cutter Section (p.175)

4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207)

4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY (p.175)
4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186)
4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale (p.187)

4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY (p.193)
Release Sensor (I/H Lever) (p.193)
CSIC Relay Board (p.193)

4.4.4 Suction Fans (p.189)

4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid (p.177)

4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178)

4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY (p204)

4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179)

4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal (p.199)
4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY (p.200)

4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY (p.180)
4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY (p.182)

4.6.3 Cap ASSY (p.200)
4.6.4 Pump ASSY (p.201)
4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) (p.203)

4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence)
(p.184)

4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing (p.158)

4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3
ASSY (p.190)

4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism (p.185)

4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191)
Note: The italic bold characters represent
consumables or regular replacement parts.

4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.171)

4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism (p.192)
4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism (p.198)
4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards (p.205)

Figure 4-2. Disassembly Process Flowchart

Disassembly & Assembly

Summary

157

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing
This sections describes the removal procedure for printer housing parts. See below for
an illustration of the housing parts.

4.2.5 H Top Cover (p.165)
4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover (p.169)

4.2.3 L Side Cover (p.163)

4.2.2 R Side Cover (p.160)

4.2.4 I/H Cover (p.164)
4.2.9 Front Cover (p.170)
Paper Set Lever
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 (p.168)
4.2.1 Panel Unit (p.159)

Figure 4-3. Housing Part Diagram

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

158

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.1 Panel Unit
1.

Release the clips on both sides of the control panel unit and pull slightly away from the
R Side Cover.
(See Figure 4-4)

Remove the FFC cable from the connector and hook.
(See Figure 4-5)

Panel Unit
Lock

Make sure that the Panel FFC does not get twisted round the
carriage driven pulley inside the printer.
Push

Push

Figure 4-4. Panel Unit Removal 1/2
Panel Unit (back side)

Connector

Clip

Hook

Clip

FFC

Figure 4-5. Panel Unit Removal 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

159

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.2 R Side Cover

Lever Blind Cap

Remove the Panel Unit. (p.159)

Push back the Paper Set Lever to the released position.(See Figure 4-6)

Remove two black screws (CBP: M4×10) from the lever handle, and remove the
handle.

Using a (-) driver or similar tool, remove the lever blind cap.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Paper Set Lever

Take care not to drop the lever blind cap into the printer.

Black screws (CBP: M4×10) ×2

Open the roll paper cover. (See Figure 4-7)

Remove the one black screw (CBP: M4×10) from inside the printer.

Adjust the height of the Paper Set Lever by means of the black
screws so that the Paper Set Lever does not come in contact with the
Lever Blind Cap.

Figure 4-6. R Side Cover Removal 1/5
Roll Paper Cover

Black screws (CBP: M4×10)

Figure 4-7. R Side Cover Removal 2/5

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

160

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
7.

From the rear side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8).

From the right side remove two screws (CUPS: M4×8).

Remove the Maintenance Tank.

Revision A

Screw (CUPS: M4×8)

Screws (CUPS: M4×8) ×2

Maintenance Tank

Figure 4-8. R Side Cover Removal 3/5

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

161

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

10. Open the Front Cover. (See Figure 4-9)
11. Remove one black screw (CBP: M4×10).
12. Bring down the Paper Set Lever to the front. (See Figure 4-10)
13. Remove the R Side Cover by lifting it outward.
Black screw (CBP: M4×10)

In installing the R Side Cover, install the Lever Blind Cap before
tightening the screws.
If you have dropped the Lever Blind Cap into the printer body,
remove the R Side Cover from the printer body and take out the
Lever Blind Cap.

Front Cover

Figure 4-9. R Side Cover Removal 4/5

Paper Set Lever

Figure 4-10. R Side Cover Removal 5/5

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

162

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.3 L Side Cover
1.

Open the roll paper cover. (See Figure 4-11)

Remove the one black screw (CBP: M4×10) inside the printer.

From the back side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8).
(See Figure 4-12)

From the outside, remove two screws (CUPS: M4×8).

Remove the L side cover.

Roll Parer Cover

Black screw (CBP: M4×10)

Figure 4-11. L Side Cover Removal 1/2

Screw (CUPS: M4×10)

Screws (CUPS: M4×10) ×2

Figure 4-12. L Side Cover Removal 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

163

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.4 I/H Cover
1.

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Open the I/H Cover Lid.

Remove one black screw (M3×6), then remove the lever cap.(See Figure 4-13)

Remove two screws (CBS: M3×10), then remove the I/H Cover and I/H Cover Lid.
(See Figure 4-13)

C H E C K
P O IN T

Lever Cap
Black screw

For easy removal and installation of the I/H Cover, set the I/H
Lever in the raised (Release) position.

I/H Lever

Screws (CBS: M3×10) ×2

I/H Cover Lid

Release

Figure 4-13. I/H Cover Removal

Lock

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

164

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.5 H Top Cover
Screws (CUPS: M4×8) ×2

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Open the Front Cover.

From the left side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8).
(See Figure 4-14)

Remove the screw (CUPS: M4×8) at the front left of the printer.

Remove the screw (CUPS: M4×8) at the front right of the printer.

From the right side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8).
(See Figure 4-15)

To avoid damaging the P_THICK Sensor or P_THICK_0.3 Sensor, bring down the
Paper Set Lever toward you (to the paper holding position).

Screw (CUPS: M4×8)

10. Pull up the H Top Cover rearward and remove it.
In doing so, take care not to lose the plate which is also locked with the front left
screw.

C A U T IO N

Figure 4-14. H Top Cover Removal on left side
Screw (CUPS: M4×8)

When removing the H Top Cover, care should be taken not to
damage the P_THICK Sensor and P_THICK Sensor_0.3. To avoid
damaging them, bring down the Paper Set Lever toward you (to the
paper holding position) first and shift the H Top Cover rearward in
an oblique direction for its removal.
Screw (CUPS: M4×8)

Plate

Figure 4-15. H Top Cover Removal on right side

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

165

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.6 Rear Cover

Screws (CPS: M3×12) ×2

From the rear side, remove two screws (CPS: M3×12), and remove the blank panel.
(See Figure 4-16)

Remove the two screws (CP: M3×6) securing the parallel interface and remove the one
screw (CBS: M3×6) securing the USB interface.

Remove one screw (CBS: M3×6) holding the AC inlet top. (See Figure 4-17)

Remove the three screws (CBS: M4×8) (six screws for Stylus Pro 9600) holding the
rear cover bottom.

Open the Roll Paper Cover.

Remove the three screws (CBS: M4×8) (six screws for Stylus Pro 9600) holding the
rear cover top, then remove the rear cover, while pulling it rearward.

Blank Panel

Screws (CPS: M3×6) ×2
Screw (CPS: M3×6)

C A U T IO N

To avoid getting hurt with sharp frame edges, be sure to wear
gloves when performing the following work:
Removing and installing the Rear Cover
Inserting your hand through the opening in the Access Cover
(see Check Point on the next page)

Figure 4-16. Rear Cover Removal 1/2

Screw (CPS: M3×6)
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×3

Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×3

Figure 4-17. Rear Cover Removal 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

166

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

C H E C K
P O IN T

Revision A

Removing the Access Cover
For disconnecting connectors for various units from the Main
Board Assy, it is not always necessary to remove the Rear Cover.
Remove the Access Cover, and you will be allowed to do almost all
such work.

Loosen the screw
Main Board

Access Cover
Remove the screw

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

167

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.7 Paper Guide L2
1.

From the front, remove four screws (Truss: M4×6).
(See Figure 4-18)

Remove the Paper Guide L2.

Install the Paper Guide L2 so that all its projections are fit in the
notches of the Paper Guide L properly. (See Figure 4-19)
Number of notches:
Stylus Pro 7600: 5
Stylus Pro 9600: 8

Screws (Truss: M4×6) ×2
Screws (Truss: M4×6) ×2

Figure 4-18. Paper Guide L2 Removal

Paper Guide L

Notch

Cushion tape
Projection

Paper Guide L2

Figure 4-19. Paper Guide L2 Installation

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

168

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×2

Open the Roll Paper Cover. (See Figure 4-20)

Remove two screws (CPS: M4×8) securing the black spindle support (Spindle Support
L) on the left, and then remove the spindle support.

Remove the two screws (CPS: M4×8) and one screw (M4×12)securing the gray
spindle support (Spindle Support R) on the right, and then remove the spindle support.
(See Figure 4-20)

When installing the white spindle support (Spindle Support R),
install the transparent washer, wave washer and printer body
frame on the outside of the Roll Paper Cover in the named order.

Spindle Support L

Roll Paper Cover

Transparent washer

Figure 4-20. Roll Paper Cover removal
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×2

Wave washer

Spindle Support R
Screw (M4×12)

Figure 4-21. Roll Paper Cover removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

169

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.2.9 Front Cover

Hooks

Open the Front Cover.

Push in the two hooks to the left of the cover and remove the Front Cover Support.
(See Figure 4-22)

Release the Front Cover Spring L from the Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft on the left
side of the Front Cover. (See Figure 4-23)

Remove the Plastic Stop Wheel E5 on the left side of the Front Cover and move the
Front Cover Fulcrum Pin outward for its removal.

Release the Front Cover Spring R from the Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft on the right
side of the Front Cover.

Remove the Front Cover from the Front Cover Fulcrum Pin R.

Front Cover Support

Front Cover

Install the Plastic Stop Wheels in the correct orientations,
respectively.

Figure 4-22. Front Cover Support Removal

Front Cover
Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft
Plastic Stop Wheel E5

Long

E-ring

Front Cover Fulcrum Pin R

Short

Front Cover Fulcrum Pin L

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

Front Cover Spring R

The cover switch holder installation position should be checked so
that the cover sensor ASSY is linked to the front cover when it
opens and closes.
Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216)

Front Cover Spring L
Plastic Stop Wheel E

Front Cover

Front Cover Fulcrum Pin L

Figure 4-23. Front Cover Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Removing the Panel Unit and Housing

170

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR)
Mechanism
4.3.1 Print Head
C A U T IO N

C H E C K
P O IN T

When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.

Push

When replacing the print head with a new one, execute ink
discharge (“Ink Blowing” on page 256) beforehand.
Cutter area

Execute ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from all the ink passages.

While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center. (See Figure 4-24)

Loosen the one screw (CP(W): M3×6) securing the front end of the damper holder and
separate the Damper Unit from the print head. (See Figure 4-25)
C H E C K
P O IN T

Move the carriage

Figure 4-24. Carriage Lock Release

When removing the head, hang the hook of the Damper Unit in the
hole of the bottom plate of the CR Board Assy so that work will not
be obstructed by the Damper Unit.
In addition, for easier work, you are advised to lift with Scotch tape
to such a degree that no significant load is applied to the ink tubes.

There is a hook 2 cm high at the center of the head. Install the
Damper Unit with care not to hit it against the hook.
When installing the Damper Unit, before tightening the screw,
press the lower area of the Damper with your fingers so that it
comes in close contact with the print head.

Loosen the screw (CP(W): M3×6)

Damper Unit

Figure 4-25. Damper Holder Loosening

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

171

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Loosen the left screw for the Head Holder, remove the right screw (M3×6) and release
the Head Holder downward.(See Figure 4-26)

Take out the head by lifting its inner side and release the 2 FFCs. (See Figure 4-27)
Loosen the screw

Take care not to touch the nozzle side of the print head to be
installed and not to let dust or dirt adhere to the nozzles.

When installing the carriage, take care not to scratch the nozzle

Screw (M3×6)

side.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

When replacing the print head, the following adjustment
procedures are required.
Refer to “5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment” (p.212)

Head Holder

Figure 4-26. Head Holder Release

Print Head

Figure 4-27. Head Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

172

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.2 Damper ASSY
Execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) before removing the
Damper ASSY.
Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”.

C H E C K
P O IN T

C A U T IO N

If you press on the transparent film on the damper's right side
surface with your fingers, the ink with which the inside is filled
will be expelled, so do not press on this part.
The transparent film on the damper's side is delicate, so be
careful not to damage it while working.

Execute ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from all the ink passages.

While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center. (See Figure 4-24)

Loosen the one screw (CP(W): M3×6) securing the front end of the damper holder and
separate the Damper Unit from the print head. (See Figure 4-25)

Disengage the three hooks of the Damper Holder and remove the Damper Holder.
(See Figure 4-28)

Pull out the relevant Damper ASSY from the Damper Holder, loosen the coupling
screw and separate the Damper ASSY from the ink tube. (See Figure 4-29)

Damper Holder
Hooks (3 positions)

Figure 4-28. Damper Holder Removal

Coupling screw

NOTE: Take care not to lose the O-ring inside the coupling screw.

Damper ASSY
Damper Holder

Figure 4-29. Damper ASSY Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

173

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.3 CR Board ASSY
Screws (M3×16)

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Remove one screw (CPP M3×6), two screws (CP(W): M3×6) and one screw (M3×16)
securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3),
and remove the CR Board Guide.
(See Figure 4-30)

Disconnect the following eight connectors (with lock) connected to the CR Board.
(See Figure 4-31)

Screw (CPP: M3×6)

Screws (CP(W): M3×6) ×2

CR Board Guide Plate

Figure 4-30. CR Board Guide Removal

Table 4-3. Connectors on CR Board
Connector Type

Connected to

5-Pin (white)

CR Encoder Sensor

4-Pin (black)

P_EDGE Sensor

2-Pin (white)

Cutter Solenoid

FFC (lock type)×2

Print Head

FFC (lock type)×3

Main Board

Remove the two screws (CPP: M3×8) securing the CR Board ASSY and remove the
CR Board ASSY. (See Figure 4-32)
The screw on the far left side used to fasten the CR board guide
plate should be tightened together with the ground wire, toothed
washer, CR board guide and CR board ASSY, in that order.

C A U T IO N

When connecting an FFC, take great care not to insert it aslant.
(Inserting aslant can cause a short circuit of signals, thus resulting
in broken circuit elements.)

Figure 4-31. CR Board Connectors Disconnection

Screws (CPP: M3×8) ×2

Figure 4-32. CR Board Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

174

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.4 Cutter Section
4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY
C A U T IO N

When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center. (See Figure 4-24)

Remove one screw (CPPM3×6) securing the CR Board Guide, and remove three
screws (CP(W): M3×6) securing the ground line, washer (M3), and CR Board Guide.
(See Figure 4-30)

Disconnect the following three connectors on the CR Board. (See Figure 4-31)
Connector Type

Connected to

5-Pin (white)

CR Encoder Sensor

4-Pin (black)

P_EDGE Sensor

2-Pin (white)

Cutter Solenoid

Screws (CP(W): M3×8) ×4

Cutter Holder ASSY

Figure 4-33. Removing the Cutter Housing
Key engaged with carriage

Remove the four screws (CP(W): M3×8) securing the Cutter Holder, and while paying
attention to the connector harness connected to the CR Board, remove the Cutter
Holder ASSY from the carriage. (See Figure 4-33)

The cutter cap and the CR lock kicker should be engaged. (If
they are not engaged, the carriage cannot be moved from the
home position to the left when the power switch is turned on.)
(See Figure 4-34)
Figure 4-34. Cutter Holder ASSY (Back: Carriage Side)

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

175

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Take care not to catch the solenoid cable (red) in the cutter cap.
(See Figure 4-35)

When installing the Cutter Holder ASSY, make sure that the
CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) is led through the slit in the
CR Encoder Sensor properly.
CR Encoder Sensor
CR Encoder Scale
(Timing Fence)

Figure 4-35. Take Care When Installing the Cutter Holder

CR Encoder Scale
(Timing Fence)
CR Encoder Sensor

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

After installing the cutter holder ASSY, the following adjustment
should be done.
“5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment
(p.217)”

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

176

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid

CR Lock Kicker

Remove the Cutter Holder ASSY. (p.175)

Release the engagement between the Cutter Cap and the CR Lock Kicker, then remove
the Cutter Cap + Cutter Solenoid Iron Core and Cutter Solenoid Spring.

Take out the two screws (CP(W): M3×6) holding the Cutter Solenoid, then remove the
Cutter Solenoid by pushing it out from the bottom of the Cutter Holder ASSY with the
shaft of a (+) screwdriver or the like.

C A U T IO N

Cutter Cap

Do not pull the cable to remove the Cutter Solenoid.
Cutter Solenoid

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

After installing the Cutter Solenoid, the following adjustment
should be done.
“5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment
(p.217)”

Screws (CP(W): M2.5×5) ×2

Push

Figure 4-36. Cutter Solenoid Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

177

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY
1.

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Disconnect the connector (5-pin, white) for the CR Encoder Sensor from the CR
Board.
C A U T IO N

Connector

If you can not disconnect easily the connector for the CR Encoder
Sensor, do not disconnect it by undue force. Disconnect the two
FFCs for the print head first and then the connector for the CR
Encoder Sensor.

CR Board Unit

Figure 4-37. CR Encoder Sensor Removal 1/2
7.
8.

Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out
the CR Board Unit toward the front. (See Figure 4-37)

Screw (M3×8)
Ground line
Toothed washer (M3)

Remove one screw (CPP: M3×8) securing the CR_ENC ASSY, ground line, and
washer (M3). Then remove the CR_ENC ASSY. (See Figure 4-38)

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

After assembling the CR ENC, the following adjustments should be
made.
“5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)”

CR_ENC ASSY

Ground line

Figure 4-38. CR Encoder Sensor Removal 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

178

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY
1.

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Disconnect the connector (4-pin, black) for the P_EDGE Sensor from the CR Board.
C A U T IO N

If you can not disconnect easily the connector for the P_EDGE
Sensor, do not disconnect it by undue force. Disconnect the two
FFCs for the print head first and then the connector for the
P_EDGE Sensor.

Screws ×2

Connector
CR Board Unit

Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out
the CR Board Unit toward the front. (See Figure 4-39)

Remove the one screw (M3×6) securing the EDGE Sensor Base ASSY and remove the
EDGE Sensor Base ASSY. (See Figure 4-40)

Figure 4-39. Removing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY 1/2

After installing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY on the Cutter Holder
ASSY, fasten the harness to the harness holding path of the Cutter
Holder ASSY.
(See Figure 4-40)
Lead the lead wires in this groove.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

After replacing the P_EDGE Sensor, the following adjustment
operation should be performed.
“P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)”
P_EDGE Sensor Base

Figure 4-40. Removing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

179

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY
This section describes the replacement procedure for the following parts of the CR
Motor ASSY.

CR Timing Belt
Driven Pulley
(Stylus Pro 7600: white / Stylus Pro 9600: black)
Before installing the covers, adjust the indicator position (the right
end of the projection on the CR tension spring support) of the CR
tension bracket to the center by turning the CR Tension Mounting
Shaft.
However, if the indicator was at a off-center position before
assembly, adjust the indicator to the same off-center position. (See
Figure 4-42)
1.

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Release the carriage lock and move the carriage from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)

On the R Side Frame side, remove the CR Tension Mounting Shaft and CR Tension
Spring and the CR Tension Spring Support. (See Figure 4-42)

Slide the CR Tension Bracket to the left (toward the CR Motor), and remove the CR
Timing Belt, together with the Driven Pulley, from the CR Tension Bracket.

Projection (CR tension
spring support)

Adjust the right end to the center

Figure 4-41. Indicator Position
Driven Pulley
CR Tension Spring Support
CR Tension Spring
Remove the CR Tension
Mounting Shaft
Timing Belt

Record scale reading
CR Tension Bracket

Figure 4-42. Loosening the CR Timing Belt

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

180

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Loosen the CR Tension Mounting Shaft on the R Side Frame side, then release the
tension on the CR Timing Belt. (See Figure 4-43)

Disconnect the connector of the CR Motor harness and the relay connector from the
Main Board, unclamp the CR Motor harness and take them out through the hole in the
Left Side Frame.

CR Timing Belt
Connector

10. Remove the timing belt from the CR Motor ASSY pulley on the L Side Frame.
11. Take out the four screws (CP(W): M4×10) holding the CR Motor ASSY, then remove
the CR Motor ASSY.

CR Motor ASSY

Remember that there is a difference in specifications between
the driven pulley (white) of Stylus Pro 7600 and the driven
pulley (black) of Stylus Pro 9600.
Set the timing belt of Stylus Pro 7600 on the CR Unit in a
manner as shown below:
CR Timing Belt

Screws (CP(W): M4×10) ×4

Flat surface here

Figure 4-43. Removing the CR Motor ASSY

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

CR Unit

Once the belt tension has changed as a result of, say, removal of the
CR Motor, make the following adjustment:
“5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment” (p.214)

Install the timing belt by adjusting the tension on the driven
pulley side, with the CR Motor secured with the screws.
Installing the timing belt by adjusting the tension on the CR
Motor side could damage the PF Encoder Scale.
Move the carriage by hand to the left and right and make sure
that the CR Timing Belt is attached uniformly in the center of
the pulley.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

181

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY
C A U T IO N

When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.

Screws (CP(W): M3×6)

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the Access Cover. (See Removing the Access Cover on page 167)

While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)

Disconnect the connector (CN29: red 4-pin) of the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY from
the Main Board and take it out through the hole in the R Side Frame.

Remove the one (CP(W): M3×6) screw securing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY and
remove the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY.
(See Figure 4-44)

Release the harness for the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY from the five cable clamps on
the Maintenance ASSY and CR Rail ASSY.
(See Figure 4-45)

HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY

Figure 4-44. Removing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY

Clamp
Clamp

Clamp

Figure 4-45. Releasing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY Harness

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

182

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY
C A U T IO N

When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.

Clamp

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)

Release the harness of the CR_HP Sensor ASSY from the four clamps on the printer
body. (See Figure 4-46)

Pinch the two upper hooks of the CR_HP Sensor ASSY and disengage them from the
holding plate, and disconnect the connector. (See Figure 4-47)

Clamp

Figure 4-46. Releasing the CR_HP Sensor ASSY Harness

Hook

CR_HP Sensor ASSY

Figure 4-47. Removing the CR_HP Sensor

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

183

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence)
C A U T IO N

When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by
about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost
position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.
Take great care not to scratch the CR Encoder Scale. (If the CR
Encoder Scale is scratched, the encoder sensor will output
wrong signals, thus resulting in abnormal operation of the
carriage or error occurrence.)

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Remove the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY. (p.178)

Disengage the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) from the CR Encoder Scale
Fastening Spring on the L Side Frame side.

Remove the CR Encoder Scale from the CR Encoder Scale Holders.

CR Encoder Scale

CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring

CR Encoder Scale Holder

Figure 4-48. Releasing from the CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring

NOTE: The number of CR Encoder Scale Holders is as follows:
Stylus Pro 7600: 2 guides
Stylus Pro 9600: 3 guides
8.

While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)

Disengage the CR Encoder Scale from the hook on the CR Encoder Scale Holder R
and draw out the CR Encoder Scale from the carriage area.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

CR Encoder Scale
CR Encoder Scale Holder R

After assembling the CR ENC, the following adjustments should be
made.
“5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)”

Figure 4-49. CR Encoder Scale Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism

184

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed
Mechanism
4.4.1 PF Motor
1.

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Disconnect the one connector cable of the PF Motor ASSY and take it out through the
hole in the L Side Frame.
(See Figure 4-50)

Remove the four screws securing the PF Motor Mounting Plate. (See Figure 4-51)

Move the PF Motor toward the printer body and remove the PF Motor by lifting the
gear side.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

After replacing the P_EDGE Sensor, the following adjustment
operation should be performed.
“PF Motor Adjustment (p.214)”

Clamp
Relay Connector

Figure 4-50. Removing the PF Motor ASSY Harness Connector.

PF Motor Mounting Plate securing screws x4

Figure 4-51. Removing the PF Motor.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

185

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY
1.

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Disconnect the PF Encoder Sensor connector.

Remove the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor and remove the PF Encoder
Sensor ASSY.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

After installing the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY, make the following
adjustment.
“5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.216)”

Connector

Screw

PF Encoder Sensor ASSY

Figure 4-52. Removing the PF Encoder Sensor.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

186

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale

PF Loop Scale Base

4.4.3.1 Assembly Procedure for the PF Loop Scale ASSY
When assembling the PF loop scale unit, the following exclusive tool should be used.

Exclusive tool No.#F730

: FPF Loop Scale Assembly Base
(Code: 1051765)

Protective backing

The assembly procedure is shown below.
1.

Set the exclusive tool, #F730 as shown in the figure below, then set the PF loop scale
base part with the double sided tape side facing up.

Peel the protective backing off the double sided tape to the PF loop scale base.

Affix the PF loop scale carefully to the PF loop scale base with the PF loop scale
printed surface downward, aligning it precisely with the PF loop scale base.

Peel the protective backing off the other side of the double sided tape and affix the tape
so that it is within the black circle on the unprinted side of the PF loop scale ASSY.

C A U T IO N

#F730 tool

Figure 4-53. #F730 tool and PF Loop Scale Base

Care should be taken so as not to damage the internal diameter

Wrong direction

Loop Scale set direction

of the PF loop scale.

There is no problem if the PF loop scale's affixing position on
the PF loop scale base deviates somewhat. The important
control point is that the inside diameter of the PF loop scale not
be damaged.

PF Loop Scale
Base

Exclusive #F730 tool

Figure 4-54. PF Loop Scale Set

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

187

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4.3.2 PF Loop Scale ASSY Affixing Procedure
Double sided tape

When assembling the PF loop scale unit, the following exclusive tool should be used.

Exclusive tool No.#F731

: PF Loop Scale Affixing tool
(Code: 1051767)

Protective backing

The assembly procedure is given below.
1.

Set the PF loop scale ASSY's double sided tape side on the grid roller side, align the
internal diameter of the PF loop scale with the left end of the grid roller (PF roller) and
set it lightly.

C A U T IO N

At this point, the PF loop scale ASSY should not be fitted on the
grid roller as far as it can go. If the PF loop scale ASSY is placed on
the grid roller by hand, it could damage the PF loop scale ASSY's
internal diameter and the distance from the center of the grid roller
to the scale reading part would not be the same all around any
more, resulting in a drop in the encoder sensor's reading accuracy.

Figure 4-55. Affixing the Double Sided Tape to the PF Loop Scale

Press the exclusive tool #F731 against the PF loop scale ASSY from the outside, then
insert the grid roller in as far as the base plate carefully, and affix it.

PF Loop Scale ASSY

Exclusive #F731 tool

Figure 4-56. Affixing the PF Loop Scale ASSY

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

188

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4.4 Suction Fans
1.

Remove the Paper Guide L2. (p.168)

Remove the two screws (CP(W): M4×8) and one screw (CP(W): M4×40) securing the
fan duct, and then remove the fan duct.

Disconnect the fan connector and harness.

Remove the one screw (CP(W): M4×8) securing the fan, and remove the fan.

NOTE: The number of fans:
Stylus Pro 7600: 2
Stylus Pro 9600: 3

C H E C K
P O IN T

When removing the right-side Suction Fan of Stylus Pro 7600, use a
short Phillips screwdriver to avoid interference with the
Maintenance Tank Holder.

Figure 4-57. Suction Fan Mounting Position
Screw (CP(W): M4×40)
Fan

Fan Duct

Connector

Screw (CP(W): M4×8)
Screws (CP(W): M4×8) ×2

Figure 4-58. Suction Fan Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

189

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY

P_THICK Sensor ASSY
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY

P_THICK Sensor ASSY

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Push the paper hold lever down to the rear.

Remove the harness from the connector of the P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK_0.3
Sensor.

Remove the one (CUPS: M3×6) screw securing the sensor bracket and remove the
bracket along with the both sensors.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Bring the Paper Set Lever into the release position and
bring down the Detection Arm rearward.

Screws (M4×8) ×2

Sensor bracket position is adjusted at the factory before shipment.
When the sensor bracket is to be removed on the service site, you
are advised to mark the mounting position before removal for easy
adjustment at reassembly.

Figure 4-59. P_THICK and P_THICK_0.3 Sensors Removal

Unhook the sensor from the sensor bracket and remove the sensor.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

If you move the sensor bracket position, perform the necessary
adjustment.
Refer to “5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY
Adjustment” (p.215)

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

190

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY

Screws (M4×6) ×5

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)

Disconnect the connector (CN27: black 4-pin) of the P_REAR Sensor ASSY from the
Main Board.

Push the Paper Hold Lever down to the front.

Remove the lower two screws (CBS: M4×6) securing the Paper Guide U.
(See Figure 4-60)

Remove the upper three screws (CBS: M4 × 6) (six screws for Stylus Pro 7600)
securing the Paper Guide U and remove the Paper Guide U by pulling it up toward you
slowly.
C A U T IO N

Paper Guide U

When removing/installing the Paper Guide U, be careful not to mar
the P_REAR Sensor ASSY with the edge of the sensor inspection
window.

P_REAR Sensor ASSY peeping window

Figure 4-60. Removing the Paper Guide U
Screws (M2×8) ×2

10. Remove the two (CP(W): M2×8) screws securing the P_REAR Sensor ASSY and
remove the P_REAR Sensor ASSY. (See Figure 4-61)
C H E C K
P O IN T

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

The P_REAR Sensor ASSY position is adjusted at the factory
before shipment. When the sensor bracket is to be removed on the
service site, you are advised to mark the mounting position before
removal for easy adjustment at reassembly.
If you replace the P_REAR Sensor ASSY, perform the necessary
adjustment.
Refer to “5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.215)

P-REAR Sensor ASSY

Figure 4-61. Removing the P_REAR Sensor ASSY

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism

191

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply
Mechanism
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board
1.

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Disconnect the seven FFCs (ink cartridge) and the two FFCs (Main Board/
Maintenance Tank) on the C472_SUB-B Board found at the left side of I/H Frame.
(See Figure 4-62)

Disconnect the connector of the Release Sensor (I/H Lever).

Remove the four screws (M3×6) and remove the C472_SUB-B Board.

FFC (CSIC Relay Board) ×7

Release Sensor (I/H Lever)

C A U T IO N

When connecting an FFC, take great care not to insert it aslant.
(Inserting aslant can cause a short circuit of signals, thus resulting
in broken circuit elements.)

FFC (Maintenance Tank)

FFC (Main Board)
Screws (M3×6) ×4

Figure 4-62. Disconnecting the C472_SUB-B Board Connectors

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism

192

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY
There are a total of seven I/H assemblies installed, one for each ink color. Here, the
procedure for removing one I/H ASSY will be explained.
This section also describes the procedure for removing the following parts:

Tube Cover

Release Sensor (I/H Lever)
CSIC Relay Board
I/H Frame
C A U T IO N

You must execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing” in 5.2.3.20 Clean
Head on page 256) before removal of the I/H ASSY and ink charging
(“Initial charge” in 5.2.4 Cleaning on page 259) after reinstallation.
If no ink tube is to be removed, there is no need of executing ink
discharge.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

When removing and installing the front cover switch holder, the
following adjustment should be made.
Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216)

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Disconnect the seven FFCs (ink cartridges), two FFCs (Main Board/Maintenance
Tank) and the connector for the Release Sensor (I/H Lever) on the C472_SUB-B
Board found at the left side of I/H Frame. (See Figure 4-62)

Remove two black screws (M3×8) securing the Ink Tube Cover and remove the cover.
(See Figure 4-63)

Disconnect the connector of the Cover Sensor ASSY at the right side of the I/H Frame.
(See Figure 4-64)

Remove one screw (CUPS: M3×6) and one screw (CUPS: M4×6) securing the I/H
Frame on the right side.

Black screws (M3×8) ×2

Figure 4-63. Ink Tube Cover Removal

Connector of Cover Sensor ASSY

Screw (CUPS: M3×6)

Screw (CUPS: M4×6)

Figure 4-64. I/H Frame Removal 1/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism

193

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
9.

Revision A

Remove one screw (CUPS: M3×6) and one screw (CUPS: M4×6) securing the I/H
Frame on the left side. (See Figure 4-65)

Screws (CUPS: M3×6) ×7

10. Remove seven screws (CUPS: M3×6) and two screws (CUPS: M4×6) securing the I/H
Frame on the top.
11. Lift the I/H Frame and disconnect the connector of the Release Sensor (I/H Lever).
(See Figure 4-66)
12. Remove the I/H Frame while paying attention to the connectors of the Cover Sensor
and Release Sensor (I/H Lever).

Screws (CUPS: M4×6) ×2

Before installing the I/H Frame, make certain that the gear of
the I/H Lever is engaged with the gear of the Cartridge Lock
Shaft and also that the Cover Sensor turns ON and OFF.
Check gear engagement

Screw (CUPS: M3×6) ×7

Screw (CUPS: M4×6)

Figure 4-65. I/H Frame Removal 2/2

Check Release Sensor ON/OFF

When installing the I/H Frame, make sure that the projections
on the I/H ASSY are fitted in the seven holes in the top plate
properly.
If the I/H ASSY is not installed properly, the ink cartridges
may not be recognized.

Connector of Release ASSY

Figure 4-66. Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Removal

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism

194

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

13. Disengage the two hooks on the back of the relevant Ink Holder ASSY and draw out
the CSIC Relay Board. (See Figure 4-67)
If you push in the CSIC Relay Board as a whole unit, the CSIC
Contact Spring will be deformed. Be sure to install the CSIC Relay
Board by the following procedure:
1. Disassemble the Holder ASSY to the units as shown below.
2. Remove the CSIC Contact Spring. (2 hooks)
3. Install the CSIC Relay Board.
4. Hold and inset the CSIC Contact Spring with care not to
deform it with the edge of the Relay Board.

Hook

CSIC Relay Board

CSIC Contact Spring

Coupling

Figure 4-67. CSIC Relay Board Removal

Remove the screw in the joint connecting the Ink Holder ASSY and the pipe (M6),
then remove the O-ring from its inside.

Take out the two screws (CPS: M3×12) holding the Ink Holder ASSY to the I/H Base,
then remove the Ink Holder ASSY. (See Figure 4-68)
When installing the ink tube to the Ink Holder ASSY, first make
certain that there is the O-ring. Then insert the ink tube into the
innermost position properly and tighten the coupling screw.

Disassembly & Assembly

Screws (CPS: M3×12) ×2

Figure 4-68. Ink Holder ASSY Removal

Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism

195

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
7.
8.

Revision A

Take out the two screws (CUPS: M3×6) holding the Needle Frame ASSY.
(See Figure 4-69)

Screw (M3×6)

While disengaging the hook of the Needle Frame ASSY, slide the Ink Holder ASSY
downward to separate the Needle Frame ASSY from the Ink Holder ASSY.
(See Figure 4-70)

Needle Frame ASSY

Screw (M3×6)

Figure 4-69. Disassembling the Ink Holder ASSY 1/2
Needle Frame ASSY

Hook

Figure 4-70. Disassembling the Ink Holder ASSY 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism

196

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY
1.

Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)

Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)

Open the Front Cover.

Remove two screws (CPP: M3×8) securing the Ink Tube Cover and remove the cover.
(See Figure 4-63)

Disconnect the harness connector of the Cover Sensor ASSY.

Pinch the right and left hooks of the Cover Sensor ASSY and remove the Cover Sensor
ASSY.

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

Connector
Cover Sensor ASSY

Make sure that the Cover Switch Holder is so positioned that the
Cover Sensor ASSY operates coupled with the opening/closing of
the Front Cover.
Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216)

Figure 4-71. Removing the Cover Sensor ASSY

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism

197

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning
Mechanism
The Maintenance ASSY consists of the major assemblies listed below four of which
constitute the Cleaning Unit.
The life of the Cleaning Unit is judged by the life of the Pump Motor. Replace the Cap
ASSY, Pump ASSY, Flushing Box and Wiper at the same time.
Parts of the Cleaning Unit are available as individual parts so that each of those parts
can be replaced singly.
NOTE: For details, refer to “Table 6-1 Stylus Pro 7600/9600 - Lives of
Periodically Replaced Components and Maintenance (p.277)”.
Table 4-4. Major Parts of Cleaning Mechanism
Names of Parts

See

Pump Motor ASSY
Cleaning Unit
* Replace at expiration of Pump Motor
ASSY life

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

p.200
Pump/Cap ASSY

Cap ASSY

p.200

Pump ASSY

p.201

Cleaner Head

p.203

Flushing Box ASSY

p.204

Once you have replaced the Cleaning Unit, be sure to execute
CLEAR COUNTERS “Initialize cleaning unit (CLEANER) (p.71)”
and CLEAR COUNTERS “Initialize flashing box (FL BOX) (p.71)”
in Maintenance mode 2.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

198

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal
C H E C K
P O IN T

When you replace the Maintenance ASSY, ink can spill from the
ink tube connected to the pump assembly. Disconnect the ink tubes
carefully so that ink will not spill.

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

2. Remove the Access Cover. (See Removing the Access Cover on page 167)
3.

Disconnect the connector (CN17) of the Pump Motor ASSY.

At the rear of the printer body, remove the four screws securing the Maintenance
ASSY, and remove the Maintenance ASSY from the printer body. (See Figure 4-72)

Maintenance
ASSY
Screw x4

After installing the Maintenance ASSY, insert the waste ink tube
(thin) of the Pump Motor ASSY into the waste ink tube (thick) of
the Flushing Box ASSY to the depth using tweezers.

Figure 4-72. Removing the Maintenance ASSY
Cleaner Head (Wiper) (p.203)

Pump ASSY
Valve ASSY
Waste ink tube (thin)

Pump ASSY
(p.201)

Flushing Box ASSY

Pump Motor ASSY
(p.200)
Cap ASSY (p.200)
Waste ink tube

Figure 4-73. Maintenance ASSY

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

199

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY

Maintenance ASSY

Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199)

Remove the two (M3×8) screws securing the Pump Motor ASSY to the Maintenance
ASSY and remove the Pump Motor ASSY.

4.6.3 Cap ASSY
1.

Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199)

Disconnect the tube which connect the Valve ASSY to the Cap ASSY.

Remove the two screws securing the Cap ASSY and remove the Cap ASSY from the
Maintenance ASSY.

C A U T IO N

Check for the points below when removing/mounting the Cap
ASSY.
Push the cap part down to the valve part and check that the cap
part rebounds with spring force.
Check that the valve part is not dislocated.

Screws (M3×8) ×2

Pump Motor ASSY

Figure 4-74. Removing the Pump Motor ASSY

Valve ASSY

Cap ASSY

Figure 4-75. Removing the Cap ASSY

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

200

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.6.4 Pump ASSY

Gear (3 parts)

Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199)

Remove the one central screw (M3×4) of the Pump ASSY and remove the three parts
including the gear. (See Figure 4-76)

Remove the two screws (M3×6) on the gear side.

Disconnect the tube from the Cap ASSY, remove the one screw (M 3×6) and remove
the Pump ASSY.(See Figure 4-77)

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

Screw (M3×4)

Once you have replaced the Pump ASSY, execute “CLEAR
COUNTERS” (See p.71).

Screws (M3×6) ×2

Figure 4-76. Removing the Pump ASSY 1/2

Pump ASSY

Screw (M3×6)

Ink tube

Figure 4-77. Removing the Pump ASSY 2/2

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

201

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

When installing the Pump ASSY, make sure that the spring is
set in the spring catch.

Spring catch

When installing the pump reduction gear, make sure that the
gears are engaged properly.

Cleaner Head

The Cleaner Head must move when
the gear turns about 20 times.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

202

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper)
1.

Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199)

Using tweezers, disengage the dent of the Cleaner Head from the projection on the
Cleaner Head Holder and pull off the Cleaner Head.

Rubber side
Cleaner Head

C A U T IO N

If you touch the Cleaner Head with a bare hand, the head
nozzle can be stopped up with ink repelled by fat from your
hand. For handling the Cleaner Head, be sure to use tweezers;
never touch the Cleaner Head with your bare hand.
Before use, clean the tweezers with cleaner.

Felt side

Install the Cleaner Head in such an orientation that its felt is
positioned on the Pump ASSY side and the rubber in on the Cap
ASSY side.

Figure 4-78. Removing the Cleaner Head

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

203

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY
Waste ink tube (thin)

Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)

Remove the Paper Guide L2. (p.168)

From the printer body, pull off carefully the waste ink tube (thick) which connects the
Flushing Box ASSY to the Maintenance Tank.

Remove the one (CUPS: M3×6) screw securing the Flushing Box ASSY.

Take out the Flushing Box, while pulling off carefully the waste ink tube (thin) coming
from the Pump ASSY.

Remove the Flushing Box ASSY.

Screw (CUPS: M3×6)

After installing the Flushing Box ASSY, make certain by removing
the Paper Guide L2 that the waste ink tube (thick) is set securely on
the tube joint of the Maintenance Cartridge Holder.
Waste ink tube

Flushing Box ASSY

Waste ink tube (thick)

Figure 4-79. Removing the Flushing Box ASSY

C H E C K
P O IN T

Take off the ink tube (thick/thin) carefully so that ink will not spill
from the ink tube.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism

204

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards
This section describes the procedures for removing the Power Supply Board, Main
Board (C472MAIN) and AC Inlet.

Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×8

4.7.1 Power Supply Board
C A U T IO N

Unplug the AC power cable and wait at least five minutes before
removing the Power Supply Board to make sure there is no residual
power left in the board's capacitors.

Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)

Disconnect the following connectors from the Power Supply Board:
Table 4-5. Connectors on Power Supply Board
Connector No.

Pins

Color

Connection

CN301

Notes

CN001

White

AC inlet

Lock type

CN301

White

C472MAIN

Lock type

Remove the eight screws (CPS: M4×8) securing the Power Supply Board, and then
remove the Power Supply Board.

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards

CN001

Figure 4-80. Power Supply Board Removal

205

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.7.2 AC Inlet
C A U T IO N

Unplug the AC power cable and wait at least five minutes before
removing the Power supply Board to make sure there is no residual
power left in the board's capacitors.

Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)

Disconnect CN001 from the Power Supply Board. (See Figure 4-81)

Remove the one screw (M4×8) and toothed washer (M4) fastening the AC Inlet
Ground Cable.

Push the hooks (one top and two bottom hooks) and remove the AC Inlet from the
holder. (See Figure 4-82)

Screw (M4×8), toothed washer
CN001

Install the AC Inlet in such an orientation that the ground cable
side is positioned up.
Up: Ground cable

Ground cable

AC Inlet Holder

Figure 4-81. Removing the AC Inlet Holder
AC Inlet Holder
Hook ×1

AC Inlet

Hooks ×2

Figure 4-82. Removing the AC Inlet

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards

206

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN)
C A U T IO N

Screws (CP(W): M3×6) × 9

When disconnecting or connecting the connector for an FFC cable
on the Main Board, never pull or push the connector aslant.
Disconnecting or connecting the connector can cause damage to,
short circuit or breakage of the terminals inside the connector, thus
resulting in damage to elements on the circuit board.

Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)

Disconnect all the harness connectors from the Main Board.

Remove the two screws (CP(W): M3×6) securing the both ends of the parallel interface
connector to the Main Board and seven other screws (CP(W): M3×6), and remove
Main Board.

Refer to the table on the next page for connections of connectors.
The following connectors are not used:
CN4, CN7, CN12, CN18, CN25, CN28, CN33, CN36, CN37

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D

Figure 4-83. C472MAIN Board Removal

Before and after replacing the Main Board with a new one, make
the following adjustment:
Refer to “5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment” (p.213)

Figure 4-84. Harness Clamp Locations

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards

207

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Main Board Connector List
CN.No. Pins

Color

Remarks

CN1

P/S board

Lock type

CN2

PANEL

FFC, lock type

CN3

H-UDI36

CN4

CN5

CN6

CN7

CN8
CN9

White

Connection

Yellow

D/A_OUT

(Not used)

ROM_DIMM
CSIC

FFC

S_I/O(DEBUGER)

(Not used)

CR_FFC1

FFC, lock type

CR_FFC3

FFC, lock type
FFC, lock type

Red

CN10

CR_FFC2

CN11

IEEE1284 (parallel port)
(Not used)

CN12

USB

CN13

TYPE_B

CN14

White

CR_MOT

Lock type, with relay connector

CN15

White

PF_MOT

Lock type, with relay connector

CN16

White

PF_ENC

CN17

White

PUMP_MOT

With relay connector

CN18

Blue

P/S_FAN

CN19

Black

FAN1

With relay connector

Yellow FAN2

With relay connector

CN20

CN21

Red

FAN3

Blue

P_THICK0.3

CN22

CN23

Yellow COVER_L

CN24

White

CR_ORG

CN25

Black

I/H_LEVER

CN26

Red

CN27

Black

P_REAR

CN28

Yellow

P_FRONT

CN29

Red

HD_SLID

CN30

Figure 4-85. Connector Locations

* Stylus Pro 9600 only

(Not used)

P_THICK

ROLL_UNIT (option unit)

CN31

White

H_FAN

CN33

White

RESET

(Not used)
* Stylus Pro 9600 only

CN35

USB2.0

Right side (AC side)

CN36

IEEE1394

(Not used)

CN37

HDD_PS

(Not used)

Disassembly & Assembly

Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards

208

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.7.4 DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before
Shipment
C A U T IO N

Do not change the DIP Switches and Jumpers on the Main Board
from their positions which were set at the factory before shipment.
Changing their setting can result in malfunctions.

Jumpers (J5 / J6 / J7)
Table 4-7. Jumper Setting at Factory at Shipment
Jumper

Setting at Factory

JP5

Open

Boot select

Open: Normal boot
Short: Flash ROM

JP6

Short

DA1_Select

Open: Debug mode
Short: Normal mode

JP7

Short

DA0_Select

Open: Debug mode
Short: Normal mode

DIP Switches (SWD600)

Function D

Description

Table 4-6. DIP Switch Setting at Factory at Shipment
SW

Setting at Factory

Function
Frequency Dispersion
Setting
(CPU/SDRAM
characteristics)
Clock Frequency Setting

SW4-5 : CPU/SDRAM - USB
ON-ON : 133.3MHz - 48MHz
OFF-ON : 100MHz - 48MHz
ON-OFF : 66.6MHz - 48MHz
OFF-OFF: 50MHz - 48MHz

OFF

Main board Revision
Setting (MAINREV0)

OFF

Main board Revision
Setting (MAINREV1)

OFF

Main board Revision
Setting (MAINREV2)

Disassembly & Assembly

Description
SW1-2-3
ON-ON-ON : -0.5%
ON-OFF-ON : -1.0%
ON-ON-OFF : -2.5%
ON-OFF-OFF : -3.75%

Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards

209

CHAPTER

ADJUSTMENT

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1 Overview

Table 5-1. Adjustment Tools (continued)
Name

This section describes the adjustment procedures necessary after replacing certain parts
and explains how to perform those adjustment procedures.

Epson or commercially
available paper
(Doubleweight Matte
Paper roll)
• MCSP24R4
(24-inch width)
• MCSP44R4
(44-inch width)

For printer mechanism
adjustments and test printing.

A3Tracing Paper
#F751

1057723

Used for adjustment of the
paper status detection sensor
(P_REAR) level adjustment.
Microtrace #300 LMB, made
by Kimoto

A3 Copy Paper (PPC)

Commercially available
product
(Example: Fuji Xerox
Bright Recycled)

Used for adjustment of the
paper status detection sensor
(P_EDGE) level adjustment.

Scale 1000mm
#F713

1047746 / A
commercially available
scale can be purchased.

Length:1000mm

Scale Stopper
#F714

1047745 / A
commercially available
scale can be purchased.

Used in combination with the
#F713 (measurements in 0.1
mm units)

CR ENC sensor positioning jig
#F799

1212926

Cutter Positioning Jig
#F800

1212928

PF ENC sensor positioning tool
#F798

1212925

Before beginning the adjustment operation, be sure to confirm the following caution
items.

If you are carrying out adjustments, see “5.1.4 Adjustment
Items” (p.212) and then confirm the relevant adjustment items
and adjustment procedures.
When carrying out adjustments, check the cautions displayed
in the explanation for each adjustment item thoroughly. If the
operation is performed wrong, it could hinder the product's
operation or functions.

5.1.2 Adjustment Tools
C H E C K
P O IN T

In adjustments and test printing, use Doubleweight Matte Paper
roll, unless otherwise specified.

Table below lists the tools necessary for adjustments of Stylus Pro 7600/9600.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Tools
Name

Part Code

Notes

Tension Gauge
#F770

1060744 / standard tool
acceptable

2.2kgf ± 220g
(PF Belt tension)

Thickness gauge

Commercially available

Thickness:
0.3 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 0.9 mm

Coupling tightening jig

Adjustment

Tightening force: 3kgf + 500g

Notes

24/44-inch Width Roll Paper

5.1.1 Cautions

C A U T IO N

Part Code

Ink Cartridge (x7)*

Spare

Draining cartridge*

Use at black ink type change

Maintenance Tank*

Spare

Note "*": Use at adjustments which require test printing.

Overview

211

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.3 Procedure for Adjustment Work

5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment

Follow the specified steps by consulting “5.2 Self-diagnostic Function” (p.220) and
“5.3 Mechanism Adjustment” (p.263) for adjustment items of each unit/part.

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Print Head (p.171) has
been replaced.

Each Repair Item in
“5.1.4 Adjustment Items”

C H E C K
P O IN T

“5.2 Self-diagnostic Function”

When replacing the print head with a new one, execute ink
discharge (“Ink Blowing” on page 256) beforehand.

“5.3 Mechanism Adjustment”

“5.1.5 Parameter Backup”, “5.3.9 USB ID
Writing”, “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2”, etc.

Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-3. Required Adjustment Items (Print Head)

5.1.4 Adjustment Items

Step

Table 5-2 below indicates the parts replacement repair items for Stylus Pro 7600/9600
which requires adjustments. For actually performed part replacements, and
disassembly and reassembly operations, the specified adjustment items should be
performed in the sequence shown in the instructions.

Table 5-2. Adjustment Items
Repair Item (Page for Disassembly and Assembly)

Adjustment Item

See

Clear the counter (Maintenance Mode2)
(Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed]
→ Power ON) “HEAD”

p.70

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

p.220

See for Adjustment

Head Rank Input (including initial filling)

p.233

Print Head (p.171)

p.212

Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning)

p.237

MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207)

p.213

Head Slant Checking

p.246

CR Motor ASSY (p.180)

p.214

Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)

p.248

PF Motor (p.185)

p.214

p.252

P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179)

p.215

6
7

Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking

Sensor

Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment)

p.253

P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191)

p.215

Test Pattern Printing

p.255

P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190)

p.215

Leak check pattern printing

p.259

CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178)

p.215

Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197)

p.216

PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186)

p.216

Cutter Solenoid (p.177)

p.217

Paper Guide L2 (p.168)
Damper ASSY (p.173)

p.217

Release Sensor (I/H Lever) (p.193)

p.217

Adjustment

Overview

212

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment

Table 5-4. Required Adjustment Items (Main Circuit) (continued)
Procedure Procedure
A*1
B*2

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the MAIN Board (C472
MAIN) (p.207) has been replaced.

Adjusting tools:
A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB)
A3 Copy Paper (PPC)
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714

Work operations before adjustment:
Parameter Backup (p.218)
Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
Adjustment items (steps):

See

Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)

p.248

Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking

p.252

Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment)

p.253

USB ID Input

p.273

RTC writing initialization

p.71

Power Cleaning

p.259

Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning)

p.237

Test Pattern Printing

p.255

Note "*1": Adjustment procedure when parameter backup has been executed
"*2": Adjustment procedure when parameter backup can not be executed

When “Parameter Backup” has been executed, make the
adjustment by Procedure A in Table 5-4 below; there is no need of
following Procedure B.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment Item

Work operations after adjustment:
Replacing the maintenance tank and resetting the maintenance tank life
counter

1. Replace the maintenance tank with a new one.
2. Start Maintenance Mode 2.

Table 5-4. Required Adjustment Items (Main Circuit)
Procedure Procedure
A*1
B*2

Adjustment Item

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]
+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON)

See
p.220

1 Rear Sensor AD Adjustment

p.231

2 Edge Sensor AD Adjustment

p.232

3 Initial Charge Flag Clear

p.257

4 Head Rank ID Checking

–

5 Head Rank Input

p.233

6 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning)

p.237

7 Head Slant Checking

p.246

8 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment

p.239

9 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment

p.243

10 Platen Position Adjustment (Flash Point Adjustment)

Adjustment

(Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed] → Power ON)
3. Clear the counter.
(“CLEAR COUNTERS”→“MAINTE. TANK”)
NOTE: For details, refer to “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70).

p.244

Overview

213

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment

5.1.4.4 PF Motor Adjustment

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the CR Motor ASSY (p.180)
has been replaced.

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the PF Motor (p.185) has
been replaced.

Adjusting tools:
No special tools are required.

Adjusting tools:
Tension gauge (for 4,000g)
PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F798
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714

Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-5. Required Adjustment Items (CR Motor Replacement)
Step

Adjustment Item

1 Clear the counter (Maintenance Mode2)
(Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed]
→ Power ON) “CR MOTOR”

See

Adjustment items (steps):

p.70

Table 5-6. Required Adjustment Items (PF Motor Replacement)
Step

2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

p.220

p.248

4 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking

p.252

5 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment)

p.253

6 Test Pattern Printing

p.255

Adjustment

See

p.263

3 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)

Adjustment Item

1 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

p.264

2 PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment

p.272

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

Overview

p.220

3 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment

p.239

4 Test Pattern Printing

p.255

214

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.4.5 P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment

5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_EGDE Sensor ASSY
(p.179) has been replaced.

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_THICK Sensor/
P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190) has been replaced.

Adjusting tools:
A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB)
A3 copying paper (PPC)
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714

Adjusting tools:
Thickness gauge (0.3/ 0.4, 0.8/ 0.9mm)
Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-9. Required Adjustment Items

Adjustment items (steps):

Step

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

Table 5-7. Required Adjustment Items
Step

Adjustment Item

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

See

1 Testing will be executed by “Sensor” (Test menu) → “Paper”

p.220

1 P_Edge Sensor AD Adjustment

p.232

2 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment

p.239

Adjustment Item

See
p.220

p.224

5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the CR Encoder Sensor
ASSY (p.178) has been replaced.

5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_REAR Sensor ASSY
(p.191) has been replaced.

Adjusting tools:
CR ENC sensor positioning jig #F799
Adjustment items (steps):

Adjusting tools:
A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB)

Table 5-10. Required Adjustment Items
Step

Adjustment items (steps):

Adjustment Item

See

1 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment

Table 5-8. Required Adjustment Items
Step

Adjustment Item

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

See
p.220

1 P_Rear Sensor AD Adjustment

p.231

2 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment

p.243

Adjustment

p.268

Overview

215

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment

5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Cover Sensor ASSY
(p.197) has been replaced.

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the PF Encoder Sensor
ASSY (p.186) has been replaced.

Adjustment items (steps):

Adjusting tools:
PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F764
Cutter Positioning Jig #F800
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714

Table 5-11. Required Adjustment Items
Step

Adjustment Item

See

1 Sensor position adjustment *

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
2 Testing will be executed by "Sensor" (Test menu) → “Cover”

p.267

Adjustment items (steps):

p.220

Table 5-12. Required Adjustment Items
Step

p.224

See

Note "*": The gap is acceptable, if it does not permit entrance of your finger when the
Front Cover is opened and “COVER OPEN” is displayed.

Adjustment

Adjustment Item

Overview

1 PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

p.272
p.220

2 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment

p.239

3 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment

p.243

216

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment

5.1.4.12 Damper ASSY Adjustment

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Cutter Solenoid (p.177)
has been replaced or the Paper Guide L has been reinstalled.

Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Damper ASSY (p.173)
has been replaced.

Adjusting tools:
Cutter Positioning Jig #F800
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714

C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment items (steps):

Execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) before removing the
Damper ASSY.
Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”.
Secure the coupling screw and the ink tube by tightening at the
specified torque. (2 ∼ 2.5 kg/f)

Table 5-13. Required Adjustment Items
Step

Adjustment Item

See

Adjustment items (steps):

1 Cutter Positioning Adjustment

p.269

2 Checking for Proper Cutting and Cutter Position

p.271

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

Table 5-14. Required Adjustment Items (Damper ASSY)
Step

p.220
1

3 Checking for Proper Cutting Pressure
4 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment

p.239

Adjustment Item

See

(Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)

p.220

Including initial filling

p.259

Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning)

p.237

Leak check pattern printing

p.259

Test Pattern Printing

p.255

5.1.4.13 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Adjustment
No adjustment is required

5.1.4.14 Battery
No adjustment is required. Execute “Initialize RTC (p.83)”.

Adjustment

Overview

217

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.5 Parameter Backup

EXECUTION OF PARAMETER BACKUP

5.1.5.1 Parameter Backup Procedure

Required tools:
Flash ROM-DIMM:

Remove the Access Cover at the rear of Stylus Pro 7600/9600 and set the prepared
ROM-DIMM in the ROM-DIMM slot on the Main Board.

Turn on the power to the Stylus Pro 7600/9600, and the LCD on the control panel will
display “Write:F->M Push:M->F”.

Upon passage of 5 seconds without pressing any button on the control panel, parameter
backup will automatically be executed. (The contents of NVRAM (“F”) on the Main
Board will be copied onto ROM-DIMM (“M”).)

Backup is completed when the LCD on the control panel changes as “Flash->ROMDIMM” → “End [Success]”.

Turn off the power to Stylus Pro 7600/9600 and take the ROM-DIMM out of the slot
on the Main Board.

C309PROG Board (Part code: 2076654-01)
Parameter backup utility: PBU16.RCC
PC and parallel cable
EPSON page printer: AcuLaser C8600

5.1.5.2 Work Procedure
PREPARATION
1.

Prepare the EPSON page printer as specified above. (AcuLaser C8600)

Install the flash ROM-DIMM in the optional ROM-DIMM slot (slot “A”) on the Main
Board of the page printer.

Connect the parallel cable from the PC to the parallel port of the page printer.

Turn on the power to the page printer while holding down the following buttons on the
control panel of the page printer:
[Job Cancel] + [Up] + [Down]

When the LCD on the control panel of the page printer changes as “ROM A Erasing”
→ “ROM A Format error”, send the parameter backup utility file (PBU16.RCC) from
the PC.

Transfer of the utility file is completed when the LCD on the control panel of the page
printer changes as “ROM A Writing” → “ROM A Format error”. Then the ROMDIMM can be used for parameter backup work.

Adjustment

5.1.5.3 Others
If you would like to prepare two or more ROM-DIMMs of the same contents as those
of the ROM-DIMM prepared at “PREPARATION” above, follow the following
procedure for efficient work:
1.

Prepare the EPSON page printer AcuLaser C8600.

Install the flash ROM-DIMMs in the optional ROM-DIMM slots on the Main Board of
the page printer as follows:
Slot “A” = Blank flash ROM-DIMM (for writing)
Slot “B” = Master ROM-DIMM (the one on which the parameter backup file was
written at “PREPARATION”)

Turn on the power to the page printer while holding down the following buttons on the
control panel of the page printer:
[Start/Stop] + [Job Cancel] + [Enter]

When the LCD on the control panel has displayed “ROM Copy Mode”, press the
[Enter] button on the panel.

Copy processing is executed and completed when the display has changed as “ROM A
Erasing” → “ROM B>A Copying” → “ROM B>A Copying End”.

Turn off the power to the page printer and take the ROM-DIMMs out of the slots.

Overview

218

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.1.6 Firmware Reinstallation

5.1.6.1 Firmware Installation through ROM-DIMM

In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, the firmware is written in the Flash ROM on the Main Board.
When the Main Board has been replaced with a new one, write the firmware in the
Flash ROM on the new Main Board by the procedure described below.

Install the firmware through a ROM-DIMM by the following procedure:

C A U T IO N

Immediately after reloading firmware to the new MAIN board
without any parameters existing on it, when the printer's power
is turned on, the ink initial refilling operation starts. If initial
refilling is not necessary, be sure to start the printer by the
following procedure.
1. Start the Self-diagnostic function when the power is turned On.
2. Select “Parameter: Update” under “Check: Parameter”.
3. Select “Update:I nkParameter”.
4. Select “Reset” in “Init. Fill”.
5. Turn the printer’s power switch Off, then turn it On again.
The correct firmware data file should be used to match the
download method.

Check the firmware version.
([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU”→ “VIRSION”)

Write the firmware file in the RCC format in a ROM-DIMM (C309 PROG).

Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the printer body.

Remove the cover at the rear of the printer body and insert the ROM-DIMM prepared
at step 1 into the dedicated socket.

Turn on the power to the printer body.

The firmware will be installed automatically and installation will be completed.

Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the printer body.

Pull the ROM-DIMM out of the dedicated socket.

Turn on the power to the printer body and check the firmware version.

5.1.6.2 Firmware Installation through Interface
This section describes the procedure for firmware installation through the parallel
interface, as an example.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment

Set the parallel interface in the compatibility mode.

Connect the host PC to the printer with the parallel cable.

Turn on the power to the printer body.

Check the firmware version.
([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU”→ “VIRSION”)

Make certain that the panel display of the printer body shows “READY”.

Transmit the firmware file in the IPL format from the host PC to the printer.

Firmware installation is completed.

Turn off the power to the printer once and then turn it on again.

Overview

219

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2 Self-diagnostic Function

5.2.1.2 Functions of Keys during Self-diagnosis
Described below are the functions of panel keys in the self-diagnostic mode:

C A U T IO N

With this function, all the processing except for some items are
executed on the assumption that roll paper is used. Take care,
since even sheets, if loaded, are handled as roll paper.
During execution of this function, detection of remaining
volume in ink cartridges and Maintenance Tank is not
performed. Therefore, when you execute this function for print
head replacement or any other work which requires
consumption or discharge of a large volume of ink, check the
remaining volume in ink cartridges and Maintenance Tank
beforehand. (If you neglect this checking, the capacity of the
Maintenance Tank can be exceeded so that ink may flow out;
never forget to perform this checking.)

5.2.1 Overview

Table 5-15. Key Functions in Self-diagnostic Mode
Normal Mode

Self-diagnostic
Mode

Functions

Pause

Previous Level

Returns the setting item to the previous level of
the menu hierarchy.

SelecType

Setting Item (Next)

Lowers the level in the menu hierarchy by one.

Paper Source
(Items)

Setting Item
(Previous)

Enhances the level in the menu hierarchy by one.

Paper Feed ∆

Setting Value +

Changes the menu in the upward direction.
Setting value +

Paper Feed ∇

Setting Value –

Changes the menu in the downward direction.
Setting value –

Cut / Eject (Enter)

Enter

Sets the setting value.

Cleaning

Paper Feed & Cut

If it is pressed, the paper is fed, and when it is

Self-diagnosis is chiefly intended to determine the parameters for mechanism
adjustment and firm adjustment.

released, the paper is cut.
Moves the cursor. (only for specific items)

This function is incorporated in the printer firmware. It is enabled when the power to
the printer is turned on while pressing the specific panel keys.
NOTE: The printer can not be shifted from the normal mode to the selfdiagnostic mode.

5.2.1.1 How to Start Self-diagnostic Function
The key operation to start the self-diagnostic function is as follows:
1.

Power is off.

Press “Paper Feed ∆” + “Paper Feed ∇” + “Cut / Eject”.

Turn the power on.

The self-diagnostic menu is displayed.

Turn the power off to close the self-diagnostic function.

Adjustment

Figure 5-1. Panel Function in Self-diagnostic Mode

Self-diagnostic Function

220

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.1.3 Top Menu
The following diagnostic items are available in the self-diagnostic mode. This section
describes the diagnostic items available and transition in the top menu.
Table 5-16. Self-diagnostic Function List
Item
Test
Adjustment

[Paper Feed ∆]

Description

Check:

Version, Control Panel, Sensor, Encoder, Fan, Record, CSIC, Actuator,
Actuator 2

[Paper Feed ∇]

[SelecType]
Test?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Check:

Head system adjustment, sensor position adjustment, paper feed
compensation, cutter adjustment

[Paper Feed ∇]

Cleaning

Cleaning with mode specified

Test pattern printing, adjustment variables printing

Parameter*

NVRAM initialization, updating, display

Life *

Carriage motor, paper feed motor, CR+PF motor, cutter, head up and down,
head lock, cleaning, printing, comprehensive endurance, CR+PF+
discharging, comprehensive endurance 2, comprehensive endurance 3,
checking

To each menu

[Pause]
[Items]

Adjustment?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Check:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Note "*": This diagnostic item is not explained, since it is used only by testing at the
factory, not executed on the service site.

Cleaning?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Check:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Print?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Check:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Parameter?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Check:
Life?
[Paper Feed ∇]

Figure 5-2. Top Menu Transition

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

221

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2 Test
“Test” is intended to check the circuit boards.

[Paper Feed ∆]
Test:

Table 5-17. Circuit Board Check Items
Item

Description

See

Version

Program, Backup parameters, DIP switch, Panel review

p.223

Control Panel

Keys, LCD, LEDs

p.223

Sensors

CR origin, Covers, Paper thickness, Levers, Cartridge
presence, Ink lever, Edge AD, Rear AD,
Head thermistor, Driver thermistor, Take-up Reel Unit,
Maintenance tank

p.224

[SelecType]

[Paper Feed ∇]

Version?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

To each menu

[Pause]
[Items]

Panel?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Encoder

CR_ENC (carriage), PF_ENC (paper feed)

p.225

Fan

Paper suction fan (all operation), Paper suction fan
(individual operations), Head driver heat sink cooling
fan

p.225

Record

Maintenance, Major faults

p.226

Sensor?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Encoder?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:

CSIC

CSIC information display

p.227

Actuator

Cutter

p.229

Actuator 2

Cutter solenoid, Pump motor

p.229

Note "*": This diagnostic item is not explained, since it is used only by testing at the
factory, not executed on the service site.

[Paper Feed ∇]

Fan?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Elec.?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]
Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

D/A Revision? * Not used
[Paper Feed ∆]
Head Signal? * Not used
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

CSIC?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
[Paper Feed ∇]

Actuator?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Test:
Actuator 2?
[Paper Feed ∇]

Figure 5-3. Inspection Menu Transition

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

222

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.1 Version
Check the firmware version and the DIP switch (ON: 0, OFF: 1).
When this item is selected, the contents is shown on the panel one by one.
(See Figure 5-4)

Ver:
? F/W

Firmware version display is as follows:

∗∗∗∗∗∗

Ver:
? Param 1

BWddym
BNddym

Ver:
? Param 2

Description
BW:
Stylus Pro 9600
BN:
Stylus Pro 7600
dd:
2-digit decimal number representing the day of release
y:
Decimal number representing the units digit of the year of release
m:
1-digit hexadecimal number representing the month of release
Example
The firmware version released on July 5, 2000 is:
• BW0507 (Stylus Pro 9600)
• BN0507 (Stylus Pro 7600)
•
•
•
•
•

Ver:
? DipSW

0x00

Ver:
? Panel Rev

Figure 5-4. Menu Transition of Version Display

5.2.2.2 Control Panel
Check the keys, LCD and LEDs on the control panel. (See Figure 5-5)

[SelecType]

Panel:

In the panel key check, the panel displays the name of a pushed key.
Press the Pause key two times to complete the panel key check.
In the LED check, the Operate, Pause, Ink Out K, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y,
Paper Out, Auto Cut, Cutter OFF, Sheet, and Maintenance Tank LEDs are
lighted up in the order named.
At the same time, the LCD shows the name of the LED which is currently lit.

Key ?

[SelecType]

Panel:
?

LCD ?

[Pause]

[SelecType]

Panel:
?

[Pause] x2

LED ?

[Pause]
[Items]

Panel:
? Key

????

Panel:
? LED

Power

Figure 5-5. Menu Transition of Panel Test

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

223

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.3 Sensors
Sensor status is displayed on the panel.

The numerals shown at the item “Paper” means that the paper thickness is as
follows:

00
01
11
10

: 0.3 mm or below in paper thickness
: 0.4 mm ~ 0.8 mm in paper thickness
: 0.9 mm or more in paper thickness
: The lever is in the up position.

NOTE: When adjustment is required, see “5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment (p.231)”.

“INK NOT” indicates the absence of color ink cartridges.
Each symbol displayed signifies that the corresponding color ink cartridge is
absent.

For Edge AD and Rear AD, the value shown around the center represents the ONOFF difference and the value shown at right represents the ON level.
The standard for accepting each AD value is as follows:

Rear AD: 40 or more in ON-OFF difference and 95 or less in ON level
Edge AD: 40 or more in ON-OFF difference and E0 ~ E8 in ON level
NOTE 1: For adjustment procedure, see “5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment (p.232)”
and “5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment (p.231)”.
2: With Stylus Pro 7600, the item “TAKE UP” is not displayed.

Sen:
? CR Origin

Sen:
? Cover

Sen:
? Paper

Sen:
? Lever

Down

Sen:
? HeadSlide
Sen:
?INK NOT

On
KkCMcmY

Sen:
? InkLever

Down

Sen:
? Edge AD

04A 0E2

Sen:
? Front AD

041 068

Sen:
? Rear AD

041 068

Sen:
? Head Temp

25°C

Sen:
? Drv. Temp

25°C

Sen:
? TAKE UP

Off

Sen:
? MainteTank

* Not used

Figure 5-6. Menu Transition of Sensor Test

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

224

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.4 Encoder
The encoder values for CR shaft (carriage) and PF (form feed) are displayed on the
panel. (See Figure 5-7)

Encoder:
? CR

0000

The value displayed represents the encoder pulse count.
Encoder:
? PF

FFFF

5.2.2.5 Fan
Figure 5-7. Menu Transition of Encoder Test

Check to see if each fan operates. (See Figure 5-8)
NOTE: With Stylus Pro 7600, the item “Paper 3" (paper suction fan) is not
displayed.

[Enter]

Fan:
?

Paper 123

[Enter]

Fan:
?

Paper 1

Paper 2

Paper 123

[Pause]
* 3:Stylus Pro 9600 only
[Enter]

Fan:
?

[Pause]
[Enter]

Fan:
?

[Pause]

[Enter]

Fan:
?

[Pause]

Head Drv.

[Pause]

Fan:
[Pause] End

Figure 5-8. Menu Transition of Fan Test

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

225

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.6 Record
Check the record of maintenance of major faults.

Record:

The figure at right shows the menu of record. (See Figure 5-9)

Maintenance?

Record:
?

MAINTENANCE RECORD
“Record: Maintenance” displays the record of maintenance. (See Figure 5-10)

Error ?

Figure 5-9. Menu Transition of Record

Table 5-18.
Display

Item

WasteInk

Waste ink

Wiper

Wiping count

Rubing*

Rubbing count

Lever

Lever up count

Cover

Cover opening count

Ink Lever

Ink lever up count

CR Motor

CR motor round trip count

PF Motor

PF motor travel

Ink Tube*

Ink tube round trip count

Print Number

The number of printed sheets

Clening

Cleaning count

Fire B

K ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Fire LK

LK ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Fire C

C ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Fire M

M ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Fire LC

LC ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Fire LM

LM ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Fire Y

Y ink discharge count (in mega dots)

Cut

Cutting count

Cut Sole.

Cutter solenoid operation count

LockSolen*

Head lock solenoid operation count

WasteInk:
?
Wiper:
?
Rubing:
?

00000000
00000000
* Not used

Fire B:
?

00000000Mdot

Fire LK:
?

00000000Mdot

Lever:
?

00000000

Fire C:
?

00000000Mdot

Cover:
?

00000000

Fire M:
?

00000000Mdot

Ink Lever:
?

00000000

Fire LC:
?

00000000Mdot

CR Motor:
?

00000000

Fire LM:
?

00000000Mdot

PF Motor:
?

00000000

Fire Y:
?

00000000Mdot

Ink Tube:
?

Note "*": Not used

0000000

0000000
* Not used

Cut:
?

Print Number:
?

00000000

Cut Sole.:
?

Clening:
?

00000000

LockSolen:
?

00000000
0000000
00000000
* Not used

Figure 5-10. Menu Transition of Maintenance Record

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

226

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

RECORD OF ERRORS
The record of major errors (service call errors) can be checked. A maximum of 7 errors
are displayed. (See Figure 5-11)
NOTE: CPU errors are not included.

5.2.2.7 CSIC
Information on each CSIC is displayed. (See Figure 5-12)
Menu transition for cartridge selection is shown at right.

Error 0 :
?

00020000

Error 1 :
?

00010000

Error 2 :
?

0001000C

Error 3 :
?

No Error

Error 4 :
?

No Error

Error 5 :
?

No Error

Error 6 :
?

No Error

Figure 5-11. Menu Transition of Record of Errors
CSIC :
?

K Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

LK Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

C Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

M Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

LC Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

LM Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

Y Cart. ?

CSIC :
?

MainteTank ?

Figure 5-12. Menu Transition for Cartridge Selection

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

227

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

INTERNAL INFORMATION DISPLAY OF CSIC
Internal information on CSIC is displayed.
Figure 5-13 shows menu transition for internal information display of CSIC.
NOTE: The indications on the LCD mean as follows:
00-27: Memory addresses (00H ~ 27H) in EEPROM of CSIC
K: Ink cartridge of which information is available

K 00 :
?

K 01 :
?

K 0E :
?

K 1B :
?

K 02 : *
?

K 0F :
?

K 1C :
?

K 03 : *
?

K 10 :
?

K 1D :
?

K 04 : *
?

K 11 :
?

K 1E :
?

K 05 : *
?

–

K 12 :
?

K 1F :
?

K 06 : *
?

K 13 :
?

K 20 : *
?

K 07 : *
?

K 14 :
?

K 21 : *
?

K 08 : *
?

K 15 :
?

K 22 : *
?

K 09 : *
?

K 16 :
?

K 23 : *
?

K 0A :
?

K 17 :
?

K 24 : *
?

K 0B :
?

–

K 18 :
?

K 25 : *
?

K 0C :
?

K 19 :
?

K 26 : *
?

K 0D :
?

K 1A :
?

K 27 : *
?

*Fixed information

Figure 5-13. Menu Transition for Internal Information Display of CSIC

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

228

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.8 Actuator
You can operate actuators. (See Figure 5-14)
[SelecType]

Cutter :

CUTTER

The cutter is moved up and down by operating on the panel. (See Figure 5-15)

Neither pressing the [Paper Feed +] key with “UP” displayed nor pressing the
[Paper Feed -] key with “DOWN” displayed works.
Upon passage of 60 seconds with the cutter in the down position, it will
automatically move up.

[Enter] Start

[Pause]
[Items]
Cutter :
?

Figure 5-14. Menu Transition of Actuator

Cutter :

5.2.2.9 Actuator 2

You can operate actuators. (See Figure 5-16)

Cutter :

When you try to return to the top menu of test after execution of any item of

Actuator 2, “Turn Power OFF” will be displayed.

DOWN

Figure 5-15. Menu Transition of Cutter

[SelecType]

Cutter Sole.
?
[Paper Feed ∇]

?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Pump Motor
?
[Paper Feed ∇]

[Enter] Start

[Pause] [Items]
[Enter]
[Pause] End

?
[Paper Feed ∆]

Figure 5-16. Menu Transition of Actuator 2

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

229

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3 Adjustment

Table 5-19. Panel Setting Item List (continued)

Make the mechanism adjustment (head slant) and the firmware parameter adjustment.
Table 5-19. Panel Setting Item List
Item
Rear AD Adjustment
Edge AD Adjustment
Front AD Adjustment
Head Rank Input
D/A Compensation Value
Write
Head Nozzle Check
Paper Skew Check
Feed Correction + T&B
Top & Bottom
Automatic Mechanism
Adjustment
Rear Paper Sensor Position
Platen Position Adjustment
Platen Position Checking
Cutter Adjustment
Slant Check
Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D)
Parameter Copying
(Bi-D)
Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment 2 (Bi-D2)
Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment 3 (Bi-D3)
Round Trip Print Position (BiD Adjustment) Checking
Head Gap Adjustment
(Uni-D Adjustment)

Adjustment

Description
Make the AD adjustment of the rear sensor.
Make the AD adjustment of the edge sensor.
(Not used)
Input the characteristic values for the installed head.
After that, supply ink.
(Not used)
Check the print result for proper ink discharge from
the head nozzles.
Perform paper feed, and check the degree of skew by
sensor.
Make the printer perform printing and correct the
paper feed rate (band feed).
Adjust the paper top and bottom margins and the left
margin.
(Not used)
Using cut paper, determine the distance between the
XF sensor and the XR sensor.
Adjust the sponge position of the platen.
Check the adjustment result of the sponge position of
the platen.
(Not used)
Make the printer perform printing and check the slant
of the head. (Mechanism Adjustment)
Make the printer perform printing and adjust the
round trip printing position. (PG/1.2mm)
Copy the Bi-D adjustment value (PG/1.2mm) above
onto Bi-D2 (PG=0.7mm) and Bi-D3 (PG=2.1mm).
Make the printer perform printing and adjust the
round trip printing position. PG/0.7mm
Make the printer perform printing and adjust the
round trip printing position. PG/2.1mm
According to the result of the round trip print position
adjustment, shift the pattern by the theoretically
required number of dots. Then print the pattern and
make certain that the result of adjustment is proper.
Make the printer perform printing and adjust the oneway printing position.

See
p.231
p.232
–

Item
Test Pattern Printing
Clean Head
Counter Clear

Description
Head nozzle checking and adjustment pattern (Input
the serial number)
Clean the tube and head using cleaning liquid.
Clear various software counters.
[SelecType]

p.233

Adj :
?

Rear AD ?

p.236

Adj :
?

Edge AD ?

p.237
p.238

Adj :
?

p.239

Adj :
?

p.242

Adj :
?

–
p.243
p.244
p.245
–
p.246
p.248
p.251

[Pause] or [Items]

Frnt AD ?
*Not Used
Input Rank ?
Write D/A Value ?
*Not Used

Adj :
?

Cut Adj ?
*Not Used

Adj :
?

Head Slant ?

Adj :
?

Bi-d ?

Check Nozzle ?

Adj :
?

CopyParam.

Adj :
?

Check Skew ?

Adj :
?

Bi-d2 ?

Adj :
?

Feed Adj.+T&B ?

Adj :
?

Bi-d3 ?

Adj :
?

Top & Bottom ?

Adj :
?

Bi-d Chk. ?

Adj :
?

Head LR Adj.

AT MechaAdj. ?
*Not Used
Rear Sensor Pos. ?

Adj :
?

Test Print ?

p.251

Adj :
?

Platen Pos. ?

Adj :
?

Clean Head ?

p.252

Adj :
?

Platen Pos. Chk. ?

Adj :
?

Counter Clear ?

p.253

Self-diagnostic Function

p.256
p.257

Press Enter after the last item

Adj :
?

p.251

p.255

[Enter] Start

Adj :
?

See

Figure 5-17. Adjustment Menu Transition

230

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment
The optimum value for resistance of the Rear Sensor is automatically detected and
determined. (See Figure 5-18)

The values displayed are “D/A adjustment value”, “ON-OFF difference” and
“ON level” as named from left.
Appropriate values
ON-OFF difference: 040 or more
ON level:
095 or less
NOTE: The appropriate values are represented in hexadecimal notation.
Paper to be used:
A3-size Kimoto Micro Tracing Paper #300 LMB #F751 (1057723)

[Enter]
Detection error
end

Adjustment

Adjust again

[Enter]
Detection end
RearAD :
?

088

04A

040 or more

090
95 or less

Figure 5-18. Menu Transition for Rear AD Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKING PROCEDURE
1.

[Enter] Start

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Set paper:
Set a sheet of A3-size Kimoto Micro Tracing Paper #300 LMB #F751 (1057723) on
the HP side.

Display “Adj: Rear AD”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2

Detect the adjusted values:
[SelecType] → [Enter ↵ ]

Check the values for properness:
Check that the values are within the respective ranges specified above. If they are not
within the ranges, clean the sensor surface or replace it with a new one.

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

231

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment
The optimum value for resistance of the Edge Sensor is automatically detected and
determined. (See Figure 5-19)

The values are displayed in the order of “D/A adjustment value”, “ON-OFF
difference” and “ON level” from left to right.
Appropriate values
ON-OFF difference: 040 or more
ON level:
within 0E0 ∼ 0E8
NOTE: The appropriate values are represented in hexadecimal notation.
Paper to be used: A3 plain paper
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKING PROCEDURE
1.

[Enter] Start
[Enter]
Detection error
end

Adjustment

Adjust again

[Enter]
Detection end
EdgeAD :
?

0A1

0E0

040 or more

0E0
Within 0E0 ∼ 0E8

Figure 5-19. Menu Transition for Edge AD Adjustment

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Set paper:
Set A3-size plain paper on the HP side.

Display “Adj: Edge AD”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇]

Move the CR Unit:
By manual operation, move the Carriage so that the Edge Sensor is positioned at the
right edge of the A3 plain paper.

Detect the adjusted values:
[SelecType] → [Enter ↵ ]

Check the values for properness:
Check that the values are within the respective ranges specified above. If they are not
within the ranges, clean the sensor surface or replace it with a new one.

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

232

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.3 Input Rank
When the print head has been replaced, input as the head rank the information specific
to the head for setting the optimum drive voltage.
(See Figure 5-20)

Rank Input :
?

A label indicating a rank information code which consists of a numerical value
representing the characteristic values of the head has been affixed to the head already
mounted on the printer or the head newly installed (See Figure 5-24). Input this value
and write it in the Flash memory.

Rank Input :
?

When initial filling only is to be performed after replacing the
Damper ASSY, select and execute “Initial charge” in “Cleaning”
(p.259) menu.

C H E C K
P O IN T

QR Code ?

Panel ?

Press [SelecType] key to enter the mode where code
is input on the panel.

Figure 5-20. Menu Transition for Head Rank Input

5.2.3.3.1 QR Code Input

RankError

Input QR Code

RankError (D/P)

[Enter]

The dedicated QR code reader is necessary for “QR Code input”.
On the service site, select and execute “Input on Panel”.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Press [SelecType] key to enter the mode where QR
Code is received on line.

RankError (D)

Press [Pause] key to enter “Rank Input: QR Code”.
After ink filling, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.
Input correct values when an rank error has occurred.
The relationship between indications and errors is as follows:
Both dye and pigment are wrong.
Wrong rank for dye
Wrong rank for pigment

• “RankError (D/P)”:
• “RankError (D)”:
• “RankError (P)”:

Input value OK
Exc. EnterKey Fill

RankError (P)

The display is returned to “Rank Input” by pressing [Pause] key.
Remember, however, that the rank has already been updated.

[Enter]
Please Set Ink

Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed.
[Enter]

INK CHARGING

Figure 5-21. Menu Transition for QR Code Input

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

233

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.3.2 Input on Panel

Rank Input :

In this mode, select an input type to input a code by operating on the panel.
(See Figure 5-22)

INPUT LINE SELECTION

Dyestuff ?

Rank Input :

In this mode, select an input line on which you input the code by panel operation.

Pigment ?

(See Figure 5-23)

[SelecType]

To the mode for selecting an input line for dye

To the mode for selecting an input line for
pigment

Figure 5-22. Menu Transition of Panel Input

NOTE: For pigment code input, “Pigment-1” ~ “Pigment-3” are displayed.
Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key.

Input Line :
?
[Paper Feed ∇]

Dye-1
[Paper Feed ∆]
Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key.

Input Line :
?
[Paper Feed ∇]

Dye-2
[Paper Feed ∆]
Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key.

Input Line :
?

Dye-3

Figure 5-23. Menu Transition for Input Line Selection

Day

Pigment

Figure 5-24. Head Code Label Position

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

234

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Dye code input
In this mode, input a dye code by operating on the panel.
The cursor is displayed at the position where a digit is currently input.
(See Figure 5-25)

Dye–1
?

266432F

[Paper Feed ∆] Key : +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –

Dye–2

Press [Cleaning] key to shift the cursor (pointing out the input item) to the
right.
The cursor moves to the left end when [Cleaning] key is pressed at the right
end.
After ink charge, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.
Press the [Pause] key to return to the previous level in the hierarchy.
In doing so, note that the input code is valid but it has not been registered yet.

The cursor skips the item displayed with “\”.
At input for “Dye-1” or “Dye-2”, press the [Enter] key to enter the input line
selection mode, which is the immediately upper level in the hierarchy.

44WM2Q3

Dye–3
?

NU00G\\
[Enter]
Press [Pause] key for transition to the adjustment top menu.

Exc. EnterKey Fill
[Enter]

Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed.

Please Set Ink
[Enter]
INK CHARGING

Figure 5-25. Menu Transition of Code Input

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

235

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Pigment Code Input
After ink filling, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.Pigment Code
Input
In this mode, input a pigment code by operating on the panel.
The cursor is displayed at the position where a digit is currently input.

Press [Cleaning] key to shift the cursor (pointing out the input item) to the

right.
The cursor moves to the left end when [Cleaning] key is pressed at the right
end.
After ink charge, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.
Press the [Pause] key to return to the previous level in the hierarchy.
In doing so, note that the input code is valid but it has not been registered yet.
The cursor skips the item displayed with “\”.
At input for “Pigment-1” “Pigment-2” or “Pigment-3”, press the [Enter] key
to enter the input line selection mode, which is the immediately upper level in
the hierarchy.

Pigment–1
266432F

[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key: –

44WM2Q3

[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key: –

QVVWUVR

[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key: –

Pigment–2

Pigment–3

Pigment–4
S01S0\ \
[Enter]
Exc.EnterKey Fill

5.2.3.4 Write D/A Value
C A U T IO N

[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key: –

Press [Pause] key for transition to the adjustment top menu.

[Enter]

Stylus Pro 7600/9600 does not incorporate this function. Do not try
to execute this operation on the service site.

Please Set Ink

Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed.
[Enter]

INK CHARGING

Figure 5-26. Menu Transition of Code Input

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

236

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.5 Check Nozzle
Check the print result to see if the head nozzles discharge ink properly and if there is
any alignment error. If ink discharging from the nozzles is faulty or there is any
alignment error, execute cleaning in this item and perform checking again. If there is
no ink remaining, the printer requests the installation of ink cartridges. When paper has
been set and there is ink, the printer prints the head nozzle check pattern.

[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]

Printing Pattern

Printing operation is carried out even when the ink cartridges have
been installed but ink filling has not been performed.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Printing end
Nozzle Check End
?

Head Nozzle Check Pattern
Check Item
•
•
•
•
•

Cleaning: Standard

Nozzle ink discharge (skipping, not continuous, meandering)
Satellite
Timing fence
Vertical nozzle alignment check
Horizontal nozzle alignment check

Output Pattern

[Enter] Key →To "Cutter"
[Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle"

[Enter] Key →Cleaning executed
[Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle"

[Enter] Key →Pattern output
[Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle"

Table 5-20. Pattern
Pattern

Description

Nozzle ink
The pattern is printed in the order of K/C/M/Y/LC/LM/LK from left to right.
discharge
Pattern drawing method 360dpi, Uni-D, VSD1, 240CPS, Large
(See Figure 5-28)
HeadRank ID:
266432F
06E424E
44WM2Q3 4BUTWTU
NU00G
QVVWUVR
S01S0
Horizontal nozzle The pattern is printed in the order of K/LK/C/LC/M/LM/Y from left to right.
alignment check Pattern drawing method 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD1,Large
(See Figure 5-29)
360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Large
360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Small
360dpi,Uni-D,190CPS,VSD4,Large
Vertical nozzle
The pattern is printed in the order of K/LK/C/LC/M/LM/Y from left to right.
alignment check Pattern drawing method 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD1,Small/Middle/Large
(See Figure 5-30)
360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Small/Middle/Large
360dpi,Uni-D,190CPS,VSD4,Small/Middle/Large

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

Figure 5-27. Menu Transition for Head Nozzle Check

Figure 5-28. Pattern (Nozzle Ink Discharge Check)

Figure 5-29. Pattern (Horizontal Nozzle Alignment Check)

Figure 5-30. Pattern (Vertical Nozzle Alignment Check)

237

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.6 Check Skew
Feed paper by a specified distance (specify the distance on the panel), read the paper
edge position before and after paper feed with the edge sensor and check the difference
between the two readings. (See Figure 5-31)
After completion of initial operation, input the value for paper feed distance. Then the
Edge Sensor will detect the paper left edge (capping side) and the printer will display
the difference between the positions before and after paper feed.
If a paper recognition error before or after paper feed occurs or if the Rear Sensor
detects “No Paper” during paper feed, the display shows paper error. Then press the
appropriate key to leave this item.

Check Skew :
?

1.0m
[Enter]

[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
* Setting possible in increments of 0.1 m (10.0m ∼ 0.1m)

Exc. Skew
Normal completion of paper edge detection after paper
transport by the preset distance
SkewResult:
?

NOTE: The printer will leave this item once the [Pause] key is pressed on the
control panel while the printer is not processing.

+0.010mm

+ for Home side, - for opposite side

Figure 5-31. Menu Transition for Skew Checking

At the first detection of the paper left edge, the reference position for paper
skew judgment is determined in the firmware.

The “Paper Out” LED blinks or lights up if the paper detection error has
occurred. In such cases, raise the lever once and then execute the same
operation again.
Press the [Pause] key for transition to “Adj: Check Skew”.
No panel key works during execution of skew checking.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment

When the skew check result is “99.999mm”, the paper is in the
following conditions. Clear the cause and execute the check again.
1. The paper width detection indicates that one of the right and
left edge positions of the paper is different from that by the
previous detection by ±3 mm or more.
2. When the head is at the home position, the distance from the
row of K nozzles to the paper detected position on the home
side is 142.0 mm or less. (The paper is too close to the home
position.)
Lever up or cover opening was performed during paper feed
operation.

Self-diagnostic Function

238

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.7 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment
For paper transport, correct the distance and adjust the top & bottom margins and side
margin (printing start position). (See page 241)

Enter:Adjust
Pause:Do not adjust

T&B Adjust?
[Enter]

Feed Adjustment (Paper feed distance compensation):
Make the printer print a line in the paper feed direction, input the distance and
determine the PF encoder resolution inside the firmware.
The reference length for this determination has been set to 1 m.
(Only the input of a compensation value without printing is possible.)
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.

[Enter]
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

Printing Pattern

Resolution: 0.1mm

Adjust

Do not adjust. Or 2nd or subsequent printing

Adj Top & Bottom:
Conduct printing and paper cutting and input the distances between the Front
Sensor and the Head, between the Cutter and the Head and between the Edge
Sensor and the Head (writing start position).
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.

Resolution: 0.1mm
Side Margin Adjustment (Print Start Position Adjustment):
Conduct printing and paper cutting, then measure and input the side margin.
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.

Adjustment resolution: 0.1mm
Menu transition is shown at right and adjustment patterns are shown on the next page.

Top Length :
?
[SelecType]

Press the [Pause] key on the compensation value input screen, and the display
will change to “Feed Adj.+T&B”.
Press the [Pause] key on the “Top Length” or “Bottom Length” input screen,
and the display will change to the “Bottom Length” or “Side Margin” input
screen, respectively.
“Top Length”, “Bottom Length” and “Side Margin” can be adjusted only in
the T&B adjustment mode for the first printing.

3.0mm

Bottom Length :
?
14.0mm
[SelecType]

V Length :
?

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

3.0mm

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

+1000.0mm

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

Side Margin:
?
[SelecType]

[SelecType]

Adjustment

[Pause]

[Enter] Adjust Print

[Enter]
[Pause] Key →To “Rear Sensor Pos.”

[Enter]

Figure 5-32. Menu Transition for Feed Correction +T&B Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

239

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Adjustment pattern
Adjustment items
• Top margin (Front Sensor position)
• Bottom margin (cutter position)
• Side margin (Writing start position)

Paper feed length:
1000 mm

Pattern drawing method:
•
•
•
•

Length:
Printing direction:
Resolution:
Printing speed:

1000mm
Uni-D
360 dpi
240 CPS

Table below specifies the positions where the NormalDot2 vertical line patterns are
drawn.
Table 5-21. Positions where Vertical Line Patterns Are Drawn

Adjustment

Coordinate in units of 360 dpi

In mm

1417

About 100

2834

About 200

4251

About 300

5669

About 400

7086

About 500

8583

About 600

9921

About 700

11338

About 800

12755

About 900

14173

About 1000

Self-diagnostic Function

240

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

FEED CORRECTION + T&B ADJUSTMENT

Display “Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∆] x6

Print the pattern.
[SelecType >] →[Enter ↵] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed (See Figure
5-32)

Measure the top margin:
Using a measuring rule, measure the top margin. Input the measured value on the
panel.

Measure the bottom margin:
Using a measuring rule, measure the bottom margin. Input the measured value on the
panel.

Measure the side margin:
Using a measuring rule, measure the side margin. Input the measured value on the
panel.

Measure the feed correction value:
Using a measuring rule (1000 mm) and the scale stopper, measure the longitudinal line
length. Input the measured value on the panel.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Paper Feed Direction

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Longitudinal line length (1000.0mm)

Bottom margin (14.0mm)

The central print pattern among the patterns as shown above is
intended for use as a datum line on which the measuring rule is
to be placed.
Even if you have left the “Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment”
mode by mistake, you can restore the relevant adjustment
display without reprinting the pattern, by pressing [Paper
Source <] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed.

Top margin (3.0mm)

Side margin
(3.0mm)

Figure 5-33. Print Pattern for Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

241

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.8 Top & Bottom Adjustment

Printing Pattern

Conduct printing and paper cutting and input the distances between the Front Sensor
and the Head, between the Cutter and the Head and between the Edge Sensor 0 and the
Head (printing start position) to adjust the top, bottom and side margins.

Press the [Pause] key on the compensation value input screen, and the display
will change to “Top and Button”.
Press the [Enter} key on the input screen for “Top Length” or “Bottom
Length”, and the display will change to the input screen for “Bottom Length”
or “Side Margin”, respectively.
Press the [Enter] key on the input screen for “Side Margin”, and the display
will change to “Rear Sensor Position”.

Correction pattern of distances between the Front Sensor and the Head, between

Bottom Length :
?
[SelecType]
Side Margin:
?
[SelecType]

Adjustment items:

Top margin (Front Sensor position)
Bottom margin (cutter position)
Side margin (printing start position)
Printing method:
Black 1 pass, Uni-D mode 180 dpi
Pattern drawing method: Printing direction:
Uni-D
Resolution:
360dpi
Printing speed:
240CPS
Dot:
NormalDot2

3.0mm
[Enter]

14.0mm
[Enter]

3.0mm
[Enter]

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

Figure 5-34. Menu Transition for Top & Bottom Adjustment

Paper Feed
Direction

the Cutter and the Head

Top Length :
?
[SelecType]

Bottom margin (14.0mm)

Top margin (3.0mm)

Side margin
(3.0mm)

Figure 5-35. Print Pattern for Top & Bottom Adjustment

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

242

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.9 Rear Sensor Position
Make this adjustment to detect the length of cut paper correctly.

Please Set Cut Sheet

To ensure a maximum printable area relative to the paper tail end, adjust the Rear
Sensor position inside the firmware with the nozzle position as the reference.
Set an A3 sheet in the portrait position, make the printer draw a horizontal line (black
1-dot line) at 14 mm from the sheet tail end. Then measure the distance from the sheet
tail end to the line and input the measured value as the compensation value.
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.

Resolution: 0.1mm
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, NormalDot2

Set cut paper and press [Enter]
After printing, drop the paper.

Printing Pattern
Printing end
Paper Width :
?

[Pause] Key →To “Rear Sensor Pos.”
297.0mm
[Enter]

NOTE 1: This adjustment is necessary in the manufacturing process. After that,
however, execution of this item is not necessary even once Feed
Correction is made.
2: When this item is selected, the printer requests setting of cut paper
irrespective of the presence or absence of paper.

RearSen. Pos. :
?

14.0mm

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

Figure 5-36. Menu Transition for Rear Sensor Position Adjustment

As the Rear Sensor position, measure the distance between the sheet tail end
and the drawn line and input the measured value.
Press the [Enter] key on the “Rear Sensor Pos.” input screen, and the display
will change to “Test Print”.

Rear Sensor position correction

REAR SENSOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1.

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Paper Feed Direction

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Adj: Rear Sensor Pos.”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∆] x5

Print the pattern:
Set a sheet of A3-size plain paper (portrait) and press [Enter ↵ ]. (See Figure 5-36)

Measure the distance:
Using a measuring rule, measure the distance. Input the measured value on the panel.
(See Figure 5-37)
Figure 5-37. Rear Sensor Position Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

243

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.10 Platen Position (Sponge Position) Adjustment

[Enter] Adjust Print

Detect the position of each sponge on the platen. (See Figure 5-38)

[Enter]
Printing Pattern

For Platen R, input the deviation of the printed pattern from the left end of the
frame in which the sponge nearest to the 1st home is embedded.
For Platen L, input the deviation of the printed pattern from the left end of the
frame in which the 7th sponge counted from the home for Stylus Pro 7600 or
the 9th sponge for Stylus Pro 9600 is embedded.
Input a negative value for a deviation toward the home or a positive value for
a deviation toward the side opposite to the home.
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large

Printing end
Platen R:
?
0.0mm
[Enter]
Platen L:
?
0.0mm
[Enter]
Adj :
?
Platen Pos. Chk.

PLATEN POSITION (SPONGE POSITION) ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

Figure 5-38. Menu Transition for Platen Position Adjustment

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Adj: Sponge Pos.”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∆] x4

Print the pattern:
[Enter ↵ ] x2

Measure the platen position R:
Using a measuring rule, measure the distance from the left end of the frame in which
the sponge nearest to the 1st home is embedded to the longitudinal line of the printed
pattern.
Input the measured value on the panel.(See Figure 5-39)

Measure the platen position L:
Using a measuring rule, measure the distance from the left end of the frame in which
the 7th sponge counted from the home for Stylus Pro 7600 or the 9th sponge for
Stylus Pro 9600 is embedded to the longitudinal line of the printed pattern.
Input the measured value on the panel.(See Figure 5-39)

Platen Position L

Platen Position R

Measure this deviation
+side

– side

Measure this deviation
+ side

– side

Platen position (counted from home side)
Stylus Pro 7600: 7th⁄
Stylus Pro 9600: 9th

Figure 5-39. Print Pattern for Platen Position Adjustment

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

244

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.11 Platen Position Checking

[Enter] Adjust Print

Check the adjusted position of each sponge on the platen.

Make certain that the printed pattern agrees with the right and left positions of
each sponge position.

Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large

[Enter]
Printing Pattern
Printing end
Platen Pos. R:
?
0.0mm
[Enter]
Adj :
Cut Adj.

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.

Figure 5-40. Menu Transition for Platen Position Checking

Figure 5-41. Print Pattern for Platen Position Checking

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

245

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.12 Head Slant Checking
Check the print result to see if the head is slanting.
If there is a slant, make the “Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment)”
(p.247).

Slant Check Pattern
Check Item: Head slant
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, small

Check these joint points for head slant

3mm

Adjustment Resolution: 12µm or less
Adjustment Range: 38 steps

3mm

[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]

Figure 5-43. Slant Check Pattern
Printing Pattern
Printing end

[Enter] Key →To “Bi-d”
[Pause] Key →To “Head Slant”

Slant Check End
[Paper Feed ∇]

[Paper Feed ∆]
[Enter] Key → Pattern output
[Pause] Key →To “Head Slant”

Output Pattern
[Paper Feed ∇]

[Paper Feed ∆]

Figure 5-42. Menu Transition of Head Slant

Adjustment

Figure 5-44. Head Slant Check Printout

Self-diagnostic Function

246

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

HEAD SLANT CHECKING PROCEDURE

Head motion by Head Adjustment Lever operation:
Lever Up: Magenta → lower / Black → rise
Lever Down: Magenta → rise / Black → lower

C H E C K
P O IN T

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Adj: Head Slant”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x8

Print the pattern.

Check the pattern: (See Figure 5-43)
Check to see if the black horizontal lines and the magenta horizontal lines are not in
alignment. When they are in alignment, leave the head slant checking mode by
pressing the [Paper Source] button two times. If they are not in alignment, follow the
procedure as described below.

Tighten two screws

HEAD SLANT ADJUSTMENT (MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT)
1.

After printing the head slant check pattern, with “Do you correct slant?” displayed on
the LCD, move the Carriage Unit to an appropriate place for work.

Loosen the right and left screws for the Head Holding Plate. (See Figure 5-45)

Move the Head Adjustment Lever in consideration of the output pattern.
(See Figure 5-46)

Tighten the left screw for the Head Holding Plate and move the Carriage Unit to the
home position.
C A U T IO N

Do not forget to tighten the two screws for the Head Holding

Cutter

Figure 5-45. Head Slant Adjustment 1/2

Lever up
→ Black down/magenta up

Plate.

After making the head slant adjustment, be sure to return the
Carriage Unit to the home position.
If you proceed to the next step (Printing the pattern) with the
Carriage Unit remaining in the place for work, the cutter edge
can be damaged.
5.

Print the pattern again, check to see if there is any misalignment and if any, repeat the
adjustment from step 1.

Head Adjustment Lever

Lever down
→ Black up/magenta down

Figure 5-46. Head Slant Adjustment 2/2

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

247

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)
Adjust the round trip print position.
Make adjustments of “240CPS VSD1”, “240CPS VSD2” and “190CPS VSD4” for
each color. This Bi-D adjustment is of PG=1.2mm. For PG=0.7mm (Bi-D2) and
PG=2.1mm (Bi-D3), make adjustment in other menus, as required.
Store the adjustment values for each line of nozzles (21 kinds of values) in the Flash
ROM.
For adjustment, conduct Bi-D printing and from the print results, input the difference
between the CW print position and the CCW print position.
The procedure and print patterns for round trip print position adjustment are shown on
the next page.
Table 5-22. Adjustment Item List
Item

Bi-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD1

BiD 240,V2

Bi-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD2

BiD 190,V4

Bi-D Adjustment 190CPS VSD4

Adjustment resolution: 8.8 µm
Adjustable range: ± 96 step adjustment possible
Be sure to make adjustment for K first and then for other

C H E C K
P O IN T

BiD 240, V2
?

BiD 240, V4
?

BiD End
?

240V1 K PRN
?
[SelecType]
240V1 COL PRN
?

Contents

BiD 240,V1

[SelecType]

BiD 240, V1
?

colors.

After adjustment, be sure to perform “Round Trip Print
Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking (p.252)”.

Press the [Enter] key with “***K PRN” displayed, and the K pattern will be
printed.

Press the [Enter] key with “***COL PRN” displayed, and the block pattern
will be printed in colors other than K.
When “***V1 K” is displayed, input the adjustment value for K (-96 ~ +96).
When each of “***V1 K2” ~ “***V1 Y” is displayed, input the pattern
number (0 ~ 8) for the aligned pattern.
Press the [Enter] key with “BiD End” displayed, and the mode changes to
“Adj: Bi-d Chk.”

[SelecType]
240V1 K
?
30
[SelecType] or [Enter]
240V1 K2
?
4
[SelecType] or [Enter]
240V1 C
?
6
[SelecType] or [Enter]
240V1 M
?
3
[SelecType] or [Enter]
240V1 LC
?
5
[SelecType] or [Enter]
240V1 LM
?
8
[SelecType] or [Enter]
240V1 Y
?
2
[SelecType] or [Enter]

[Enter]

Printing Pattern
Printing end

[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –

Figure 5-47. Menu Transition for Bi-D Adjustment

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

248

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

BI-D ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1.

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Adj: Bi-d”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x9

Print the 240, V1 black line pattern:
Press [Enter ↵ ] when “240V1 K PRN” is displayed. (See Figure 5-47)

Check the test pattern (240, V1 K)
Check to see if the line by the first pass and the line by the second pass are not in
alignment.
When they are in alignment, proceed to the next step. If they are not in alignment,
make the adjustment by referring to the procedure described below. (See Figure
5-49)

K (Black Line) Adjustment Procedure
1. Display the value input screen “240V1 K:

xx”:
After the test pattern has been output, press [SelecType >] one time when
“240V1 COL PRN” is displayed on the LCD.
2. Input the value:
In consideration of the output pattern, input a value in the range of +99∼–99
and press [Enter ↵ ].
3. Output the pattern again:
[SelecType >] → [SelecType >] → [Enter ↵ ]
4. Check the pattern:
Check the output pattern and repeat the K (black line) adjustment until the line
by the first pass and the line by the second pass are in alignment.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Figure 5-48. Bi-D Adjustment Patterns
2nd pass
(– side)

Be sure to make adjustment for K first and then for other colors.
Each color pattern has been set based on K. Therefore, if the K
value is not correct, you can not make adjustments for color
patterns correctly.

2nd pass
(+ side)

1st pass

Enlarged

Figure 5-49. Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D) Adjustment (Black)

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

249

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Print the 240, V1 color pattern:
Press [Enter ↵ ] when “240V1 COL PRN” is displayed. (See Figure 5-47)

Check the 240, V1 color pattern:
Of the 9 color blocks for each color, find out a pattern free from a gap or overlap
and make certain that the number on the LCD is identical with the number shown
above the pattern.
If the number on the LCD is different, input the pattern number.

Upon completion of the 240 V1 adjustment, make the adjustments for 240 V2 and
190V4 the same way.
C H E C K
P O IN T

After completion of the adjustments above, be sure to make the “Round
Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).

Figure 5-50. Color Pattern for Bi-D Adjustment

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

250

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.14 Parameter Copying
In actual processing, at each point when the adjusted value is determined in
“5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248), the
compensation value obtained by computation is copied into each area. Actually,
therefore, copy processing by this function is not required. (See Figure 5-51)

Copy Param. ?
[Enter]
WAIT

5.2.3.15 Bi-D2 Adjustment (PG=0.7mm)
C H E C K
P O IN T

When this adjustment is to be performed, use the following paper
since setting must be made for PG=0.7mm.
Paper to be used: Authentic glossy paper
(Example: Photo Glossy Paper #MCSRxxR2)

Figure 5-51. Menu Transition for Parameter Copying

Make this adjustment, as required, after executing “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).
The adjustment procedure is the same as that for “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).

5.2.3.16 Bi-D3 Adjustment (PG=2.1mm)
C H E C K
P O IN T

When this adjustment is to be performed, use the following paper
since setting must be made for PG=2.1mm.
Paper to be used: Authentic plain paper roll (PMSPxxR6)

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

251

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.17 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking
According to the result of the round trip print position adjustment, shift the pattern by
the theoretically required number of dots. Then print the pattern and check the print
result.
Check to see if the central patterns are in alignment and if not, perform the Bi-D
adjustment again.
The menu transition for Bi-D adjustment checking and print patterns are shown at
right.

[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
Printing Pattern

Figure 5-52. Menu Transition for Bi-D Adjustment Checking

NOTE: Figure 5-53 shows the print patterns for PG1.2mm. The patterns for
PG0.7mm and PG2.1mm will also be printed.

Pattern drawing method: #1, #2

360dpi, Bi-D, 240CPS, VSD1, Large
#8, #9 360dpi, Bi-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large
#15, #16 360dpi, Bi-D, 190CPS, VSD4, Large

Figure 5-53. Print Patterns for Bi-D Adjustment Checking

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

252

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.18 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment)
Correct the print position for one-way printing.

[Enter] Adjust Print

Make adjustments of “240CPS VSD1”, “240CPS VSD2” and “190CPS VSD4” for
each color.
Store the adjustment values for each line of nozzles (18 kinds of values) in the Flash
ROM.
For adjustment, conduct Uni-D printing and from the print results, input the
compensation value.
The menu transition for Uni-D adjustment and print patterns are shown below.
Table 5-23. Head Gap Adjustment Items
Item

Contents

Gap 240,V1

Uni-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD1

Gap 240,V2

Uni-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD2

Gap 190,V4

Uni-D Adjustment 190CPS VSD4

Adjustment resolution: 8.8 µm
Adjustable range: ± 62 step adjustment possible
Pattern drawing method:
360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD1, Large (240V1 selected)
360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large (240V2 selected)
360dpi, Uni-D, 190CPS, VSD4, Large (190V4 selected)
Press the [Enter] key after inputting the adjusted values and pattern number,
and the pattern will be printed only when updated values have been input.
When the values have not been updated, the display will change to the next
input screen.
When the [Enter] key is pressed with “Gap End” displayed, the display
changes to “Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B”.
C H E C K
P O IN T

The adjustment is not required for any of #1, #8 and #15, which are
black lines.

[Pause]

[Enter]
Printing Pattern
Printing end
Gap 240, V1
?

Gap 240, V2
?

Gap 190, V4
?

Gap End
?

240V1 LK :
?
[SelecType]
240V1 C :
?
[SelecType]
240V1 LC :
?
[SelecType]
240V1 M :
?
[SelecType]
240V1 LM :
?
[SelecType]
240V1 Y :
?
[SelecType]

Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”

Figure 5-54. Menu Transition for Uni-D Adjustment

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

253

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

PROCEDURE FOR HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT (UNI-D ADJUSTMENT)
1.

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Adj: Uni-D”:
[Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x11

Print the pattern.
[SelecType >] →[Enter ↵] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed
(See Figure 5-55)

Check the pattern:
Make certain that the black lines and color lines are not out of alignment.
When they are not out of alignment, leave the head gap adjustment mode by pressing
[SelecType >] two times. If they are out of alignment, follow the instructions given
below:

If out of alignment
1. Select the gap item in question:
Select “Gap 240,V1”, “Gap 240,V2” or “Gap 190,V4” by means of
[Paper Feed ∇] and enter the adjustment menu for the selected item by pressing
[SelecType >].
2. Adjust the color position in question:
Select the relevant color by means of [SelecType >], and in consideration of
the printed pattern, input the compensation value on the panel.
Shift direction (black line as reference):
(Compensation setting: in increments of 1/2880 inch)
Shift to the right = Input a (+) value
Shift to the left = Input a (-) value
3. Check again:
Check the pattern output again, and when the lines are in alignment, leave the
head gap adjustment mode by pressing [SelecType >] two times. If the lines are
out of alignment, repeat inputting a value.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment

Even when you have left the head gap adjustment menu, you can
display the menu for an relevant item by means of [SelecType >].
Therefore, there is no need of outputting the comprehensive
patterns again.

Self-diagnostic Function

Color line
(– side)

Color line
(+ side§)

Black line

Enlarged View

Figure 5-55. Print Pattern (Head Gap Adjustment)

254

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.19 Test Pattern Printing

Print :
?

You can print adjustment patterns and check each adjustment item.
(See Figure 5-56)

Check Ptn. ?

[SelecType] Key → To "Printing Pattern"
Printing end→
To serial number input screen

[Paper Feed ∆]

Check Ptn.:
Prints all the adjustment patterns (including the adjustment variables list)
(Time required: about 20 minutes)

Check Ptn. 2:
Of the patterns to be output by “Check Ptn.”, the first pattern to the head gap
adjustment (Uni-D) pattern will be output.
(Time required: about 5 minutes)

Check Ptn. 3:
Of the patterns to be output by “Check Ptn.”, the Bi-D adjustment pattern to the
adjustment variables will be output.
(Time required: about 15 minutes)
Adj. Variable:
Outputs the list of the setting compensation values (variables) determined by various
adjustments.

Press the [Cleaning] key on a serial number input screen, and the display will
change to the next screen.
(For example, from “No.1: PEG**000000”, the display changes to “No.1:
PEG**000000”.)
Press the [Cleaning] key on the “Print Adj.Pattern” screen, and the display
will change to the serial number input screen “No.1: PEG**000000”.

Print :
?

[Paper Feed ∇]
[SelecType] Key → To "Printing Pattern"
Printing end→
To serial number input screen
Check Ptn. 2 ?

[Paper Feed ∆]
Print :
?

[Paper Feed ∇]
[SelecType] Key → To "Printing Pattern"
Printing end→
To serial number input screen
Check Ptn. 3 ?

[Paper Feed ∆]
Print :
?
No.1 :
?
No.2 :
?
No.3 :
?

[Paper Feed ∇]

Adj.Variable ?
[SelecType]
PEG∗∗000000
[Enter]
PEG01∗∗0000
[Enter]
PEG0123∗∗00
[Enter]

No.4 :
?

PEG012345∗∗
[Enter]
[Enter] Adjust Print

[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
*2Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
[Paper Feed ∆]Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.

[Enter]
Print Adj.Pattern
[Enter]
Printing Pattern

After printing, the display changes to
[Clean Head].

Figure 5-56. Menu Transition for Test Pattern Printing

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

255

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.20 Clean Head
When Head replacement is required on the service site, execute ink discharge
(“Ink Blowing”) in this mode beforehand.

Set Opener I/C
[Pause]

Install draining cartridges.[Enter]

Ink Blowing

Ink Dischg. Skip

Completion of ink discharge

[Enter]

Set Cleaning I/C

C H E C K
P O IN T

If transition in the sequence can not take place for some reason, the
display shows “Reset ** I/C”.

[Pause]

Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter]

Head Cleaning

Head Wash Skip

Completion of cleaning liquid filling

[Enter]

Set Opener I/C (2)

[Pause]

Install draining cartridges.[Enter]

When replacing the print head, execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) by using this
function.

Dischrg. washfluid
(2)

Ink Dischg. Skip (2)

Completion of cleaning liquid filling

[Enter]

Set Cleaning I/C
(2)

[Pause]

Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter]

C H E C K
P O IN T

Prepare seven draining cartridges, which are necessary for this
work.
“Opener I/C” in the menu display must be understood as
“Draining Cartridge”.

Head Cleaning (2)

Head Wash Skip (2)

Completion of cleaning liquid filling

[Enter]

Set Opener I/C (3)

[Pause]

Install draining cartridges.[Enter]

Dischrg. washfluid
(3)

Ink Dischg. Skip (3)

Completion of cleaning liquid filling

[Enter]

Set Cleaning I/C
(3)

Procedure:
In the flow as shown at right, upon completion of the first step for ink discharge,
enter the branch for “Head Wash Skip” and “[Enter] End” to skip the other
operations.

[Pause]

Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter]

Head Cleaning (3)

Head Wash Skip (3)

Completion of cleaning liquid filling

[Enter]

Set Opener I/C (4)

[Pause]

Install draining cartridges.[Enter]

Dischrg. washfluid
(4)

Ink Dischg. Skip (4)

Completion of cleaning liquid filling

[Enter]

Please Remove I/C
(5)

[Pause]

Remove cartridges and press [Enter]

Execute Suction
(5)
Completion of cleaning liquid filling

Adj : Counter Clear

[Enter] End
[Enter]

Figure 5-57. Menu Transition for Head Cleaning

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

256

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.3.21 Counter Clear

Table 5-24. Counters to be Cleared and Their Initial Values (continued)

This function is to be used to initialize each counter value at the
factory before shipment. Never use this function on the service site.
(If you operate, all the counter values concerning ink system control
will be lost and no operation or control after that will be carried out
correctly.)

C A U T IO N

[Description below is given only for information]
Table 5-24 indicates the counters to be cleared and their initial values and Figure 5-58
shows menu transition for counter clearing.
Table 5-24. Counters to be Cleared and Their Initial Values
Counters to be Cleared
Protection Counter A
Protection Counter A Work
Protection Counter D
Protection Counter D Work
Protection Counter B
Protection Counter B Work
Ink Volume Counter Rb
Ink Volume Counter Rx
Ink Volume Counter Rz
Consumed Ink Counter K
Consumed Ink Counter LK
Consumed Ink Counter C
Consumed Ink Counter M
Consumed Ink Counter LC
Consumed Ink Counter LM
Consumed Ink Counter Y
CL1 Cumulative Counter
CL2 Cumulative Counter
CL3 Cumulative Counter
HP and Other Cumulative Counters
Timer CL Cumulative Counter
Yellow Shot Counter 1
Yellow Shot Counter 2
Accumulated Prints Timer
Timer for Timer CL Execution 1
Timer for Timer CL Execution 2
CL Flag
Initial Charge Counter
Periodic Pseudo-Vacuum Flag

Adjustment

Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 (Not during CL)
1 (Not completed)
(0)

Counters to be Cleared
Ink Type
Ink OUT Judge Counter
Vacuum Compensation Coefficient
Discharge Compensation Coefficient
Compensation Permission Flag H
Cartridge Midway Replacement Flag
CSIC Storage Area for Printer Body
Cumulative Ink Consumption
Cumulative Paper Consumption
Ink Consumption during Nozzle Check
Paper Consumption during Nozzle Check
Counters to be Cleared
Y Ink Cumulative Discharge Counter
Previous Y Ink Cumulative Discharge Counter
Y Ink Cumulative Discharge at Previous Ultrasonic Cleaning
Y Ink Cumulative Discharge at Previous Periodic CL2 Execution
CSIC Control Flag
Maintenance Menu Ink Related Count 1
Timer Initial Charge Execution Count
Initial Charge Previous Execution time
Timer Initial Charge Flag
Maintenance tank ink consumption (CSIC)
Head hot error flag
Borderless ink counter
Timer CL4 cumulative counter
Pump counter P
Maintenance tank detection
CL5 cumulative counter
CL1 count with cleaning prohibited (7 colors)
Timer CL4 flag
Time having elapsed since previous K ink replacement sequence
CL4 cumulative counter
K ink counter for ink system processing
Ink replacement sequence counter
Ink type changed MB flag
Previous count-down ratio
Initial charge executed MB flag
Initial charge executed MB flag

Initial Value
0 (Neutral)
(0)
(90)
(90)
(0)
1 (Replaced)
FFh
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(0)
(0)
1 (All valid)
1 for date 0 for others
(0)
(0)
(0)
0
0 (Not error)
0
0
0
1 (ON)
0
0
0 (Not being executed)
0xffffffff
0
0
0
0 (Not changed)
0 (%)
0 (Not executed)
0

Note : The numeric value in ( ) represents the initial value in the area which firmware does not
use.

Self-diagnostic Function

257

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

After counter clearing, turn off the power once and then turn it on again to
start the printer in the normal mode. Then the display as shown in Figure 5-59
will appear when the counter clearing has been executed successfully.
(However, only when the covers are closed, the Paper Set Lever in the down
position and the ink lever is in the up position)

Reset Counter?

[Enter]
After printing, display changes to “Check Skew”

Wait for a while

Figure 5-58. Menu Transition for Counter Clearing
SET INK
CARTRIDGE

Figure 5-59. Display after Counter Clearing

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

258

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.4 Cleaning
Execute head cleaning.
Table 5-25 lists cleaning items and Figure 5-60 shows cleaning menu transition.

Cleaning :
?

Table 5-25. Cleaning Items
Item

Display

Normal cleaning cycle KK0

Minimum vacuum

Normal cleaning cycle KK1

Cleaning: Std. KK1

Maximum vacuum

Cleaning: Std. KK2

Maximum vacuum
(With rubbing)

Initial charge

Cleaning: Init. Fill

Initial filling

Cleaning :
?

After replacing the Damper ASSY and/or ink tube, if ink charging
is to be performed without replacing the print head, execute “Initial
charge” in this menu.

Cleaning :
?

Execute test pattern printing and/or adjustment variables printing.
Table 5-26 lists printing items and Figure 5-61 shows printing menu transition.

Display

Print :
?
[Paper Feed ∇]
Print :
?
[Paper Feed ∇]

Table 5-26. Printing Items
Contents

Test Pattern

Print: Check Ptn.

Test pattern printing

Adjustment Variable

Print: Adj.Variable

Adjustment variables printing

Test Pattern 2

Print: Check Ptn.2

Test pattern printing

Test Pattern 3

Print: Check Ptn.3

Test pattern printing

Leak Check *

Print: Leak Check Ptn.

Air leak check pattern printing

Print :
?
[Paper Feed ∇]
Print :
?

Note "*": Once you have removed or replaced the Head, Damper, Ink Holder and/or
Ink tube, execute this mode and make certain that there is no dot missing.
If dot missing occurs, check the coupling screw tightening torque and tube
insertion and check for air leak.

Adjustment

Cleaning

End

[Enter]
Std. KK1

End

[Enter]
Std. KK2

Cleaning

End

[Enter]
Init.Fill

Cleaning

INK CHARGING

End

Figure 5-60. Cleaning Menu Transition

5.2.5 Print

Item

Std. KK0

Contents

Cleaning: Std. KK0

Normal cleaning cycle KK2

C H E C K
P O IN T

[Enter]

Self-diagnostic Function

[SelecType]
Check Ptn. ?
Printing end
[Paper Feed ∆]
[SelecType]
Check Ptn. 2 ?
Printing end
[Paper Feed ∆]
[SelecType]
Check Ptn. 3 ?
Printing end
[Paper Feed ∆]
Adj.Variable ?
[SelecType]

[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]

Printing Pattern

Figure 5-61. Printing Menu Transition

259

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.6 Parameter
This item relates to update of adjustment parameters.
Table 5-27 lists parameter items and Figure 5-62 shows parameter menu transition.

[SelecType]

Parameter :
?

Initialize ?

Parameter :
?

Update ?

Parameter :
?

Display. ?

To parameter initialization

Table 5-27. Parameter Items
Item

Contents

Initialize

Initialize adjustment parameters

Update

Input adjustment parameter values

Display

Display adjustment parameter values

[SelecType]

To parameter update

To parameter display

Figure 5-62. Parameter Menu Transition

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

260

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.6.1 Parameter Initialize

Table 5-28.
Item

Execute parameter initialization.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Without replacing the relevant parts, never use this function to
initialize the counter; otherwise, control after that will not agree
with the condition of the printer mechanism.

Waste ink record initialization
CR motor record initialization
PF motor record initialization
Lever record initialization
Cover record initialization
Ink lever record initialization

Contents
Waste ink counter
CR motor round trip count
PF motor travel
Paper presser lever up and down count
Cover Open/Close count
Ink lever up and down count

Table 5-28.
Item

All initialization

Capping position initialization
PF resolution initialization
Serial number initialization
Head record initialization
Wiper record initialization
Rubbing record initialization

Adjustment

Contents
CR motor round trip count
PF motor travel
Head ink discharge count (Each color)
Cleaning count
The number of printed sheets
Ink volume counter
Waste ink counter
Cutting count
Gap adjustment value
CR origin compensation value (Capping position)
PF origin compensation value
Head slide origin compensation value
Front sensor position compensation value
Rear sensor position compensation value
Edge sensor longitudinal position compensation value
Edge sensor lateral position compensation value
Cutter longitudinal position compensation value
Flushing position
PF distance correction 1 ~ 3
Serial number
Wiping count
Rubbing count
Ink tube round trip count
Paper presser lever up and down count
Cover Open/Close count
Ink lever up and down count
CR origin compensation value (Capping position)
PF distance correction1 ~ 3
Serial number
Head ink discharge count (Each color))
Wiping count
Rubbing count

Self-diagnostic Function

261

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

[Enter]

Ini. :
?

All

Ini. :
?

Capping Position

Initialize OK?

[Pause]
Init. Parameter
End

Ini. :
?

PF Resolution

Ini. :
?

Serial No.

Ini. :
?

Head Record

Ini. :
?

Wiping Record

Ini. :
?

Rubbing Record

Ini. :
?

WasteInk Record

Ini. :
?

CR Motor Record

Ini. :
?

PF Motor Record

Ini. :
?

Lever Record

Ini. :
?

Cover Record

Ini. :
?

Ink Lever Rec.

Parameter :
?

Initialize ?

Figure 5-63. Menu Transition for Parameter Initialization

Adjustment

Self-diagnostic Function

262

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3 Mechanism Adjustment

5.3.2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

5.3.1 Overview
This section describes the mechanism adjustments you need to perform when
mechanical parts have been replaced or removed. The relationship between parts and
required adjustments are as follows.

This adjustment is necessary for service operations that require you to remove/loosen
the CR Motor or CR Steel Belt. When replacing or re-installing the CR Steel Belt, you
need to confirm the tension of the CR Steel Belt. Tighten or loosen the screws on the
Driven Pulley to increase or decrease the tension.

No special tools are required.
NOTE: For details, refer to “CR Motor ASSY (p.180)”.

Table 5-29. Required Mechanism Adjustments
Item

Description

See

CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

At reinstallation of the CR Timing
Belt, adjust its tension as specified.

p.263

PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

At reinstallation of the PF Timing Belt,
adjust its tension as specified.

p.264

P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor
Mounting Plate Position Adjustment

At reinstallation of the P_THICK
sensor or P_THICK_0.3 sensor, make
adjustment for paper thickness
detection.

p.265

Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position
Adjustment

Adjust the mounting position of the
Cover Sensor.

p.267

CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position
Adjustment

Adjust the CR Encoder mounting
position on the CR Unit, using the
dedicated tool.

p.268

Cutter Positioning Adjustment

Adjust the cutter position, using the
dedicated tool.

p.269

Paper Cutting Position Check

Check the result of the adjustment
made above.

p.271

Paper Cutting Position Check

Adjust the PF Encoder position, using
the dedicated tool.

p.272

Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical
Adjustment)

Adjust the Print Head slant using the
self-diagnostic mode and by
mechanical adjustment.

p.247

Adjustment

CR Tension Screw

CR Timing Belt

CR Tension Bracket

Mechanism Adjustment

Figure 5-64. CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

263

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.3 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
This adjustment is necessary for service operations that require you to remove/loosen
the PF Motor or PF Belt. When replacing or re-installing the PF Belt, you need to
confirm the tension of the PF Belt.

Adjusting tools: Tension Gauge #F770
Standard:

2,200g ± 10%
(Tension in the PF motor mounting plate moving direction.)

NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “PF Motor (p.185)”.
Loosen the screws (x4) fixed to the PF motor mounting board and set the tension gauge
to the hole on the board and pull to the movable direction.

Fixed screws

2.200g ± 10%

Figure 5-65. PF Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

264

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.4 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate
Position Adjustment

From around the sensor, insert the thickness gauge and
set the Paper Set Lever in the paper holding position.

Once you have changed the position of the Sensor Mounting Plate on which the
P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor is mounted, make the following adjustment using the
self-diagnostic function.

Driven Roller

Adjusting tools: Thickness gauges (0.3, 0.4 / 0.8, 0.9mm)
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “P_THICK Sensor/
P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190)”.
1.
2.

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

PF Grid Roller

Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Test: Sensor”:
[SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2

Display “Sen: Paper”:
[SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2

Push down the Paper Set Lever rearward (to “release” position) and make certain that
the value on the LCD changes to “10”.

Set the 0.4-mm thickness gauge between the PF Grid Roller and the Driven Roller near
the detection arm on the paper transport path, and bring down the Paper Set Lever
toward you (to the “paper holding” position). (See Figure 5-66)
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “01”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK_0.3 Sensor (left). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “01”, tighten the screw and remove the 0.4-mm
thickness gauge.

Set the 0.3-mm thickness gauge the same way as above and make certain that the value
on the LCD is “00”.
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “00”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK_0.3 Sensor (left). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “00”, tighten the screw and check the previous step
again.

HP side

Figure 5-66. Gauge Setting Position
Detect arm
P_THICK Sensor

P_THICK_0.3 Sensor

P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Mounting Plate

Figure 5-67. P_THICK Sensor / P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Position Adjustment

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

265

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Set the 0.9-mm thickness gauge between the PF Grid Roller and the Driven Roller near
the detection arm on the paper transport path, and bring down the Paper Set Lever
toward you (to the “paper holding” position).
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “11”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK Sensor (right). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “11”, tighten the screw and remove the 0.9-mm
thickness gauge.

Set the 0.8-mm thickness gauge the same way as above and make certain that the value
on the LCD is “01”.
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “01”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK Sensor (right). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “01”, tighten the screw and check the previous step
again.

10. Turn the power switch Off, then after disconnecting the power cable, install the H Top
Cover.
Table 5-30.
Mounting Plate
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Mounting
Plate (left)

Gauge
0.3 mm
0.4 mm

P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate
(right)

–

C A U T IO N

Adjustment

0.8 mm
0.9 mm

Condition

LCD
Indication

Paper thickness
0.3 mm or below

Paper thickness
0.4 ∼ 0.6 mm

Paper thickness
0.7mm or above

Lever in “Up” position
(Paper released)

Lever in "Down" position
(Paper held)

Take care not to bend thickness gauges by, say, dropping.
This adjustment requires an accuracy to units of 0.1 mm.

Mechanism Adjustment

266

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.5 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment
When removing/replacing the Cover Assembly or the Front Cover, verify the sensor
operation using the Self-Diagnostic mode as described below.

Cover Sensor ASSY

NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “Cover Sensor ASSY”
(p.197).
1.
2.

Remove the Tube cover. See “Cover Sensor ASSY” (p.197).
Start the Self-diagnostic Function:

Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON

Display “Test: Sensor”:
[SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2

Display “Sen: Cover”:
[SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x1

Open and close the Front Cover, checking the LCD to make sure the message changes
depending on the Front Cover position.
Table 5-31. Cover Sensor Assembly Check
Front Cover

LCD Message

Open

Sen: Cover Open

Sen: Cover

If the correct message does not appear or any other message appears, verify the Cover
Sensor is installed correctly and check the operation again.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment

Figure 5-68. Adjusting the Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position

Acceptance Criterion:
The timing for cover opening is such that there is no gap between
the front cover and the printer body which permits entrance of your
finger.

Mechanism Adjustment

267

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.6 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment
This adjustment should definitely be done when the CR encoder sensor is removed or
replaced.

2 screws

Adjusting tools: CR Encoder Sensor mounting jig #F799
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “CR Encoder Sensor
ASSY (p.178)”.
1.

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)

Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out
the CR Board Unit toward the front. (See Figure 5-69)

Move the Carriage Unit to the center by manual operation.

Loosen the screw securing the CR Encoder Sensor Board, and set the CR ENC Sensor
positioning jig between the CR Encoder Sensor and the CR Guide Rail. (See Figure
5-70)

5.
6.

Push the CR Encoder Sensor to the exclusive tool side (CR Guide Rail side), then
tighten the CR Encoder Sensor mounting screw securely.

CR Board Unit

Figure 5-69. Adjusting the CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position 1/2
CR Guide Rail

Move the Carriage Unit to the right or left manually and recheck the mounting position
of the CR Encoder Sensor. (Check at 3 positions)
C H E C K
P O IN T

CR Encoder Sensor mounting jig

In this adjustment, use the CR Encoder mounting jig for exclusive
use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the CR Encoder
mounting jig designed for any other printer models.

CR Encoder Scale
(Timing Fence)
CR Encoder Sensor

Figure 5-70. Adjusting the CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position 2/2

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

268

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.7 Cutter Positioning Adjustment
This adjustment should definitely be mad if the following parts are removed.
Parts

Adjustment Items

Cutter Solenoid Assy

1. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment
2. Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment

Paper Guide L

1. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment

Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment

This adjustment is intended to install the cutter at a proper position and height relative
to the step for the cutter on the Paper Guide L. The number of adjustment items
required depends on the parts replaced. Carry out work by referring to the table above.

Adjusting tools: Cutter positioning jig #F800
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “Cutter Holder ASSY
(p.175)”.
For adjustments at replacing the Cover Sensor ASSY, make the
Paper Guide L up and down adjustment first and then make the
Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Paper Guide L up and down adjustment

Figure 5-71. Cutter Positioning Adjustment
1.

Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
NOTE: For Stylus Pro 9600, remove also the H Top Cover (p.165) and the
Tube Cover (p.193).

Open the Front Cover, and remove the cutter.

Return the CR Unit to the cap position and set the cutter positioning tool at the right
end of the Paper Guide L. (See Figure 5-73)

Loosen the screws securing the Paper Guide L.

Cut portion of I/H Frame

NOTE: 3 screws for Stylus Pro 7600 / 5 screws for Stylus Pro 9600
C H E C K
P O IN T

To loosen the screw at the left end of the Paper Guide L, pass the
screwdriver through the cut portion of the I/H Frame Top Plate.
(See Figure 5-72)
Figure 5-72. Removing the screw for Paper Guide L (at left end)

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

269

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
5.

Revision A

Slide the CR Unit onto the cutter positioning jig, shift the Paper Guide L up or down to
a position where the plate of the Cutter Holder ASSY comes in contact with the
projection in the lower part of the jig, and tighten the screw.

For replacement of Cutter Solenoid ASSY:
After completion of the Paper Guide L up and down adjustment, loosen the
four screws securing the Cutter Holder ASSY to the CR Unit, press the front
end of the Cutter Holder ASSY gently against the tool and tighten the four
screws.
(See Figure 5-74)
6.

Set the jig at the left end of the Paper Guide L and make the same adjustment and
checking as step 4 ~ 5 above.

Move the carriage to around the center and make checking again.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Cutter positioning jig

In this adjustment, use the cutter positioning jig for exclusive
use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the cutter
positioning jig designed for any other printer models.

Plate of Cutter
Holder ASSY
Projection

Figure 5-73. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment

Cutter Holder securing screws x4

The positions where to set the jig for checking and adjustment
should be the right and left ends as close to the frame as
possible.
At any position where the Paper Guide L is not supported, the
adjustment can not be made properly because of a deflection of
the Paper Guide L.
After successful completion of the adjustment above, proceed to
the next item “Paper Cutting Position Check” (p.271).

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

Cutter positioning jig

Cutter Holder ASSY

Figure 5-74. Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment

270

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.7.1 Paper Cutting Position Check
Check the paper cutting position which has been adjusted as instructed in the previous
section, by cutting paper actually.

Cutter Positioning Adjustment
1.

Set paper (minimum size: about 10 cm wide x 20 cm) in the paper path along the paper
setting position on the right side of the printer, then move the paper set lever to the
front to hold the paper.

Move the CR manually to the right edge of the paper, then lower the cutter manually.

While holding the bottom edge of the paper with one hand, cut the paper with the
cutter.

set a gauge with minimum measuring units of 0.5 mm at the edge of the cutter level
difference on the sub-platen and check if the distance from the edge of the cutter level
difference to the actual paper cutting position is within 0.5 mm (+0.1/–0.2mm).

If the measuring results are outside the standard, loosen the 3 screws holding the paper
guide L, then carry out fine adjustment of the paper guide L’s assembly position.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Paper
Carriage

The length from the edge of the cutter level difference to the
front edge of the paper where it was actually cut should be
within 0.5 mm (+0.1/–0.2mm).
If you are adjusting the assembly position of the paper guide L,
the installation screws that are loosened should be the absolute
minimum number of screws necessary to adjust the position. If
a large number of screws is loosened, the assembly position of
the paper guide L will shift a great distance from the original
adjustment position, so caution should be exercised.

0.3mm ∼ 0.5mm or
0.5mm (+0.1/-0.2mm)

Cutter

Gap between the cut
paper front edge and
the edge of cutter level

In the same way, set paper on the left side of the printer, cut the paper manually and
measure the length from the cutter level difference to the front edge of the paper. If the
measurement results are not within the standard, loosen about 3 of the screws holding
the paper guide L and carry out fine adjustment of the paper guide L’s assembly
position.

Figure 5-75. Paper Cutting Position Check

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

271

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.8 PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment
This adjustment is performed to set the distance between the PF roller shaft (grid roller)
and PF encoder sensor in the proper position. Through this adjustment, the position of
the PF encoder sensor's emitter and receptor are set properly with respect to the slits in
the loop scale for the PF motor.

Check the clearance here

Adjusting tools: PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment Tool #F798
1.

Loosen the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor, then put the round hole of the
PF Encoder mounting jig on the PF Roller Shaft and fit the notched end against
contour of the PF Encoder Sensor's emitter (outside).

Move the PF Encoder Sensor up and down so that it is in a position where the
clearance between the contour of the PF Encoder Sensor and the notch in the PF
Encoder mounting jig becomes uniform, then tighten the one screw securing the PF
Encoder Sensor.

C H E C K
P O IN T

Screw

In this adjustment, use the PF Encoder mounting jig for exclusive
use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the PF Encoder
mounting jig designed for any other printer models.

PF Encoder Sensor mounting jig

Figure 5-76. PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment

Adjustment

Mechanism Adjustment

272

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.3.9 USB ID Writing
C H E C K
P O IN T

Adjustment

Even when you have replaced the Main Board, there is no need of
new setting of the USB ID, since the USB ID is backed up if
parameter backup can be executed.
When new setting is to be performed, use the dedicated service
utility.

Mechanism Adjustment

273

CHAPTER

MAINTENANCE

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

6.1 Overview

C A U T IO N

This section explains necessary maintenance items and their details for this product.
Basically for this product, service technicians are required to visit the user’s location
where the EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is used, and perform necessary maintenance/
service on-site while following the precautions below. Service technicians have to be
extra careful not to cause any accident to the product or the user’s environment.

W A R N IN G

Since the power switch is mounted on the secondary circuit of

the power supply circuit, unless otherwise specified, always
turn off the printer using the power switch. After all moving
parts have stopped, wait several seconds and then disconnect
the power cable from the AC plug socket to prevent electric
shock or circuit damage during service operations.
The cover open sensor for detecting the open/close condition of
the front cover has an interlock switch that functions as a safety
device. Therefore, it is prohibited to turn off this switch.

A lithium battery is installed on the MAIN Board of this
printer. Be sure to observe the following instructions
when servicing the battery:

Keep the battery away from any metal.
Do not install the battery in the wrong direction. (This may cause
burning or explosion.)

Do not heat the battery or put it near fire.
Do not set the C472 MAIN board directly on top of any object
which is conductive.

Be careful not to let ink get into your eyes or your skin. If ink
gets in your eye, rinse them immediately with water.

Maintenance

Overview

When performing service and maintenance operations,
sufficient space should be assured surrounding the place where
the work is performed.
The printer should be set in a place where there is no vibration,
and where it is level and stable.
This machine is extremely heavy, so adequate caution should
be exercised when handling it. (If you are taking or reinstalling
the body and stand, there should be 2 or more persons doing
the work.)
If operations are performed which involve the removal of ink
system parts, there is danger of the product or the floor, etc. in
the place where it is installed becoming soiled, so sheets, etc.
should be spread on the floor, etc. during the work o removing
parts related to the ink channels.
If you are handling electrical circuit boards, to prevent
destruction of the elements by static electricity, the elements on
the board should not be touched with bare hands. If necessary,
take the necessary measures to prevent static discharge, such as
wearing a ground strap, when performing such work.
If you are removing the various covers and operating the
printer in that state, adequate caution should be used so as not
to be injured by high speed operating parts such as the PS fan.
The cutter blade is extremely sharp, care should be taken not to
be injured by it.
The an ultra-hardened blade is used for the cutter blade, and
materially, this item is extremely brittle, so it should not be
bumped against any metal or other parts on the printer when
handled.
If the printer that has already been installed needs to be packed
and transported again, first make certain that the print head
has been capped properly with the power to the printer turned
off. Then remove all the ink cartridges and install all the
packing materials as referred to in the Start-Up Guide or
Assembly and Setup Guide supplied with the printer.

275

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

6.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Items and Product Life
Information
Periodic Maintenance Items
The printer uses sensors and counters to determine when consumable items need to be
replaced. When a consumable part has reached its predetermined end-of-life according
to the corresponding counter, a message appears. See Table 6-1 for parts which require
periodic replacement.

Product Life Information
Table 6-1 shows the product life about the printer body, each mechanism and various
parts. Information regarding to the product life can be checked by the following way.

Panel Setting: “Printer Status Menu”
The amount of ink remaining is indicated on the LCD. (“F*****E” - F = full, E =
empty, and each asterisk * represents a percentage of the total ink.)
Also, the counters which record these values can be initialized by “Maintenance
Mode 2”.
C A U T IO N

Do not perform the counter initialization without replacing the
corresponding parts and checking their operation. Since the
counters for “Waste Ink Life” and “Ink Remaining Quantity”
influence printer operations, do not clear them unnecessarily.

Maintenance

Overview

276

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 6-1. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 - Lives of Periodically Replaced Components and Maintenance

Print Volume
(# of sheet)

Product Life
(Specification)

Cutter
SPro7600/9600

1000 pages

Film media*7

2000 pages

Coated paper*7

Maintenance Tank
SPro9600
SPro7600

Cleaning Unit
SPro9600
SPro7600

CR Motor
SPro9600
SPro7600

PF Motor
SPro9600
SPro7600

Print Head
SPro9600
SPro7600

28 Billion shots/nozzle

–

5000p*1

5000 pages

8000p*1
10000 pages
11000p*2
18000p*2
20000 pages

SPro9600

50000 pages

SPro7600

20000p
2.5Million passes*3

50000p
3.25Million
passes*4

Warning message

–

MAINTENANCE TANK
ALMOST FULL

Error message
MAINTENANCE
nnnn
REQ
SERVICE REQ nnnnnnnn

–

MAINTENANCE TANK FULL *6

–

0040

0002

–

0020

–

00000101

–

Reset operation

–

(Counter cleared automatically by replacing it with new ♦Counter clear
one)
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS
CLEANER
Paper cutter
Maintenance Tank
1. Pump&Cap Assy
(CRU)
(CRU)
2. Flushing Box
3. Wiper

Parts to be replaced

Required adjustments

Maintenance

(Not required)

Overview

♦Counter clear
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS CR
MOTOR
At first SR: (& check Ink tubes/
FFC conditions)
1. CR Motor
2. Driven Pulley
At second SR:
1. CR Motor
2. Driven Pulley
3. Ink tubes
4. FFC
1. CR Belt Tension ADJ
2. Adj: Bi-D
3. Adj: Uni-D
4. Adj: Sponge Pos.

♦Counter clear
♦Counter clear
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS PF MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS
MOTOR
HEAD
*(as required)
• Check the condition of loop scale
(worn, etc.)
• Check the condition of PF
Encoder (foreign matters or dust) *(as required)

1. PF Belt Tension ADJ
2. Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B

1. Adj: Input Rank
2. INK CHARGING
3. Adj: Head Slant
4. Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B
5. Adj: Sponge Pos.
6. Adj: Bi-D
7. Adj: Uni-D

277

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Note : In the table above, the values by white characters with black background represent the
specified lives and the values by italic characters with bold frame represent standard
lives (can vary with the conditions under which the printer is actually used).
Note "*1": Continuous printing with “Plain paper / Speed” mode on B0 size paper.
"*2": Continuous printing with “Plain paper / Speed” mode on A1 size paper.
"*3": Print in 360x360/MF/Bi-D mode on B0 paper.
"*4": Print in 360x360/MF/Bi-D mode on A1 paper.
"*5": The life of PF motor is counted based on the paper feeding distance at printing
operation (23000 m).
"*6": Error condition and the printer is not ready to print until the error is cleared by
replacing the maintenance tank to new one.
"*7": EPSON standard media and the cutting operation is made in “3 steps cutting” mode.

Maintenance

Overview

278

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service
Operations
Check the following items during printer maintenance/service and perform any
necessary operations.
Table 6-2. Items to be Checked During Maintenance/Service
Items

Check Points

Remedy

Lower Paper Guide and
the surface of the
Subplaten

Make sure no paper, dust, or
foreign objects are attached or
have accumulated.

Cleaning (If there is an ink
stain, wipe with dry, clean
cloth after cleaning the ink
stain with damp cloth.)

Timing Fence (Slit plate
for CR encoder
detection.)

Is there any accumulation or
adhesion of paper dust or
foreign matter?

Clean
If there is any damage,
replace the part.

Rail on the CR guide
frame

Make sure there are no foreign
objects attached.

Cleaning

P_REAR sensor and
P_FRONT sensor surface

Make sure no paper, dust, or
foreign objects are attached or
have accumulated.

Cleaning

Maintenance

Overview

279

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

6.2 Lubrication and Glue

6.2.1 Lubricating the CR Guide Rail

In this printer, as necessary, the lubricants specified below should be used for oiling
and adhesion during disassembly and assembly operations.
Table 6-3. Grease and Glue Application
Type

Grease

Glue

Name

Amount

Company

Part #

Super-Multi Oil
#32

n/a

Idemitsu

n/a

G-26
(Molicoat EM60L)

40g
(n/a)

EPSON
(Dow Corning
Asia)

1,000g

EPSON

Screw lock

Location
Carriage rail bearings

Lubricant: Super-Multi Oil #32 (Idemitsu)
Apply lubricant to the four points as shown below on the CR Guide Rail (carriage
roller running surface).
C H E C K
P O IN T

Before applying lubricant, clean the surface.

B702600001 Other parts on mechanism
B730200200 Screw lock (blue)
CR Guide Rail

C A U T IO N

Do not apply any other oils, lubricants, or glues than those
described in this manual; otherwise printer parts may be damaged
or their useful life may be shortened.

Figure 6-1. Lubricating Positions on the CR Guide Rail

Maintenance

Lubrication and Glue

280

CHAPTER

APPENDIX

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

7.1 Connectors

Table 7-1. Main Board Connectors List (continued)

Main Board (C472 MAIN)
Table 7-1. Main Board Connectors List
CN.No.

Pins

Color

CN1

White

CN2
CN3

Connected to

Remarks

P/S board

Lock type

PANEL

FFC, lock type

H-UDI36
Yellow D/A_OUT

CN4

CN5

ROM_DIMM

CN6

CSIC

FFC

CN7

S_I/O(DEBUGER)

(Not used)
FFC, lock type

Red

CN8

CR_FFC1

CR_FFC3

FFC, lock type

CN10

CR_FFC2

FFC, lock type

CN11

IEEE1284 (parallel port)

CN12

USB

CN13

TYPE_B

CN14

White

CR_MOT

Lock type, with relay connector

CN15

White

PF_MOT

Lock type, with relay connector

White

PF_ENC

CN17

White

PUMP_MOT

With relay connector

Blue

P/S_FAN

CN19

Black

FAN1

With relay connector

CN20

Yellow FAN2

With relay connector

CN21

Red

FAN3

CN22

Blue

P_THICK0.3

CN23

Yellow COVER_L

CN24

White

CN25

Black

CN26

Red

P_THICK

CN27

Black

P_REAR

Yellow P_FRONT

CN28

4
4

Red

Color

Connected to
USB2.0

Remarks
Right side (AC side)

CN36

IEEE1394

(Not used)

CN37

HDD_PS

(Not used)

Panel Unit
Table 7-2. Panel Unit Connectors List
CN.No.

Pins

CN1

Color

Connected to
Main Board (CN7)

Remarks
FCC, lock type

C472 CR Board

* Stylus Pro 9600 only

CN.No.

Pins

Color

Connected to

CN1

Main Board (CN8)

CN2

Main Board (CN10)

FFC, lock type

CN3

Print Head1

FFC, lock type

CN4

Print Head2

FFC, lock type

CN5

Black

P_Edge Sensor

CN6

White

CR Encoder Sensor

CN7

White

Cutter Solenoid

CN8

Black

Main Board (CN10)

Remarks
FFC, lock type

FFC, lock type

CR_ORG
I/H_LEVER

(Not used)

HD_SLID

CN30

CN31

White

H_FAN

CN33

White

RESET

Appendix

Table 7-3. C472 CR Board Connectors List
(Not used)

CN18

CN29

Pins

CN35

(Not used)

CN9

CN16

CN.No.

ROLL_UNIT (option unit)

* Stylus Pro 9600 only

Connectors

282

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

C472 SUB-B Board
Table 7-4. C472 SUB-B Board Connectors List
CN.No.

Pins

CN1

Color

Connected to

CN2

CN3

CSIC Relay Board (Black)

FFC

CN4

CSIC Relay Board (Light Black)

FFC

CN5

CSIC Relay Board (Cyan)

FFC
FFC

Main Board (CN6)
White

Remarks
FFC

I/H Lever Sensor

CN6

CSIC Relay Board (Light Cyan)

CN7

CSIC Relay Board (Magenta)

FFC

CN8

CSIC Relay Board (Light Magenta)

FFC

CN9

CSIC Relay Board (Yellow)

FFC

CN10

Maintenance Tank Relay Board

FFC

Power Supply Board
Table 7-5. Power Supply Board Connector List
CN.No.

Pins

Color

CN001

White

Main Board (CN1)

Lock type

CN301

White

AC Inlet

Lock type

Appendix

Connected to

Remarks

Connectors

283

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Figure 7-1. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Connectors

Appendix

Connectors

284

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

7.2 Component Layout
Will be established by the next revision.

Appendix

Component Layout

285

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

7.3 Circuit Diagrams
The circuit diagrams of the following circuit boards are shown on the following pages:

C472 MAIN BOARD
C472SUB BOARD
C472SUB-B BOARD

Appendix

Circuit Diagrams

286

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

7.4 Exploded Diagrams

Appendix

Exploded Diagrams

292

127
110

120

108
100
111

109
107
112

109
113

126

115

121
101
128
114

122

116

117
X
118

102

123

119

131

103
103
104

129
130

106
105
125
124

124

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.1

Rev.01

C472-CASE-011

158x 6
157
150 x 10

159
160 x 6

161

153

161

154
B

152

153
155
152

151
151

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.2

156

Rev.01

C472-CASE-021

202

203
D

Q
200
including
201,202

201

W
K
A

X
U

C
L

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.3

Rev.01

C472-ELEC-011

301
300
Y

W
K
A

X
U

C
L

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.4

Rev.01

C472-POWE-011

500

507 C

501
502

503
505
506
510

504

D
509

508

511

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.5

Rev.01

C472-MECH-011

556
550
554

557

F
G
551

E
555

552

558

559

563
553
568
569
562

568
569

567
568
569

556

561
560

570

568
569
568
569

570

568
569

570

568
569

570

564

570
570

565

570
H
566

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.6

Rev.01

C472-MECH-021

605

606

608

607
L

602
600

609x 5
604
620
601
M

610

618
617
611
616
615

603 x 34
613
O
N

606

612

PX-7000 / EPSONSTYLUS PRO 7600 No.7

614

Rev.01

C472-MECH-031

619

669
670

671
672

650

655
661
656
660
659
661
652 x 8
658

662
663

667
657 x 11
651

653
668

654
P
665

667

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.8

Rev.01

C472-MECH-041

664

666

709
705

706
708

706 707
708
708
700
703

704

710

712
701
Q

702
711

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.9

Rev.01

C472-MECH-051

753
750

R
751
S
P
T
752

754
755

756 x 7
757x 7

761

760

758

755
763

762

759

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.10

Rev.01

C472-MECH-061

G
I

813

809

810

811
808
V
807
812

806
805
800
804
801

802

803

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.11

Rev.01

C472-MECH-071

850
851

856

851

853

855

853

854

PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.12

Rev.01

C472-MECH-081

127
110

108
120
109

100

107
111

109

112

113
126

115

121
101
114

122

117

128 116

123

118

102

119
131
103
103

106

104

129

125

105

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.1

Rev.01

C473-CASE-011

120

158x 8
159
160 x 11

161
150 x 10
157

A
161
154
153

161

152

155
153

152
153
B
152

162

156

151 x 4

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.2

Rev.01

C473-CASE-021

Y
202

203
D

Q
200
including
201,202

201

W
K
A

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.3

Rev.01

X
U

C473-ELEC-011

301

Y
300
Y

W
K
A

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.4

Rev.01

X
U

C473-POWE-011

500

501
502

507 C
503
505
506
510

504

D
509

508

511

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.5

Rev.01

C473-MECH-011

556
550
554

557

G
E

551

555

552

558

559

563
553
568
569
562

568
569

567
568
569

556

561
560

570

568
569
568
569

570

568
569

570

568
569

570

564

570
570

565

570
H
566

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.6

Rev.01

C473-MECH-021

605

606

608

607
L

602

600

609 x 2
604

620

601

610

J
618
619
611

617

616
615

603 x 32

613
O
N

614

606

612

PX-9000 / EPSONSTYLUS PRO 9600 No.7

Rev.01

C473-MECH-031

669
670

671
672

650

661

655
656
659

660
661

652 x 8
666
662
663
651

653

654
658

668
657 x 14

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.8

Rev.01

P
665

C473-MECH-041

664

709
705

706

708

706

707
708

708

700
703

704

710

712
701
Q

702
711

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.9

Rev.01

C473-MECH-051

G
I

813

809

810

811
808
V
807
812

806
805
800

804
801
803
802

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.11

Rev.01

C473-MECH-071

850
851

856

851

853

855

853

854

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.12

Rev.01

C473-MECH-081

# 909

SCREW SET

900

901

902

X5
904
905

907

903

908

902

906

903

PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.13

Rev.01

C473-MECH-091

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

7.5 ASP List (Parts List)

Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)
Ref No.
128

7.5.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600

Part Name
LABEL

129

LABEL

130

LABEL

Ref No.
100

131

LABEL

L SIDE COVER ASSY.

150

FCC CLIP

101

I/H COVER ASSY.

151

RUBBER FOOT

102

I/H COVER ASSY.

152

FAN DUCT

103

PLASTIC STOPPER E5

153

VACUUM FAN

104

FULONT COVER FUICRUM PIN L

154

VACUUM FAN 2 CABLE

105

FRONT COVER ASSY.

155

VACUUM FAN 1 CABLE

106

FRONT COVER SUPPLEMENT

156

CR LOCKER ASSY.

107

ROLL TRAY L ASSY.

157

P REAR SENSOR ASSY.

108

H TOP COVER ASSY.

158

FLAT CLAMP(FCR-30-V0)

109

CATCH

159

RECYCL CLAMP(RLWS-1515TL-V0)

110

TOP COVER

160

RECYCL CLAMP

111

DAMPER DISK(TOPCOVER)

161

SILENT DUCT

112

UNDULATE WASHER(TOPCOVER)

200

BOARD ASSY.

113

PANEL UNIT ASSY.(OVERSEAS)

201

GROUNDING PLATE

114

BRANK PANEL

202

GUIDE

115

LEVER BRIND CAP

203

GROUNDING PLATE

116

PRSSURE LEVER KNOB

500

MOUNTING PLATE

117

PANEL TAPE CABLE

501

SCALE

118

ROLL TRAY R ASSY.

502

TAPE

119

R SIDE COVER ASSY.

503

ENCODER FLANG

120

LABEL

504

X REDUCTION BELT

121

LABEL

505

BOARD ASSY.

122

LABEL

506

SLIT GUIDE

123

LABEL

507

PF ENCODER CABLE

124

LABEL

508

PF MOTOR

125

LABEL

509

PF MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY.

126

LABEL

510

EDGE SADDLE

127

LOGO PLATE 13X54

511

PARTITION PLATE

Appendix

Part Name

ASP List (Parts List)

317

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)

Ref No.
550

CUTTER CAP

Ref No.
611

551

CUTTER SOLENOID SPRING

612

PRESS LEVER SPRING

552

CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY.

613

HD SLIDE ASSY.

553

CUTTER SPRING

614

CR HP CABLE ASSY.

554

P EDGE SENSOR ASSY.

615

CABLE CLAMP

555

EDGE SENSOR BASE ASSY.

616

EDGE CLAMP

556

FG CABLE

617

PRESS IDLE GEAR

557

CR ENC ASSY.

618

PRESS SHAFT TRAY

558

CR LOCK KICKER

619

PRESS TRANSMISSION GEAR

559

TILAP

620

PRESS LEVER

560

H ADJUST LEVER B

650

OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.

561

H ADJUST LEVER

651

PAPER GUIDE L2

562

DAMPER STOPPER

652

SUB PRATEN B

563

DAMPER POSITION BOAD

653

SUB PRATEN A

564

PRINT HEAD

654

PARTITION PLATE P GUIDE L

565

HEAD TAPE CABLE 1

655

PAETITION PLATE L

566

HEAD TAPE CABLE 2

656

POROUS PAD CAP B

567

SLIDE GEAR

657

PROUSPAD C

568

CONNECTING SCREW

658

PAETITION PLATE R ASSY.

569

O RING

659

TAPE

570

DAMPER ASSY.

660

POROUS PAD

600

CR MOTOR

661

PAPER GUIDE WIRE

601

CR MOTOR CABLE ASSY.1

662

POROUS PAD

602

T FENCE SPRING

663

TAPE

603

PRSSURE SPRING

664

PCB ASSY.I/C

604

T FENCE

665

MT FFC1

605

P THICK SENSOR CABLE ASSY

666

POROUS PAD ASSY.

606

PHOTO SENSOR

667

SCREW MANUAL CUTTER

607

P THICK2 SENNSOR CABLE ASSY.

668

LABEL

608

CR BELT

669

LABEL

609

MINI CLAMP

670

LABEL

610

CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.

671

LABEL

Appendix

Part Name

ASP List (Parts List)

Part Name
TENSION SPRING

318

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)

Ref No.
672

LABEL

Ref No.
804

700

FLUSHING BOX ASSY.

805

TUBE

701

PUMP MOTER JANCTION CABLE

806

TUBE

702

TR CONNECTER

807

TUBE FILME

703

POROUS PAD

808

SUS SUPPORT

704

CLEANER

809

FILME

705

PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 1

810

FLAT CORE(SSC-40-12)

706

POMP SHAFT STOPPER

811

FILME

707

PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 2

812

CR FFC 1 ASSY.

708

PG IDLE GEAR A

813

BOARD ASSY.

709

PG IDLE GEAR B

850

FLANGE

710

PUMP CAP ASSY.

851

ADAPTER

711

MOTOR

852

ROLL SHAFT

712

CAP ASSY.

853

RETAINING RING(B150300611)

750

I/H INK FFC ASSY.

854

STOPPER SHAFT

751

BOARD ASSY.

855

FLANGE

752

CSIC FFC 1

856

LABEL

753

CLAMP

300

P/S BOARD ASSY.

754

COVER SW CABLE ASSY.1

301

DC CABLE ASSY

755

DETECTOR

756

CONNECTING SCREW

757

O RING

758

I/H LEVER SW CABLE ASSY.1

759

I/C LOCK LEVER KNOB

760

HOLDER ASSY.

761

FRAME ASSY.

762

FAN GEAR

763

LEVER

800

TUBE

801

TUBE

802

TUBE

803

TUBE

Appendix

Part Name

ASP List (Parts List)

Part Name
TUBE

319

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

7.5.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600

Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)

Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600
Ref No.
100

L SIDE COVER ASSY.

101

I/H COVER ASSY.

102

I/H COVER ASSY.

103

PLASTIC STOPPER E5

104

FULONT COVER FUICRUM PIN L

105

FRONT COVER ASSY.

106

FRONT COVER SUPPLEMENT

107

ROLL TRAY L ASSY.

108

H TOP COVER ASSY.

109

CATCH

110

TOP COVER

111

DAMPER DISK(TOPCOVER)

112

UNDULATE WASHER(TOPCOVER)

113

PANEL UNIT ASSY.(OVERSEAS)

114

BRANK PANEL

115

LEVER BRIND CAP

116

PRSSURE LEVER KNOB

117

PANEL TAPE CABLE

118

ROLL TRAY R ASSY.

119

R SIDE COVER ASSY.

120

LABEL

121

LABEL

122

LABEL

123

LABEL

125

LABEL

126

LABEL

127

LOGO PLATE 13X54

128

LABEL

129

LABEL

131

LABEL

150

FCC CLIP

Appendix

Part Name

ASP List (Parts List)

Ref No.
151

HANDLE

Part Name

152

FAN DUCT

153

VACUUM FAN

154

VACUUM FAN1 CABLE ASSY.2

155

VACUUM FAN2 CABLE ASSY.2

156

CR LOCKER ASSY.

157

P REAR SENSOR ASSY.

158

FLAT CLAMP(FCR-30-V0)

159

RECYCL CLAMP(RLWS-1515TL-V0)

160

RECYCL CLAMP

161

SILENT DUCT

162

VACUUM FAN3 CABLE ASSY.2

200

BOARD ASSY.

201

GROUNDING PLATE

202

GUIDE

203

GROUNDING PLATE

500

MOUNTING PLATE

501

SCALE

502

TAPE

503

ENCODER FLANG

504

X REDUCTION BELT

505

BOARD ASSY.

506

SLIT GUIDE

507

PF ENCODER CABLE ASSY.2

508

PF MOTOR

509

PF MOTOR CABLE ASSY.2

510

EDGE SADDLE

511

PARTITION PLATE

550

CUTTER CAP

551

CUTTER SOLENOID SPRING

552

CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY.

553

CUTTER SPRING

320

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)

Ref No.
554

P EDGE SENSOR ASSY.

Part Name

Ref No.
615

CABLE CLAMP

Part Name

555

EDGE SENSOR BASE ASSY.

616

EDGE CLAMP

556

FG CABLE

617

PRESS IDLE GEAR

557

CR ENC ASSY.

618

PRESS SHAFT TRAY

558

CR LOCK KICKER

619

PRESS TRANSMISSION GEAR

559

TILAP

620

PRESS LEVER

560

H ADJUST LEVER B

650

OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.

561

H ADJUST LEVER

651

PAPER GUIDE L2

562

DAMPER STOPPER

652

SUB PRATEN B

563

DAMPER POSITION BOAD

653

SUB PRATEN A

564

PRINT HEAD

654

PARTITION PLATE

565

HEAD TAPE CABLE 1

655

PARTITION PLATE L

566

HEAD TAPE CABLE 2

656

POROUS PAD CAP B

567

SLIDE GEAR

657

PROUSPAD C

568

CONNECTING SCREW

658

PAETITION PLATE R ASSY.

569

O RING

659

TAPE

570

DAMPER ASSY.

660

POROUS PAD

600

CR MOTOR

661

PAPER GUIDE WIRE

601

CR MOTER CABLE ASSY.2

662

POROUS PAD

602

T FENCE SPRING

663

TAPE

603

PRSSURE SPRING

664

PCB ASSY.I/C

604

SCALE

665

M.T FFC2

605

P THICK SENSOR CABLE ASSY

666

POROUS PAD ASSY.

606

PHOTO SENSOR

668

LABEL

607

P THICK2 SENNSOR CABLE ASSY.

669

LABEL

608

CR FFC 1 ASSY.

670

LABEL

609

MINI CLAMP

671

LABEL

610

CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.

672

LABEL

611

TENSION SPRING

700

FLUSHING BOX ASSY.

612

PRESS LEVER SPRING

701

PUMP MOTER JANCTION CABLE

613

HD SLIDE ASSY.

702

TR CONNECTER

614

CR HP CABLE ASSY.

703

POROUS PAD

Appendix

ASP List (Parts List)

321

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)
Ref No.
704

Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)

CLEANER

Part Name

Ref No.
809

FILME

Part Name

705

PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 1

810

FLAT CORE(SSC-40-12)

706

POMP SHAFT STOPPER

811

FILME

707

PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 2

812

CR FFC 1 ASSY.

708

PG IDLE GEAR A

813

BOARD ASSY.

709

PG IDLE GEAR B

850

FLANGE

710

PUMP CAP ASSY.

851

ADAPTER

711

MOTOR

853

RETAINING RING(B150300611)

712

CAP ASSY.

854

STOPPER SHAFT

750

I/H INK FFC ASSY.

855

FLANGE

751

BOARD ASSY.

856

LABEL

752

CSIC FFC 2

900

PACKING BOX ASSY.(W)

753

CLAMP

901

STAND L ASSY.

754

COVER SW CABLE ASSY.2

902

CASTER (NON STOPPER)

755

DETECTOR

903

CASTER (STOPPER)

756

CONNECTING SCREW

904

TRAY HOOK S ASSY.

757

O RING

905

TRAY HOOK L ASSY.

758

I/H LEVER SW CABLE ASSY.1

906

OUTLET TRAY

759

I/C LOCK LEVER KNOB

907

STAND STAY

760

HOLDER ASSY.

908

STAND R ASSY.

761

FRAME ASSY.

909

SCREW ASSY.

762

FAN GEAR

300

P/S BOARD ASSY.

763

LEVER

301

DC CABLE ASSY

800

TUBE

801

TUBE

802

TUBE

803

TUBE

804

TUBE

805

TUBE

806

TUBE

807

TUBE FILME

808

SUS SUPPORT

Appendix

ASP List (Parts List)

322

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 322 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePage Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:6edb428c-7272-4efc-b606-71cfe8ca064f Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) Create Date : 2002:05:27 12:56:13Z Modify Date : 2004:06:23 15:46:40-04:00 Metadata Date : 2004:06:23 15:46:40-04:00 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 6.0 Document ID : uuid:4a14174b-88b2-4b97-89bc-3747db68cf3b Format : application/pdf Creator : Toshiki Yamada Title : StylusPro7600_9600_A.book Author : Toshiki Yamada
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Epson Printer 7600 Users Manual StylusPro7600_9600_A

9600 to the manual 0c571298-6899-4cf2-95ab-2b8a3cf7f957

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation